Features and Specifications Manual

Features and Specifications Manual
Features and Specifications Manual
Doc. No. 10534
Issue 1.0
NEC shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential or incidental damages
about the use of this equipment, manual or any related materials.
The information in this technical manual is advisory in nature and is subject to
change. NEC may make improvements and changes in the products described in
this manual without notice.
Changes is periodically made to the information in the new editions. Efforts have
been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are correct. Should you find
any error, NEC welcomes your comments to improve our communications. Please
contact NEC on 1800 036 136.
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice at the discretion
of NEC Australia Pty Ltd.
This document has been prepared for the use of employees and customers of NEC
Australia Pty Ltd and may not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC
Australia Pty Ltd.
Copyright © 2007
NEC Australia Pty Ltd
633 – 647 Springvale Road
Mulgrave Vic 3170
Preface
Before Reading this Manual
This manual provides detailed information for each of the system’s features. If you are not familiar
with the features, the Table of Contents provides a list of the features and where to find the feature
within the manual.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC UNIVERGE SV8100 System.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system is a feature-rich key system that provides many features including
Automatic Call Distribution, IP Station and IP Trunk support, ISDN compatibility, PBX compatibility,
TAPI compatibility, Voice over Internet Protocol and Uniform Call Distribution.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system meets the customer needs today, and as business expands, the
system can be expanded to grow as well.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to
install and support the system. This preface describes these manuals.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
UNIVERGE SV8100 General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.
SV8100/SV8300 System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed
instructions for installing the SV8100/SV8300 Chassis, Blades, Multiline Terminals, and optional
equipment.
UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 system using a Multiline
Terminal or PC.
Regulatory
SECTION 1
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI)
W A RN I N G
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
SECTION 2
INCIDENCE OF HARM
If the System is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone network.
The Telephone system should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be
determined and until repair has been made. If this is not done, the Network Provider
may temporarily disconnect the service.
SECTION 3
HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
The NEC Multiline Terminals that are provided for this system are hearing aid
compatible. The manufacturer of Single Line Telephones for use with the system must
provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with ACA Technical Standards.
SECTION 4
SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
W A RN I N G
This equipment must only be installed and maintained by service
personnel.
In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs must be performed by an
authorised dealer of NEC Australia Pty Ltd or by NEC Australia Pty Ltd. It is
the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to
one of NEC Australia Pty Ltd authorised agents or to NEC Australia Pty Ltd.
SECTION 5
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
This equipment has been tested to comply with all relevant ACA Technical
Standards.
To be compliant to Australian Standard ACIF S004:2001, Warning: Small metal objects
such as staples and pins may be caught and held in the earpiece and that the user
should be aware and careful to prevent any accident from such an event.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 KSU must be permanently connected to protective earth.
SECTION 6
VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING
C AU T I O N
The use of monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve or record telephone conversations or other sounds activities,
whether or not contemporaneous with its transmission may be illegal in
certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advise should be
sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any
telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of
notification to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a
beep tone or other notification methods, or require the consent of all parties
to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone
conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
SECTION 7
MUSIC ON HOLD
IMPORTANT NOTE
In accordance with Australian Copyright Law, a license may be required
from The Australian Performing Right Association Limited (APRA), or other
similar organisation, when radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through
the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication system. NEC
Australia Pty Ltd hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to
obtain such a license.
SECTION 8
UL REGULATORY INFORMATION
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and complies with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment UL 1459.
SECTION 9
BATTERY DISPOSAL AND SAFETY
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of
these batteries from system chassis, blades or external battery boxes, the
maintenance personnel must comply with applicable Federal and State regulations
regarding proper disposal procedures.
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
CD-CP00-XX
Lithium
1
CD-VM00
Lithium
1
CHS2U INT BATT (Optional)
Sealed Lead Acid
2
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
(Optional)
Sealed Lead Acid
1 BAT Box = 3 sets of [2 x 12V-7AH]
1 BAT Box = 6 sets of [2 x 12V-7AH]
1 BAT Box = 9 sets of [2 x 12V-7AH]
1 BAT Box = 12 sets of [2 x 12V-7AH]
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH!
THE PRODUCT YOU PURCHASED CONTAINS A LITHIUM OR SEALED
LEAD ACID BATTERY. LITHIUM OR SEALED LEAD ACID BATTERIES
MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF IN AN
ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of disposable batteries with the municipal solid
waste stream may be PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid
waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound
collection, recycling and disposal of the battery.
C AU T I O N
Danger of explosion if batteries are incorrectly installed. Replace only with
the same or equivalent type of battery as indicated throughout this manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Regulatory
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1
General Information ................................................................................ 1-1
Section 2
Multiline Terminals used with the System ................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2
Features
Section 1
About This Chapter ................................................................................. 2-1
Section 2
Important Notes ........................................................................................... 2-2
Section 3
IPK II to UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Comparison List .............................. 2-3
Section 4
Features ...................................................................................................... 2-9
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified ....................................... 2-11
Account Code Entry .......................................................................... 2-17
Alarm ............................................................................................... 2-23
Alarm Reports .................................................................................. 2-27
Alphanumeric Display ....................................................................... 2-35
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) ............................................ 2-37
Ancillary Device Connection .............................................................. 2-45
Answer Hold ..................................................................................... 2-49
Answer Key ...................................................................................... 2-53
Attendant Call Queuing ..................................................................... 2-57
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ...................................................... 2-59
Automatic Release ............................................................................ 2-87
Automatic Route Selection ................................................................ 2-91
Background Music .......................................................................... 2-113
Barge-In ......................................................................................... 2-115
Battery Backup – System Memory .................................................. 2-121
Battery Backup – System Power ..................................................... 2-123
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys .......................................................... 2-125
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
i
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys ................................................................... 2-131
Call Duration Timer ......................................................................... 2-137
Call Forwarding – Centrex .............................................................. 2-139
Call Forwarding – Park and Page .................................................... 2-145
Call Forwarding .............................................................................. 2-149
Call Forwarding with Follow Me ....................................................... 2-161
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise .......................................................... 2-165
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override ......................................... 2-179
Call Monitoring ............................................................................... 2-181
Call Redirect ................................................................................... 2-187
Call Waiting/Camp-On .................................................................... 2-191
Callback ......................................................................................... 2-197
Caller ID Call Return ....................................................................... 2-201
Caller ID ......................................................................................... 2-205
Central Office Calls, Answering ....................................................... 2-219
Central Office Calls, Placing ........................................................... 2-229
Class of Service ............................................................................. 2-239
Clock/Calendar Display ................................................................... 2-257
CO Message Waiting Indication ...................................................... 2-261
Code Restriction ............................................................................. 2-265
Code Restriction Override ............................................................... 2-275
Code Restriction, Dial Block ............................................................ 2-283
Conference ..................................................................................... 2-287
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release ......................................... 2-295
Continued Dialing ........................................................................... 2-299
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only) ............................................. 2-303
Cordless Telephone Connection ..................................................... 2-321
Data Line Security .......................................................................... 2-337
Delayed Ringing ............................................................................. 2-339
Department Calling ......................................................................... 2-343
Department Step Calling ................................................................. 2-353
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone ............................................................ 2-357
Dial Tone Detection ........................................................................ 2-359
Dialing Number Preview ................................................................. 2-363
Digital Trunk Clocking ..................................................................... 2-365
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ............................................................. 2-371
Direct Inward Line (DIL) .................................................................. 2-387
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) .............................................. 2-393
ii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console ........................................... 2-409
Directed Call Pickup ....................................................................... 2-417
Directory Dialing ............................................................................. 2-421
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns ................................. 2-425
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................ 2-433
Door Box ........................................................................................ 2-439
Drop Key ........................................................................................ 2-445
Dterm Cordless II Terminal ............................................................... 2-449
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal ........................................................ 2-469
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals ..................................................... 2-487
Facsimile CO Branch Connection ................................................... 2-507
Flash .............................................................................................. 2-511
Flexible System Numbering ............................................................ 2-515
Flexible Timeouts ........................................................................... 2-533
Forced Trunk Disconnect ................................................................ 2-543
Group Call Pickup ........................................................................... 2-547
Group Listen ................................................................................... 2-551
Handset Mute ................................................................................. 2-553
Handsfree and Monitor ................................................................... 2-559
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing ............................ 2-563
Headset Operation .......................................................................... 2-567
Hold ............................................................................................... 2-571
Hot Key-Pad ................................................................................... 2-579
Hotel/Motel ..................................................................................... 2-583
Hotline ............................................................................................ 2-595
Howler Tone Service ....................................................................... 2-601
Intercom ......................................................................................... 2-603
IP Multiline Station (SIP) ................................................................. 2-609
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) ....................................................... 2-617
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol ..................................... 2-631
IP Trunk – H.323 ............................................................................ 2-645
ISDN Compatibility .......................................................................... 2-655
K-CCIS – IP .................................................................................... 2-675
K-CCIS – T1 ................................................................................... 2-679
Last Number Redial ........................................................................ 2-683
Licensing ........................................................................................ 2-687
Line Preference .............................................................................. 2-695
Long Conversation Cutoff ............................................................... 2-699
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
iii
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Maintenance ................................................................................... 2-703
Meet Me Conference ...................................................................... 2-705
Meet Me Paging ............................................................................. 2-709
Meet Me Paging Transfer ............................................................... 2-713
Memo Dial ...................................................................................... 2-719
Message Waiting ............................................................................ 2-723
Microphone Cutoff .......................................................................... 2-729
Mobile Extension ............................................................................ 2-733
Multiple Trunk Types ...................................................................... 2-747
Music on Hold ................................................................................. 2-763
Name Storing ................................................................................. 2-771
Night Service .................................................................................. 2-775
Off-Hook Signaling ......................................................................... 2-785
One-Touch Calling .......................................................................... 2-791
Operator ......................................................................................... 2-797
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension ......................................................... 2-799
Paging, External ............................................................................. 2-807
Paging, Internal .............................................................................. 2-813
Park ............................................................................................... 2-817
PBX Compatibility ........................................................................... 2-825
PC Programming ............................................................................ 2-831
Power Failure Transfer ................................................................... 2-843
Prime Line Selection ....................................................................... 2-847
Private Line .................................................................................... 2-851
Programmable Function Keys ......................................................... 2-857
Programming from a Multiline Terminal ........................................... 2-863
Pulse to Tone Conversion ............................................................... 2-867
Redial Function .............................................................................. 2-869
Remote (System) Upgrade ............................................................. 2-873
Repeat Redial ................................................................................. 2-877
Resident System Program .............................................................. 2-881
Reverse Voice Over ........................................................................ 2-883
Ring Groups ................................................................................... 2-887
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External ............................................ 2-893
Room Monitor ................................................................................. 2-897
Save Number Dialed ....................................................................... 2-903
Secondary Incoming Extension ....................................................... 2-907
Secretary Call (Buzzer) ................................................................... 2-913
iv
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Secretary Call Pickup ...................................................................... 2-917
Selectable Display Messaging ......................................................... 2-919
Selectable Ring Tones .................................................................... 2-925
Serial Call ....................................................................................... 2-929
Single Line Telephones .................................................................. 2-933
SLT Adapter ................................................................................... 2-941
Softkeys ......................................................................................... 2-957
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station ................................................ 2-959
Station Hunt ................................................................................... 2-975
Station Message Detail Recording .................................................. 2-977
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable ............................ 2-993
Station Relocation ........................................................................... 2-997
SV8100 Communications Analyst Enterprise ................................. 2-1001
SV8100 Desktop Applications ....................................................... 2-1009
SV8100 Interactive Voice Response ............................................. 2-1019
SV8100 Internal Router ................................................................ 2-1025
SV8100 NetLink ............................................................................ 2-1029
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch .......................................................... 2-1039
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals ........................................................... 2-1043
Synchronous Ringing .................................................................... 2-1065
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) .................................... 2-1067
Tandem Ringing ........................................................................... 2-1079
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) .............................. 2-1083
TAPI Compatibility ........................................................................ 2-1099
Tone Override .............................................................................. 2-1103
Traffic Reports .............................................................................. 2-1107
Transfer ........................................................................................ 2-1111
Trunk Group Routing .................................................................... 2-1123
Trunk Groups ............................................................................... 2-1129
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On .............................................................. 2-1135
UCB (Unified Communications for Business) ................................. 2-1139
UM8000 Mail ................................................................................ 2-1153
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ..................................................... 2-1175
Uniform Numbering Network ......................................................... 2-1185
UNIVERGE Multimedia Conference Bridge ................................... 2-1193
Universal Slots ............................................................................. 2-1201
User Programming Ability ............................................................. 2-1205
Virtual Extensions ......................................................................... 2-1207
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
v
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
VM8000 InMail ............................................................................. 2-1213
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) ..................................................... 2-1253
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys ................................. 2-1273
Voice Over ................................................................................... 2-1277
Voice Response System (VRS) ..................................................... 2-1281
Volume Controls ........................................................................... 2-1301
Warning Tone for Long Conversation ............................................ 2-1303
Wireless DECT (SIP) .................................................................... 2-1307
Chapter 3
Section 1
About This Chapter ................................................................................. 3-1
Section 2
Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operations with One-Touch Key Operation . 3-1
Section 3
Using Handsfree .......................................................................................... 3-2
Chapter 4
Section 1
vi
Codes Tables
Feature Availability by Software Revision
Feature Availability Chart ........................................................................ 4-1
Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1
SV8100 Key Assignment Example ......................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2
Feature Access/One-Touch Key Assignment Example .......................... 1-3
Figure 2-1
Department Calling Priority Call Routing ............................................ 2-346
Figure 2-2
Department Calling Circular Routing .................................................. 2-347
Figure 2-3
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1 ....................................................... 2-366
Figure 2-4
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2 ....................................................... 2-367
Figure 2-5
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 3 ....................................................... 2-367
Figure 2-6
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 4 ....................................................... 2-367
Figure 2-7
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5 ....................................................... 2-368
Figure 2-8
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6 ....................................................... 2-368
Figure 2-9
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7 ....................................................... 2-368
Figure 2-10
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8 ....................................................... 2-369
Figure 2-1
Example – SIP Phone ......................................................................... 2-628
Figure 2-2
Mobile Extension Layout ..................................................................... 2-733
Figure 2-3
PC Programming Overview ................................................................ 2-831
Figure 2-4
PCPro Connection Dialog ................................................................... 2-832
Figure 2-5
WebPro Login Screen ......................................................................... 2-833
Figure 2-6
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Priority Call Routing ....................... 2-1177
Figure 2-7
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Circular Routing ............................. 2-1178
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
vii
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
viii
List of Figures
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1
Sample Alarm Report ...................................................................................... 2-27
Table 2-2
Alarm Report Definitions ................................................................................. 2-28
Table 2-3
Alarm Report Item Definitions ......................................................................... 2-28
Table 2-4
Sample System Information Printout .............................................................. 2-29
Table 2-5
Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-214
Table 2-6
Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction ...................................................... 2-361
Table 2-7
Example 2 (Manual Change) ........................................................................ 2-375
Table 2-8
LED Flash Patterns ....................................................................................... 2-386
Table 2-9
Distinctive Ringing: Tones and Flash Patterns ............................................ 2-425
Table 2-10
Basic Tone Table – Tone 06 ......................................................................... 2-430
Table 2-11
Basic Tone Table – Tone 14 ......................................................................... 2-430
Table 2-12
Basic Tone Table – Tone 39 ......................................................................... 2-430
Table 2-13
IPK Telephone Specifications ....................................................................... 2-506
Table 2-14
Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-01 ....................................................... 2-555
Table 2-15
Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-02 ....................................................... 2-558
Table 2-16
Extension Busy Setup ................................................................................... 2-599
Table 2-17
Incoming Ringing Tone ................................................................................. 2-607
Table 2-18
License Information ....................................................................................... 2-690
Table 2-19
Supported Service Codes ............................................................................. 2-735
Table 2-20
Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-773
Table 2-21
Selectable Display Messaging Defaults ........................................................ 2-919
Table 2-22
Selectable Display Message – Character Entry Chart .................................. 2-922
Table 2-23
Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-969
Table 2-24
SMDR Report Definitions .............................................................................. 2-979
Table 2-25
SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to ‘0’ ............................... 2-980
Table 2-26
SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to ‘1’ ............................... 2-981
Table 2-27
SMDR Summary Report ............................................................................... 2-982
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
ix
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-28
Keys for Entering Names .............................................................................. 2-995
Table 2-29
TAPI Commands ......................................................................................... 2-1099
Table 2-30
Board Power Factor .................................................................................... 2-1201
Table 2-31
Terminal Power Factor ................................................................................ 2-1202
Table 2-32
Maximum Number of Package Installed ...................................................... 2-1202
Table 2-33
Voice Prompting Messages ......................................................................... 2-1284
Table 3-1
Post Dialing Service Codes – Single Digit Post Dialing Codes ......................... 3-2
Table 4-1
Feature Availability by Software Revision ......................................................... 4-1
x
List of Tables
Introduction
SECTION 1
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
UNIVERGE SV8100 (DTL and ITL telephones), IPK II (DTH telephones),
Dterm Series i (DTR telephones) can be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100
system.
MULTILINE TERMINALS USED WITH THE SYSTEM
SV8100 Terminals
The SV8100 Multiline Terminals either with or without LCD display offer a
variety of colors, and line sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
Introduction
SECTION 2
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display provides call
status data and programming information.
Terminal line sizes include 6, 12, 24, and 32.
IP Terminals are available in 6, 12, 24, and 32.
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is
standard.
All are compatible with ADA-L( ), and APR-L( ).
An Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1( ) Console is available with 60
stations and/or outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
A power failure module PSA-L( ) is available for fail-over to POTS line
when there is a loss of power to the SV8100.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
1-1
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Soft
Keys
Line Key
Kit
Numbered
Keypad
Key
Kit
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Cursor
Pad
Answer
Recall
Feature
Mic
Menu
Figure 1-1 SV8100 Key Assignment Example
IPK Terminals
The IPK Terminals (DTH telephones) either with or without LCD display offer a variety
of colors, and line sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display terminals provides call
status data and programming information.
Terminal line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
IP terminals are available in 4-line, 8-line and 16-line (with LCD).
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard.
All are compatible with the AD(A)-R( ), AP(A)-R( ), AP(R)-R( ), CT(A)-R( ) Unit,
CT(U)-R( ), or HF-R( ) Unit adapter. The AP(R)-R( ) Unit requires an AC-R( ) Unit
to supply AC power.
The ADA-2R is compatible with ITH-2 IP terminals.
The ADA-2R and PS(A)-R( ) are compatible with ITH-3 IP terminals.
An Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1( ) Console is available with 60 station and/or
outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
1-2
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch Keys
Keys are designated Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch throughout this
manual. The keys operate much the same, but various limitations imposed on each
type are described below.
Feature Access Keys
Depending on the type, a Multiline Terminal can have 2, 8, 16, 24, or 32 line
keys. These highly-flexible keys can be used for station DSS/BLF and Speed
Dial.
Single On/Off Keys
Line keys may also be assigned as Single On/Off keys in System Programming
to toggle a feature on/off. This assignment has no impact on the Feature Access
keys, but the assigned features are very specific. Scrolling (CID) and headset,
are examples of features available for Single On/Off keys.
One-Touch Keys
One-Touch keys can perform the same function as Feature Access keys. A
Multiline Terminal has a fixed number of these keys. No system assignment is
necessary, and the number of keys ranges from none to 16 depending on the
terminal type.
Figure 1-2 Feature Access/One-Touch Key Assignment Example
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
1-3
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Dterm Series i Terminals
The Dterm Series i Terminals (DTR telephones) with or without LCD display offer a
variety of colors and line sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on display terminals provides call status
data and programming information.
Line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
2-line on the DTR-2DT-1( ).
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard (except
on the DTR-2DT-1( )).
All but the DTR-2DT-1( ), DTR-1-1( ), DTR-1HM-1( ) and Cordless terminals are
compatible with the AD(A)-R( ), AP(A)-R( ), AP(R)-R( ), CT(A)-R( ) and HF-R( )
Unit adapters. The AP(R)-R( ) Unit requires an AC(A)-R( ) Unit to supply AC
power. For Attendant Positions, an Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1( ) Console is
available with 60 station and/or outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
The DTR-2DT-1( ) has an internal Analog Port without ringer.
A two-line terminal with two Flexible Line keys (each with 2-color LED), nine
function keys, built-in speakerphone, a large LED to indicate incoming calls or
messages, and an outgoing only Analog SLT Port [AD(A)-R( )] is also available.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 Single Line Terminals are offered in two variations
(DTR-1-1( ) and DTR-1HM-1( )). Both terminals come in black or white. Both
have DTMF and Pulse Dialing compatibility, and offer Flash and Redial key
functionality. The UNIVERGE SV8100 Single Line Terminals come standard with
a Message Waiting Indicator that also functions as an Incoming Call Indication.
During a call, the receive audio level can be increased three levels and
decreased two levels from the default setting (six volume level settings in all).
The terminals offer four ring volume settings (Off, Soft, Medium, and Loud), and
three ring patterns (Slow, Medium, and Fast). The DTR Single Line Terminals
also have a Data Port that functions similar to that of an AP(R)-R( ) optional
adapter, and have a built-in wall mount adapter. The DTR-1HM-1( ) terminal has
eight programmable speed dial buttons (maximum 21 digits each). The
DTR-1HM-1( ) also has Hold and Monitor Function keys.
1-4
Introduction
Features
SECTION 1
2
ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are
available with the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
Each feature provides the following information:
Conditions – provides special operating conditions (if any) that need to be
considered with using the feature.
Default Settings – indicates the factory default setting (if any).
Features
Description – briefly describes the feature and how it is used.
System Availability – describes multiline terminals that can be used with
this feature and lists any additional equipment, such as adapters or blades,
that must be installed for this feature to operate.
Programming – lists the memory blocks that support the feature.
Related Features – lists features that are associated with the feature being
described (e.g., the Account Codes feature lists the Speed Dialing feature
in the related features list because speed dialing bins can contain stored
account code (if any).
Operation – provides step-by-step instructions for using the feature.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2-1
Issue 1.0
SECTION 2
UNIVERGE SV8100
IMPORTANT NOTES
Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operation with One-Touch Keys
A multiline terminal user can access many features using Service Codes (e.g., Service
Code 744 sets Call Forward Busy/No Answer). To streamline the operation of their
telephone, a multiline terminal user can store these codes under One-Touch Keys.
This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find out more, turn to the
One-Touch Calling and One-Touch Serial Operation features.
Programmable Keys
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar
to (PRG 15-07 or SC nnn). This means that the key requires service code nnn, and you
can program this code in Program 15-07 or by dialing Service Code 751 or 752. Refer
to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information.
Using Handsfree
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just
press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call. For extensions without
Automatic Handsfree, the user must:
Lift the handset or press Speaker for Intercom dial tone.
Lift the handset or press Speaker, then press a line key for trunk dial tone.
Port Assignments
Port Calculation for Trunks:
The system detects the type of blade (trunk or extension) and assigns the required
extension or trunk ports to the slot. The system will use the next available port numbers
– it will not reserve any ports.
2-2
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 3
Issue 1.0
IPK II TO UNIVERGE SV8100 FEATURE COMPARISON LIST
The following table provides a cross-reference between the IPK II and the UNIVERGE
SV8100 features.
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code Entry
Account Code Entry
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm Reports
Alarm Reports
Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Ancillary Device Connection
Ancillary Device Connection
Answer Hold
Answer Hold
Answer Key
Answer Key
Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant Call Queuing
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Release
Automatic Release
Automatic Route Selection
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Background Music
Barge-In
Barge-In
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Power
Battery Backup – System Power
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Duration Timer
Call Duration Timer
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Call Forwarding – Park and Page
Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding –
Park and Page
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring
Call Redirect
Call Redirect
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2-3
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Callback
Callback
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID
Caller ID
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Central Office Calls, Placing
Class of Service
Class of Service
Clock/Calendar Display
Clock/Calendar Display
CO Message Waiting Indication
CO Message Waiting Indication
Code Restriction
Code Restriction
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
TAPI Compatibility
Conference
Conference
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Continued Dialing
Continued Dialing
Not Supported
Cordless DECT Terminals
Cordless Telephone Connection
Cordless Telephone Connection
Data Line Security
Data Line Security
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing
Department Calling
Department Calling
Department Step Calling
Department Step Calling
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection
Dialing Number Preview
Dialing Number Preview
Digital Trunk Clocking
Digital Trunk Clocking
Digital Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
2-4
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
Door Box
Drop Key
Drop Key
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Handset Cordless
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Dterm IP Gateway System
Not Supported
E911 Compatibility (US Only)
E911 (US only) Compatibility
IPK Terminals
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
Terminal Migration
Not Supported
EliteApps – Interactive Voice Response
SV8100 Interactive Voice Response
CallAnalyst
SV8100 Communications Analyst Enterprise
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Flash
Flash
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible Timeouts
Flexible Timeouts
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
Group Listen
Group Listen
Handset Mute
Handset Mute
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Headset Operation
Headset Operation
Hold
Hold
Hot Key-Pad
Hot Key-Pad
Hotel/Motel
Hotel/Motel
Hotline
Hotline
Howler Tone Service
Howler Tone Service
Intercom
Intercom
Internal Hub
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2-5
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
IP Extenders/Mobile ConneX
Not Supported
IP Station (MEGACO) – IAD Integrated Access
Device
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
IP Station (MEGACO) – MG 16
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
IP Station (SIP) – MG16
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IP Trunk – H.323 Protocol
IP Trunk – H.323
IP Trunk (SIP) – MG16
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IPK II – PC Assistant
SV8100 Desktop Applications
IPK II – PC Attendant
SV8100 Desktop Applications
IPK II In-Mail
VM8000 InMail
IPK II VoIP Management System
Not Supported
ISDN Compatibility
ISDN Compatibility
Not Supported
K-CCIS – IP
K-CCIS - IP with IAD
Not Supported
K-CCIS - IP with PVA
Not Supported
K-CCIS - T1
K-CCIS – T1
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
Licensing
Licensing
Line Preference
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Long Conversation Cutoff
Not Supported
Maintenance
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Memo Dial
Memo Dial
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
Not Supported
Mobile Extension
Multiline Conference Bridge
UNIVERGE Multimedia Conference Bridge
Multimedia Conference Bridge
UNIVERGE Multimedia Conference Bridge
Multiple Trunk Types
Multiple Trunk Types
Music on Hold
Music on Hold
2-6
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Name Storing
Name Storing
Night Service
Night Service
Off-Hook Signaling
Off-Hook Signaling
One-Digit Dial Option
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling
Operator
Operator
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
Paging, External
Paging, External
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Park
Park
PBX Compatibility
PBX Compatibility
PC Programming
PC Programming
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer
Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection
Private Line
Private Line
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail
Redial Key
Redial Function
Remote (System) Upgrade
Remote (System) Upgrade
Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial
Resident System Program
Resident System Program
Reverse Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over
Ring Groups
Ring Groups
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Room Monitor
Room Monitor
Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call Pickup
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Display Messaging
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2-7
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring Tones
Serial Call
Serial Call
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Single Line Telephones
SLT Adapter
SLT Adapter
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
Not Supported
Softkeys
Softkeys
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Add-On Console
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Station Hunt
Station Hunt
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Name Assignment-User Programmable
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable
Station Relocation
Station Relocation
Not Supported
SV8100 Internal Router
Not Supported
SV8100 NetLink
Synchronous Ringing
Synchronous Ringing
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
TAPI Compatibility
TAPI Compatibility
Tone Override
Tone Override
Traffic Reports
Traffic Reports
Transfer
Transfer
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Not Supported
UCB (Unified Communications for Business)
Unified Messaging
UM8000 Mail
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Numbering Network
Uniform Numbering Network
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
User Programming Ability
User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions
Virtual Extensions
2-8
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
IPK II Feature Name
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail Park and Page
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Over
Voice Over
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Volume Controls
Volume Controls
Warning Tone For Long Conversation
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Wireless – DECT
Wireless DECT (SIP)
SECTION 4
FEATURES
The remainder of this document provides the features for the UNIVERGE SV8100
system.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2-9
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 10
Features
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or
restrict trunk calls. The system has two types of Forced Account Codes:
Forced Account Codes (Unverified)
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time
they place a trunk call. If the user does not enter the code, the system prevents the call.
As with Account Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an
incoming call. However, the system does not require it. Forced Account Codes do not
block emergency assistance (000) calls.
Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunkby-trunk basis.
A
Verified Account Codes
With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a
list of up to 2000 programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes
through. If the code dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified Account
Codes can have 3~16 digits using the characters 0~9 and #. During programming, you
can use “wild cards” to streamline entering codes into system memory. For example, the
entry [email protected] lets users dial Verified Account Codes from 1230 through 1239.
Operator Notification
To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account
Code violation occurs (Program: 20-13-20). This can happen if the user fails to enter an
Account Code (if Forced) or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The
notification is an automatic Intercom call to the attendant and a RESTRICT message in the
operator display.
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system allows extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When this
option is enabled, a user can dial while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and
then dial to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digit the user dials after
answering an incoming call outdials on the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone display. This would prevent, for
example, an unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the
display. When hidden, the Account Code digits show as on the telephone display.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 11
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account
Codes can have 1~16 digits using 0~9 and #. Verified Account Codes can have 3~16 digits.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system does not retain Account
Code information. Any number redialed with these features, the user needs to reenter an Account Code.
If a user enters 12345 203 926 5400 67890 , if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the system dials the number as
203 926 5400 67890 . The 67890 is not treated as an Account Code.
Conditions
If a user enters a code that exceeds 16 digits, the system ignores the Account Code Entry.
If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234 ) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
If using Forced Account Code with single line telephone you need a VRS to get the prompts
to enter the Forced Account Code.
When you use Forced Account Code on only toll calls, and you dial a local call, you hear a
beep.
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station bins can contain stored Account Codes. They can be
prevented from being displayed using Program 20-07-04.
To simplify Account Code Entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234 ) in a One-Touch Key.
Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone
display).
Do not use an asterisk in a PBX/CTX access code when using Account Codes. The ,
causes the trunk to stop sending digits to the central office until another is entered.
Account Codes for incoming calls are not available for single line telephones.
Default Settings
Account Codes are disabled.
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
2 - 12
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Required Component(s)
VRS for Forced Account Codes for Single Line Telephones
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
PBX Compatibility
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
14-01-11
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Account
Code Required
Enable (1) or Disable (0) Account
Codes for each trunk.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key as an Account
Code key (code 50). Use this key
instead of the dial pad to enter the
before and after the Account Code.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 13
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-20
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the Operator
Alert when a forced account code is
incorrectly entered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
2
3
21-24-01
Forced Access Dialing –
Emergency Number
21-01-14
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Forced Account Code
Inter-digit Timer
The system waits this time for a
user to enter a Forced Account
code.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3 seconds)
3
21-04-01
Toll Restriction Class for
Extensions
Use this option to assign a Toll
Restriction Class (1~15) to an
extension.
Day/Night Mode
1~9 (9 = Power Failure
Mode)
1~15
(default = 2)
3
For each Class of Service (1~15)
use this option to select the Account
Code Mode.
0 = Account Codes
disabled (None)
1 = Account Codes
optional
2 = Account Codes
required but not verified
(No verify)
3 = Account Codes
required and verified
(Verify)
(default = 0)
35-05-01
35-05-03
35-05-04
35-06-01
40-10-01
2 - 14
Account Code Setup – Account
Code Mode
Account Code Setup – Account
Codes for Incoming Calls
000
For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 in this option to Enable
Account Codes for incoming calls.
Enter 0 to Disable Account Codes
for incoming calls. If disabled, any
codes you enter dial out on the
connected trunk.
0 = Disable Account
Codes for incoming calls
1 = Enable Account
codes for incoming calls
(default = 0)
For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 to have the system hide
Account Codes on an extension
display as they are entered. Enter 0
to have the Account Codes
displayed.
0 = Account Codes
Displayed
1 = Account Codes not
Displayed
(default = 0)
Verified Account Code Table –
Verified Account Code
Use this option to enter data into the
Verified Account Code Table. You
can enter up to 2000 codes from
3~16 digits in length. For a wild card
@, press the LK 1.
Up to 16 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, #, @
(@ = Wild Card)
(default not assigned)
Voice Announcement Service
Option – VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system
ability to play the fixed VRS
messages (such as You have a
message).
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
(default = 0)
Account Code Setup – Hiding
Account Codes
3
3
3
3
3
3
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your
system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming
calls. This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows
3.
on the telephone display.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter a Forced Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes, you may use this procedure instead of letting the
system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed in your
Verified Account Code list.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page
2-229 for more information.
2.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
3.
Dial your Account Code [1~16 digits, using 0~9 and # or (3~16 digits for Forced)].
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden,
each digit you dial shows on the telephone display (depending on programming).
4.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
5.
Dial the number you want to call.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 15
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when a Forced Account Code is required:
1.
Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.
2.
Wait for your call to go through.
- OR -
3.
If you hear “Please enter an Account Code,” (depending on system programming) and your display
shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.
Dial .
- OR Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
Dial your Account Code (3~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows
on the telephone display.
Dial .
- OR Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Answer incoming call.
If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out onto the connected trunk.
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter the Account Code (1~16 digits).
You can enter any code of the proper length.
4.
Dial .
To enter a Forced Account Code at a single line telephone:
1.
Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.
With Forced Account Codes, you hear, “Please enter an Account Code.”(depending on programming).
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter Account Code (3~16 digits).
4.
Dial .
5.
Dial number you want to call
2 - 16
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Account Code Entry
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk
calls. Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call or anytime
while on a call. The system does not require the user to enter the optional account code.
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system can control the ability of extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When
this option is enabled, a user can dial while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial
to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the user dials after answering an incoming call
outdial on the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone display. This prevents, for example, an
unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display. When hidden,
the Account Code digits show on the telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account
Codes can have 1~16 digits using 0~9 and #.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system does not retain Account
Code information. To redial any number with these features, the user must enter an Account Code.
If a user enters 12345 203 926 5400 67890 , if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the system dials the number as
203 926 5400 67890 . The 67890 is not treated as an Account Code.
Conditions
If a user enters a code that exceeds the 16 digit limit, the system ignores the Account Code
Entry.
If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234 ) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
Do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code when using Account Codes. Otherwise, after
the , the trunk stops sending digits to the central office.
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone
display).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 17
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To simplify Account Code Entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch Key.
Press the key instead of dialing the codes.
Speed Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Prevent them from being displayed
using Program 20-07-04.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
One-Touch Calling
PBX Compatibility
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
2 - 18
Account Code Entry
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
14-01-11
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Account
Code Required
Enable (1) or Disable (0) Account
Codes for each trunk.
0= Disable
1= Enable
(default = 1)
3
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key as an Account
Code key (code 50). Use this key
instead of the dial pad to enter the
before and after the Account Code.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
21-01-04
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Tone Detection Time
Adjust the interval the system waits
for the Telco to return Dial Tone.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
3
35-05-01
Account Code Setup – Account
Code Mode
Use this option to select the
Account Code Mode.
0 = Account Codes
disabled (None)
1 = Account Codes
optional
2 = Account Codes
required but not verified
(No verify)
3 = Account Codes
required and verified
(Verify)
(default = 0)
3
35-05-02
35-05-03
35-05-04
Account Code Setup – Forced
Account Code Toll Call Setup
Account Code Setup – Account
Codes for Incoming Calls
Account Code Setup – Hiding
Account Codes
Enable Account Codes for all calls
or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in
Program 35-05-01).
0 = Account Codes for
toll and local calls (All)
1 = Account Codes just
for toll calls (STD)
(default = 0)
3
For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 in this option to Enable
Account Codes for incoming calls.
Enter 0 to Disable Account Codes
for incoming calls. If disabled, any
codes you enter dial out on the
connected trunk.
0 = Account Codes for
incoming calls disabled
(No)
1 = Account codes for
incoming calls (Yes)
(default = 0)
3
For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 to have the system hide
Account Codes on an extension
display as they are entered. Enter 0
to have the Account Codes
displayed.
0 = Display Account
Codes
1 = Hide Account Codes
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 19
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
35-06-01
SMDR Account Code Setup –
Verified Account Code
Use this table to enter Account
Codes into the Verification Account
Code List. You can enter up to 2000
codes with three ~ six digits, using
the characters 0 ~ 9 or #. Use the
LK1 to enter a wild card. For
example, the entry @234 means
the user can enter 0234-9234.
Up to 16 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, #, @
(@ = Wild Card)
(default not assigned)
2
3
3
Operation
To enter an Account Code anytime while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your
system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming
calls. This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows
3.
on the telephone display.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes, you may use this procedure instead of letting the
system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into your
Verified Account Code list.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.
You can press a line key or dial a code (except 0) to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page
2-229 for more information.
2.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
2 - 20
Account Code Entry
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 1.0
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden,
each digit you dial shows on the telephone display.
4.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
5.
Dial the number you want to call.
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Answer incoming call.
If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out to the connected trunk.
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter the Account Code.
You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified.
4.
Dial .
To enter an Account Code at a single line telephone:
1.
Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter Account Code (1~16 digits).
4.
Dial .
5.
Dial number you want to call.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 21
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 22
Account Code Entry
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Alarm
Description
Alarm lets any station extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind
them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:
Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)
Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
Conditions
Single line telephones ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds.
Only a Multiline Terminal can view what time the Alarm is currently set for.
Default Settings
Alarm is enabled.
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 23
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
20-01-06
System Options – Alarm Duration
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Set the duration of the Alarm signal.
0~64800 seconds
(default = 30 seconds)
2
3
3
Operation
To set the alarm:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4.
Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).
For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.
A confirmation tone is heard if the alarm has been set. If the alarm was not set, an error tone is heard instead.
5.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
2 - 24
Alarm
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
To silence an alarm:
1.
At multiline terminal, press Exit.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
The single line set user hears Music on Hold when the handset is lifted.
To check the programmed alarm time at a multiline terminal:
1.
Press Help.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
The programmed time displays.
4.
Press Exit.
To cancel an alarm:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
4.
Dial 9999.
5.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 25
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 26
Alarm
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Alarm Reports
Description
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system logs various errors and reports information about the operation that can
be used to determine the cause of a problem. The system can indicate several errors on the multiline
telephone display, output to a USB stick on the CD-CP00-AU, or be downloaded in PCPro. The report
data can also be sent via e-mail.
Alarm Report
The Alarm Reports indicate:
System start-up/upgrade date and time
Blade communication error with date and time and the restoration date and time
Date and time a blade was removed from the system
Date and time an extension was disconnected from the system
Date and time of any system data change
Table 2-1 Sample Alarm Report
<< Alarm Report05/16/2006 14:30 PAGE 001
LVL
NO
STAT
DATE
TIME
ITEM
UNIT
SLT
PRT
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:21
PKG Installation
PRT
02
00
MAJ
0010
ERR
05/16/06
14:21
ISDN Link
PRT
02
12
MAJ
0010
REC
05/16/06
14:21
ISDN Link
PRT
02
12
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
PRT
02
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
ESI
05
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
SLIB
07
00
MAJ
0050
WAR
05/16/06
14:33
System Start Up
none
00
00
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
PRT
02
00
MAJ
0014
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
NTCPU-LAN Link
none
00
00
MAJ
0014
REC
05/16/06
14:35
NTCPU-LAN Link
none
00
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:36
PKG Installation
CTP
08
00
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:37
PKG Installation
VMS
08
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:38
PKG Installation
VMS
08
00
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:40
PKG Installation
PRT
07
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:40
PKG Installation
PRT
07
00
MAJ
0006
ERR
05/16/06
14:41
Blocking
ESIB
01
05
MAJ
0006
REC
05/16/06
15:01
Blocking
ESIB
01
05
MAJ
0006
ERR
05/16/06
15:05
Blocking
ESIB
01
07
MAJ
0006
REC
05/16/06
15:07
Blocking
ESIB
01
07
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
PARAMETER
2 - 27
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-2 Alarm Report Definitions
Alarm Report Heading
Definitions
LVL
Alarm Type (MAJ = Major, MIN = Minor)
NO
Number of Alarm (4-digit)
STAT
Status (REC = Recovered, ERR = Error, WAR = Warning
DATE
Date the Alarm Occurred
TIME
Time the Alarm Occurred
ITEM
Name of the Alarm
UNIT
Name of the Blade
SLT
Chassis Slot Number
PRT
Chassis Port Number
PARAMETER
Related Information
Table 2-3 Alarm Report Item Definitions
Item Name
Definition
PKG Installation
Blade is removed or inserted.
ISDN Link
ISDN Line failure is detected.
CD-CP00-AU – LAN Link
CD-CP00-AU – Lan connection failure is detected.
Blocking
Terminal Failure may have occurred because terminal
blocking is detected. Terminal is unplugged or wire is
disconnected.
System Data Change
System Upgrade performed or Programming change.
System Start Up
System is reset.
SMDR Link
Connection failure has been detected between the
CD-CP00-AU and SMDR printer device.
System Information
The system can print a report of the blades installed, the port assignments, and the port types. This
information is sent to the extension defined in Program 90-13.
The System Information Reports indicate:
Date and Time of the Report
Blade names
Slot condition (working, blocked)
Port assignment
Port classification
2 - 28
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-4 Sample System Information Printout
System Information
05/18/2006 11:02
slot
location
type
assign port
condition
1
1-1
DLC
1-16
Running
2
1-2
PRT
1-23
Running
3
1-3
COT
25-28
Running
4
1-4
none
none
Not Install
5
1-5
DLC
33-40
Not Install
6
1-6
LCA
17-24
Running
7
1-7
PRT
29-51
Not Install
8
1-8
VM00
25-32
Running
9
2-1
none
Not Install
10
2-2
none
Not Install
11
2-3
none
Not Install
12
2-4
none
Not Install
13
2-5
none
Not Install
14
2-6
none
Not Install
15
2-7
none
Not Install
16
2-8
none
Not Install
17
3-1
none
Not Install
18
3-2
none
Not Install
19
3-3
none
Not Install
20
3-4
none
Not Install
21
3-5
none
Not Install
22
3-6
none
Not Install
23
3-7
none
Not Install
24
3-8
none
Not Install
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
note
-------- Connect:
--------
Connect:
2 - 29
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
Alarm Reports and System Information Reports can be output to a USB stick on the
CD-CP00-AU.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 supports the following Alarms to be output to the LCD of a multiline
terminal:
SMDR Buffer Full
CD-CP00-AU-LAN link Error
The UNIVERGE SV8100 does not support printouts of the following Alarms:
Power Failure
RAM Backup Battery Error
Networking Keep Alive Error
Up to 12 System Alarm times can be scheduled to print on a Monthly, Daily, and Hourly time
frame. The report indicates both Major and Minor Alarms.
System Information Reports cannot be set to output at a scheduled time.
When using the E-mail functionality of reports, the E-mail address in Program 90-11-10
(From Address) must be set for the E-mail feature to work.
After a new alarm is output, it cannot be output a second time. New alarms must be
generated before Program 90-12-04 can be performed a second time.
Up to 100 System Alarm Reports can be stored. When the buffer fills, the oldest record is
deleted to allow the new record to be saved.
If the System is set up to E-mail the Alarm Reports and the Mail Server is down, the report is
not sent.
System Information Reports cannot be set for output via E-mail.
Scheduled Alarm Reports via E-mail prints all alarms. When the system detects New
alarms, this information is output via E-mail on an individual basis.
E-mail Alarm Reports can be sent when each New alarm occurs (Per Event). If you want to
receive complete Alarm Reports periodically, you must specify 12 individual dates and times
in Program 90-24-01 ~ Program 90-24-04 (per period).
A maximum of 99 entries are emailed with the scheduled alarms.
Default Settings
None
2 - 30
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
USB memory stick
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 31
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Setting Up Alarms:
Level
Program
Number
90-10-01
90-10-02
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Alarm Setup – Alarm Type Set the alarm type 14 and 60.
Alarm 14 – CD-CP00-AU-LAN Link
Error (IP Layer 1)
Assign a Major or Minor alarm status
to the LAN link. This program also
assigns whether or not the alarm is
displayed to a key telephone and
whether or not the alarm information
is reported to the predefined
destination.
Alarm 60 – SIP Registration Error
Notification
Assign a Major or Minor alarm status
to the SIP Registration Error. This
program also assigns whether or not
the alarm is displayed to a key
telephone and whether or not the
alarm information is reported to the
predefined destination.
0 = Not Set
1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
(default = 0)
System Alarm Setup – Report
Assign whether or not the alarm is
displayed to a multiline terminal and
whether or not the alarm information
is reported to the predefined
destination in Program 90-11.
0 = No Report (no
autodial)
1 = Report (autodial)
(default = 0)
3
3
3
90-24-01
System Alarm Report Notification
Time Setup – Month
Set the month for the alarm report to
print.
Month 00~12
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)
3
90-24-02
System Alarm Report Notification
Time Setup – Day
Set the day for the alarm report to
print.
Day 00~31
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)
3
90-24-03
System Alarm Report Notification
Time Setup – Hour
Set the hour for the alarm report to
print.
Day 00~23
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)
3
90-24-04
System Alarm Report Notification
Time Setup – Minute
Set the minute for the alarm report to
print.
Day 00~59
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)
3
Printing Reports:
Program
Number
90-12-01
2 - 32
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Alarm Output – Output
Port Type
Indicate the type of connection used
for the System Alarms. The baud
rate for the COM port should be set
in Program 10-21-02.
0 = No Setting
1~3 = Reserved
4 = CTA/CTU
5 = USB Memory
(default = 0)
2
3
3
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Printing System Information Reports:
Program
Number
90-13-01
90-13-02
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Information Output –
Output Port Type
Indicate the type of connection
system information.
0 = No Setting
4 = CTA/CTU
5 = USB
(default = 0)
3
System Information Output –
Destination Extension Number
If the output port type (Program
90-13-01) is set to CTA, enter the
extension number with the CTA
connection.
Extension Number (up
to eight digits)
(default not assigned)
3
3
E-mailing Alarm Reports:
Program
Number
10-12-01
10-12-02
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
CD-CP00-AU Network Setup – IP
Address
CD-CP00-AU Network Setup –
Subnet Mask
Assign the IP Address.
The setting of Subnet Mask is
invalid when all Host Addresses
are 0.
If the network section is:
0,
127,
128.0,
191.255,
192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of Subnet Mask is
invalid.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
(default = 192.168.0.10)
128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0
248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.255
(default =
255.255.255.0)
2
3
3
3
2 - 33
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
10-12-03
90-11-02
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
CD-CP00-AU Network Setup –
Default Gateway
Assign the default gateway IP
address for the CD-CP00-AU.
2
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
(default = 0.0.0.0)
3
3
System Alarm Report – Report
Method
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set this option to 1. This
program has higher priority than
Program 90-12-06.
0 = No Report
1 = E-mail Address
(default = 0)
System Alarm Report – SMTP
Host Name
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set the SMTP name (for
example, smtp.yourisp.com).
Contact your ISP (Internet Service
Provider) for the correct entry if
needed.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
System Alarm Report – SMTP
Host Port Number
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set the SMTP host port
number. Contact your ISP (internet
service provider) for the correct entry
if needed.
0 ~ 65535
(default = 25)
90-11-08
System Alarm Report – To Email
Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set this e-mail address to
which the report should be sent.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
3
90-11-09
System Alarm Report – Reply
Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set the e-mail address
where replies should be e-mailed.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
3
90-11-10
System Alarm Report – From
Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set this e-mail address for
the station sending the report.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
3
90-11-11
System Alarm Report – DNS
Primary Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set the DNS primary
address.
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
(default = 0.0.0.0)
3
90-11-12
System Alarm Report – DNS
Secondary Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, set the DNS secondary
address.
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
(default = 0.0.0.0)
3
90-11-13
System Alarm Report – Customer
Name
When Alarm Reports are to be
e-mailed, enter a name to identify the
particular system.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
3
90-25-01
System Alarm Report CC Mail
Setup – CC Mail Address
Define the mail address to receive
the system alarm report CC Mail
setup.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
3
90-11-06
90-11-07
3
3
3
Operation
To use this feature at any terminal:
The user must be logged in with an Installer (IN) level password as defined in Program 90-02.
2 - 34
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Alphanumeric Display
Description
Multibutton display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character per line Alphanumeric Display that provides
various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify
callers and customize features.
Conditions
The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.
Default Settings
Enabled for all display telephones.
System Availability
Terminals
All Display Multiline Terminals.
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Clock/Calendar Display
Selectable Display Messaging
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 35
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
11-11-13
15-02-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
1
20-11-08
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
If needed, redefine the service code
used to select the language for
display multiline terminals.
MLT
(default = 678)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Language
Selection
Select the language to be displayed
on a multiline terminal display.
0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
(default = 1)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2
is option 9, and Key 3 is option
10.)
20-06-01
Assigned Data
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
For Class of Service in an
extension, turns Off or On an
incoming transfer preanswer display
for an extension.
3
3
Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming.
2 - 36
Alphanumeric Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) feature uses a PGD(2)-U( ) ADP (Door Phone/Paging)
adapter to provide two analog ports (with associated relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging, Door
Boxes and auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells. The system allows up to 48
PGD(2)-U( ) ADPs (when used for ACI ports) for a maximum of 96 analog ports. Each PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
requires an unused port on a CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA blade.
Music on Hold
You can connect up to two customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to a PGD(2)-U( ) ADP. This
lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the CD-CP00-AU ETU or the internal
source is not adequate. By using PGD(2)-U( ) ADPs, you can even have a different music source for
each trunk.
When the system switches the ACI analog port to a trunk on Hold, the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP relay associated
with the ACI analog port closes. You can use this ability to switch on the music source, if desired.
Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music source.
The PGD(2)-U( ) ADP relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through.
For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP module. Connect the music source
control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual
for additional details.
External Paging
An ACI analog port can also be an External Page output. When connected to customer-provided External
Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging. To use the External Paging, an extension user
just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement. The system broadcasts
the announcement from the ACI analog port and simultaneously closes the associated PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging amplifier, if required. This external
paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination paging (internal and external).
For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP jack. Connect the amplifier
control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual
for additional details.
Auxiliary Device Control
The PGD(2)-U( ) ADP can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials the
ACI analog port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record
function. When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape
recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP jack. Connect the recorder
control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the System Hardware Manual for
additional details.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 37
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an extension
user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool.
The relays in the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells)
and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated
PGD(2)-U( ) ADP relay closes and activates the ringer. You can use this ability to control an emergency
buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.
ACI Call Recording
ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to a PGD(2)-U( ) ADP to
automatically record calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape recorder. You can
set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device or to a pool of ACI ports/devices.
With a single device, all calls are stored in a centralized location. With a pool of devices, be sure you have
a port available for recording – even in peak traffic periods. You can set up recording per trunk or per
extension.
When set up for automatic recording, ACI Call Recording starts automatically when the user places or
answers their call. The system can be programed to record all incoming trunk calls which ring an extension.
This includes the following trunk types:
Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
TieLlines
The system can also be programmed to record outgoing trunk calls, however, this is only possible using
E&M Tie Lines, PRI or BRI trunks.
ACI Call Recording is not available for intercom calls, transferred calls, or calls placed on hold and
answered by an extension with Call Recording enabled. To manually record any call (41
transferred, ICM, outgoing CO trunk, etc.), use the Voice Mail Conversation Record key (Service Code
751 + 78).
Physical Ports and Software Ports
Each PGD(2)-U( ) ADP has a physical port for connection to the telephone system and two logical ports.
For programming, the ports are also called software ports. The physical port connects to a station position
on a ESI ETU. During installation, the first PGD(2)-U( ) ADP you set up is physical port 1; the second
PGD(2)-U( ) ADP is physical port 2, etc. Each PGD(2)-U( ) ADP has two software ports, which are
numbered independently of the physical ports. Normally, the first PGD(2)-U( ) ADP set up has software
ports 1~2; the second PGD(2)-U( ) ADP has software ports 3~4, etc. There are a total of 96 software ports
(48 PGD(2)-U( ) ADPs x 2 ports each). During programming, you assign ACI extension numbers and
Department Group options to PGD(2)-U( ) ADP software ports, not physical ports. During installation, you
connect equipment to the jacks on the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP that correspond to the software port. Refer to the
UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for installation details.
2 - 38
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
ACD agents who are logged on can be recorded.
When ACI software ports are set to be a Background Music music source, it only plays to a
speaker, not a multiline telephone.
An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports. Music on Hold ACI software
ports can be Music on Hold music sources.
An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension
user:
One-Touch access to external music
One-Touch External Paging
One-Touch loud ringer control
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External
Paging circuits on the CD-CP00-AU. The PGD(2)-U( ) ADP can be connected to any DLC
port.
The devices connected to the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP must be compatible with the specifications below.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100/SV8300 System Hardware Manual for installation details.
PGD(2)-U( ) ADP/ACI Interface Specifications
Relay Contacts
Maximum Contact Ratings
30 V DC @ 60 mA
90 V AC @ 10 mA
Minimum Application Load
1 V DC @ 1 mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance
47 K Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Input
0.4Vrms or 1.0Vp-p.
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance
600 Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Output
+ 3 dBm
Default Settings
No PGD(2)-U( ) ADPs programmed.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 39
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Background Music
Hotline
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External
2 - 40
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-06
11-06-01
11-08-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ACI Extension Numbering
ACI Group Pilot Number
Assigns or displays the current
terminal type assigned to B Channel
1 for each port on the DLC.
Assigns or displays the current
terminal type assigned to B Channel
2 for each port on the ESI.
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)
3
Assign extension numbers to ACI
software ports. Select a number
outside of the normal extension
number range.
ACI Ports: 1~96
(default not assigned)
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups.
When a user dials the pilot number,
they reach an available ACI software
port within the group.
ACI Groups 1~16
(default not assigned)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
2 - 41
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
14-09-01
14-09-02
15-07-01
15-12-01
15-12-02
33-01-01
33-02-01
2 - 42
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Conversation Recording
Destination for Trunks – ACI
Recording Destination Extension
Number
Use this option to assign the ACI Call
Recording destination per trunk. The
destination can be an ACI port
extension number (assigned in
Program 11-06-01) or an ACI
Department Group pilot number
(assigned in Program 11-08-01). If
destinations are assigned in
Program 14-09 and Program 15-12,
the destination in Program 15-12 is
followed.
Extension Number =
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Trunks – ACI
Automatic Recording for
Incoming Calls
Determine whether or not a trunk
should be automatically recorded
when an incoming call is received.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
Programmable Function Keys
If required, program and ACI
Conversation Record Key (code 69 +
0). This key allows an extension user
to press the key to manually record a
call to the ACI.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Extensions – ACI
Recording Destination Extension
Number
3
3
3
3
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
Use this option to assign the ACI Call
Recording destination on a per
extension basis. The destination can
be an ACI port extension number
(assigned in Program 11-06) or an
ACI Department Group pilot number
(assigned in Program 11-08). If
destinations are assigned in
Program 14-09 and Program 15-12,
the destination in Program 15-12 is
followed.
Extension Number =
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Extensions – ACI
Automatic Recording for
Incoming Calls
Determine whether or not an
extension should be automatically
recorded when an incoming call is
received.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
ACI Port Type Setup – ACI Type
Set each ACI software port for input
(1) or input/output (2). Use input
ports for Music on Hold sources. Use
output ports for External Paging/
ringer control.
ACI Ports: 1~96
ACI Types:
0 = None
1 = MOH/BGM (Input)
2 = External Audio
Port (Input/Output
(default = 2)
3
Assign ACI software ports to ACI
Department Groups. This lets ACI
callers connect to ACI software ports
by dialing the group pilot number (set
in Program 11-08).
ACI Ports: 1~96
ACI Groups: 1~16
Default:
ACI Port/Group/Priority
01/ 1/ 1
02/ 1/ 2
: / :/ :
96/ 1/ 96
3
ACI Department Calling Group –
Group Number
2
3
3
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To call an ACI software port:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial ACI software port extension number.
- OR -
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
- OR -
Press the One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.
After you call an ACI software port:
If the port is set for input (Program 33-01-01=1) and a music source is connected, you hear music.
- OR -
If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and External Paging is connected, you can page
into the external zone.
- OR -
If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you activate the
loud ringer.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 43
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 44
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Ancillary Device Connection
Description
Ancillary Device Connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary) devices to a multiline
terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives.
An UNIVERGE SV8100 multiline terminal user can accomplish this by using the AP(R)-R( )/APR-L( ) Unit
(Analog Port Adapter with Ringer) or AP(A)-R( ) Unit (Analog Port Adapter without Ringer) for analog
telephone devices, or installing the AD(A)-R( )/APA-L( ) Unit to connect devices such as tape recorders.
The AP(A)-R( )/AP(R)-R( )/APA-L( ) Units are the interface for installing a single line telephone, Modem,
credit card reader, wireless headset, NEC Conference Max Conferencing unit or other compatible analog
device.
The PSA-L( ) Unit (Power Save Adapter), an optional adapter for the ITL/DTL Terminals, is used to make
or receive a call using the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when a call cannot be made with
the ITL/DLT extension.
System Availability
Terminals
All multiline terminals except DTR-2DT-1( ) TEL, DTP-2DT-1( ) TEL, and DTP-16HC-1( ) TEL.
Required Component(s)
AP(R)-R( ), AP(A)-R( ), PSA-L( ), ADA-L( ), APR-L( )
Conditions
The optional device fits underneath the terminal.
A single line telephone connected to an AP(R)-R( ) Unit or AP(A)-R( ) Unit cannot perform
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and does not support a conference with itself and two outside
parties.
A single line telephone connected to an AP(R)-R( ) Unit or AP(A)-R( ) Unit does not support
Message Waiting Indication or Caller ID Indication.
An AP(R)-R( ) Unit (analog port adapter with ringer) can be installed on a multiline terminal
and function separately from the multiline terminal.
When Program 10-03-06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for
an APR. The system uses ports 193~256 (starting with 256 and working down) for a total of
64 APR ports. APR 1 uses port 256, and APR 2 uses port 255, and so on.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 45
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
When Program 10-03-06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for
the APR.
DTP-2DT-1( ) and DTR-2DT-1( ) telephones have a built-in APA adapter.
Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit time
expires (Program 21-01-03).
When a single line phone is connected to an AP(R)-R( ) or APR-L( ), a conference cannot be
established unless the 2nd channel of ESI is used for APR in Program 10-03-06 and
Program 10-03-07.
When a single line phone is connected to an AP(R)-R( ) or APR-L( ), the 2nd channel of ESI
must be used (Programs 10-03-06 and 10-03-07) in order to switch back and forth between a
call and a call waiting.
APR-L( ) does not support DTL-2E-1( ), DTL-6E-1( ), or all ITL style phones.
ADA-L( ) can send confirmation sound to far end, but the recording machine must generate
confirmation sound.
Default Settings
None
Related Features
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
2 - 46
Ancillary Device Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
10-03-03
10-03-04
15-03-01
15-03-04
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) –
Transmit Gain Level (S-Level)
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
500/2500 type single line
telephones.
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) –
Receive Gain Level (R-Level)
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
500/2500 type single line
telephones.
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
Single Line Telephone Basic Data
Setup – SLT Signaling Type
Use this option to tell the system the
type of dialing the connected
telephone uses.
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
(default = 1)
3
Single Line Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Flashing
Enables/Disables Flash for single
line (500/2500 type) telephones.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 1)
3
3
3
3
Operation
Depends on the connected ancillary device.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 47
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 48
Ancillary Device Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Answer Hold
Description
Answer Hold allows a multiline terminal user to press the flashing Answer Key to answer an incoming
ringing call or a Camp-On call. When the multiline terminal user is already answering a call, the first call is
automatically placed on hold, depending on the user setting in Program 15-02-06.
Conditions
When multiple incoming calls activate the Answer Key LED, the LED continues to flash until
all calls are answered.
Use Program 15-02-06 (Normal Common, Exclusive Hold) to set the type of Hold key to be
used (Default = Normal Common).
For calls placed in a Park Group, the LED blinks fast (green).
For calls placed in a Park Group by another user, the LED blinks slow (red).
The Answer Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions.
The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls.
CO/PBX incoming calls, not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group, do not
activate the Answer Hold feature.
If the direct trunk appearance key is not assigned when all Call Appearance Keys are in use,
the next incoming call cannot be answered.
Default Settings
Normal Hold
System Availability
Terminals
Any Multiline Terminal
Required Component(s)
Not Applicable
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 49
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Answer Key
Central Office Calls, Answering
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-02
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer for Park Hold
15-02-06
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Use this option to set the function of
Setup – Hold Key Operating Mode the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key
can activate normal Hold or
Exclusive Hold.
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(default = 0)
Programmable Function Keys
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
15-07-01
Assign for a key on the multiline
terminal or single line telephone for
park hold.
Assign a park group to multiline
terminal line key.
MLT, SLT
(default = 6)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
11-12-32
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer for Park Hold
Assign for a key on the multiline
terminal or single line telephone for
park hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 6)
20-09-01
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Second
Call for DID/DISA/DIL/E&M
Override
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the extension
ability to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller to
ring through. If the destination
extension does not have a trunk
or CAP key available for the
second call and a previous call is
ringing the extension but has not
yet been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
2 - 50
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Answer Hold
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To answer a call on a different line key or CAP key with a call in progress:
1.
Receive a CO/PBX, DID/DISA/DIL/E&M incoming ring.
Answer flashes.
2.
Press Answer and answer the new call.
The Answer LED goes out. The original call is put on hold.
3.
If additional calls are received, press Answer to place the current call on hold and connect to the
next call as long as Call Appearance Keys and or CO line keys are available.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 51
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 52
Answer Hold
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Answer Key
Description
Multiline terminals have an Answer Key with an LED that flashes when the Multiline Terminal user
receives an incoming CO/PBX, Tie/DID transfer, or CO/PBX transfer call. When multiple calls are
received, The Answer Key is used to pick up calls and continues flashing until the last unanswered call is
answered. Press the Answer Key during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be
answered.
Conditions
The Answer LED functions for incoming CO/PBX calls, CO/PBX transfer/camp-on calls, and
transfer/camp-on Tie/DID calls.
Incoming calls answered by Answer are handled first in-first out.
An Internal call, internal transfer/camp-on call, CAR/SIE/VE calls do not activate the Answer
LED.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 53
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Answer Hold
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
22-02-01
22-04-01
22-05-01
2 - 54
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
Incoming Trunk Ring Group
Assignment
Assign the incoming trunk type for
each trunk.
2
Incoming Type for Day/
Night Mode (1~8):
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial
tone if no VRS
installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
3
Assign extensions to Ring Groups.
Use this program to assign
extensions (up to 32) to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions
according to Ring Group
programming. There are 100
available ring groups.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring for
incoming Ring Group 1
calls. No other
extensions ring for
incoming Ring Group 1
calls.
3
Assign trunks to incoming Ring
Groups. Use this program to assign
Normal Ring Trunks (Program
22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups
(Program 22-04).
Incoming Group
Number for Day/Night
Mode (1~8):
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Group)
102 (In-Skin/ External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)
3
3
Answer Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
22-07-01
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DIL Assignment
Assign the destination extension or
Department Group Pilot Number for
each DIL Incoming trunk.
Number of Transferring
Destinations for Day/
Night Modes (1~8):
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
Pilot Number
(default not assigned)
2
3
3
Operation
To answer calls using the Answer Key:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Press Answer.
3.
Talk with the CO/PBX incoming calling party.
4.
When additional CO incoming calls are received, press Answer to place the current call on hold and
connect the multiline terminal user to the next call.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 55
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 56
Answer Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Attendant Call Queuing
Description
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone.
This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for
unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to the
attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, unanswered calls would
normally “stack up” for the attendant until they can be processed.
The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, Tie Line and transferred calls. If the attendant
does not have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line to be answered. If the attendant has
more than 32 calls queued, an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy
Transfer enabled.
Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.
Conditions
Forwarding when unanswered or busy can occur only at the attendant if more than 32 calls
are in queue.
Assigning a station as operator in Program 20-17-01 enables call queuing function.
Program 20-17-01 setting overrides setting in Program 20-09-07:Call Queuing Class of
Service Option when set to disable.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Any Multiline Terminal assigned as an operator
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 57
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
11-01-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Set the system internal (Intercom)
numbering plan. The numbering plan
assigns the first and second digits
dialed and affects the digits an
extension user must dial to access
other extensions and features, such
as service codes and trunk codes. If
the default numbering plan does not
meet the site requirements, use this
program to tailor the system
numbering to the site.
Refer to System
Numbering Default
Settings table in the
UNIVERGE SV8100
Programming Manual
for a list of default
settings.
System Options – Operator
Access Mode
Assign the priority of a call when
calling an operator telephone.
0 = Step
1 = Circular
(default = 0)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
20-17-01
Operator Extension – Operator’s
Extension Number
Define the extension numbers which
are to be used by operators.
Up to eight digits
(default = ext. 101)
24-02-01
System Options for Transfer –
Busy Transfer
Use this option to Disable or Enable
extensions to Transfer calls to busy
extensions. If disabled, calls
transferred to busy extensions recall
immediately.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
20-01-01
20-09-07
System Numbering – Service
Code
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Operation
None
2 - 58
Attendant Call Queuing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among agents of a programmed ACD Group.
When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system automatically routes the call to the agent that has been
idle the longest. Automatic Call Distribution is much more sophisticated and comprehensive than
Department Calling and other group services – it can accurately judge the work load at each agent and
distribute calls accordingly. The system allows up to 64 ACD Groups and 256 ACD agents.
You can put any agent in any group. An agent can be in more than one group only when using AICs. This
allows, for example, a Technical Service representation to answer customer service calls at lunch when
many of the Customer Service representatives are unavailable.
The ACD Master Number is the extension number of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or transferred
to the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although the master number can
be any valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the normal extension range.
Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by:
ACD Call Queuing
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call queues and causes the Queue Status
Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor display. The display helps the supervisor keep track of the
traffic load in their group.
The Queue Status Displays shows:
The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group.
The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:
The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs.
If the supervisor should hear a Queue Alarm when the time in queue portion reoccurs.
This alarm is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue.
A remote K-CCIS user can call, or transfer to an ACD Pilot number. However, an incoming K-CCIS
call to the ACD Pilot does NOT provide a Link Reconnect.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 59
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
ACD Overflow (With Announcements)
ACD offers extensive overflow options for each ACD Group. For example, a caller ringing in when all
agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st Announcement). This
announcement can be a general greeting like, “Thank you for calling. All of our agents are currently busy
helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly.” If the caller continues to
wait, you can have them hear another announcement (called the 2nd Announcement) such as, “Your
business is important to us. Your call will be automatically answered by the first available agent. Please
stay on the line.” If all the ACD Group agents still are unavailable, the call can automatically overflow to
another ACD Group or the Voice Mail. If all agents in the overflow ACD Group are busy, Lookback
Routing automatically ensures that the waiting call rings into the first agent in either group that becomes
free.
You can assign an ACD Group with any combination of 1st Announcement, 2nd Announcement and
overflow methods. You can have, for example, a Technical Service group that plays only the 2nd
Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail. At the same time, you can have a
Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does not overflow.
You can assign an ACD Group to play the Queue Depth only when using the VRS for message. The
Queue Depth can be played after the 1st Announcement only, 2nd Announcement only, or after both
Announcements.
Dial Out of Delay Announcements
When listening to a VRS delay announcement, the caller can press a 1-key option to transfer them to
another extension, Voice Mail, Ring Group, another ACD Group, or to a Speed Dial bin. The caller can
press the digit during the message only or for X seconds after the message. This per Queue option
affects both the first and second delay announcement if set.
VRS Delay Announcements Using VM8000 InMail
VM8000 InMail can provide ACD Delay Announcements. Any of the 16 (1~16) VM8000 InMail Master
mailboxes (Program 47-07-01) can be set to Announcement mailboxes and can be used as the message
source for the 1st and 2nd Announcement Messages. This option is applicable only to ACD Overflow
modes that are assigned ACD delayed messages and Program 41-08-03 must be set to 2.
Agent Log In and Log Out Services
An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group. While logged in, the agent is available to receive
ACD Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the group calls. The programmable keys
and Alphanumeric Display on an agent telephone show at a glance when they are logged in or logged out.
2 - 60
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Agent Identity Code (AIC)
An Agent Identity Code (AIC) allows ACD agents to log in any extension without setting Program
41-02-01. Using AIC, ACD agents can also log in to multiple ACD groups at the same time (up to 64 ACD
Groups). The system also allows all extensions (up to the system maximum) to log in using the same AIC
code. AIC and ACD groups for each work period (mode pattern number) can be set in Program 41-18-01
as shown in the following example.
Mode Pattern Number
Table
#
AIC
1
789
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
789
1
2
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
789
1
16
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
567
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
678
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
678
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
678
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Operation
Group
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Example:
With this example, ACD works as follows:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789
During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, and 16 at the same time.
During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents belong to only ACD group 1.
During Mode Pattern 3~8, ACD agents do not belong to any ACD group and the ACD extensions work as
normal extensions.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 567
During Mode Patterns 1~8, ACD agents belong to only ACD group 10.
Example 3: Log In with AIC 678
During Mode Patterns 1~8, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 2, 3 and 5 at the same time.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 61
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Multiple Agent Log In
ACD agents can log in any extension with multiple AICs (up to three). Using the example setup above,
ACD works as follows:
EXAMPLE:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789 and 567
During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 10 and 16 at the same time.
During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1 and 10.
During Mode Pattern 3~8, ACD agents belong to only ACD group 10.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 789, 567 and 678
During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 16 at the same time.
During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10.
During Mode Pattern 3~8, ACD agents belong to only ACD groups 2, 3, 5 and 10.
Some conditions with Multiple Agent Log In:
ACD agents cannot log in to the system supervisor or group supervisor extension.
To log in with AIC, the extension should be set to AIC Log In mode in Program 41-17-01.
If the extension is set to AIC log in mode in Program 41-17-01, the system ignores the setting of
Program 41-02-01 for the extension.
Multiple extensions (up to the maximum capacity of the extension) can log-in with one AIC. For
example, even if ACD agent A logs in extension 350 with AIC 789, ACD agent B can also log in to
extension 351 with the same AIC 789 at the same time.
A supervisor cannot log out an agent logged in by an AIC code.
Emergency Call
If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their ACD Group
Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically monitor both the ACD
Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can join in the conversation.
Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that need technical advice or assistance
with a difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to the conversation and then “jump in” if the situation
gets out of hand.
2 - 62
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Enhanced DSS Operation
A programmed extension user can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the ACD Agents in a
group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. The console key flash rates tell the
supervisor at a glance which of the group agents is:
Logged onto the group (i.e., in service).
Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service).
Busy on a call.
Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor.
Not available or installed.
The ACD Supervisor can use their console for placing and transferring calls – just like any other extension
user.
Flexible Time Schedules
An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for scheduling the
activity in your ACD Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with up to eight Work Periods in
each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule, but different days can share the
same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday Work Schedule could consist of only two
Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM – when your business is open. Work
Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00 AM – which covers those times when your business is closed.
Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer)
An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can use a customer-provided headset in place of the handset.
The headset conveniently frees up the user’s hands for other work and provides privacy while on the call.
In addition, an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer. This allows an agent busy on a call
to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up.
Incoming Call Routing
Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups. These types of calls ring directly into
the ACD Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated Attendant.
Rest Mode
Rest Mode temporarily logs-out an ACD agent’s telephone. There are two types of Rest Mode:
Manual Rest Mode:
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily leave the ACD Group.
They might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away from their work area. While in
Rest Mode, calls to the ACD Group do not ring the agent’s telephone.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 63
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Automatic Rest Mode:
When an ACD Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system automatically puts an agent’s telephone
in Rest Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers do not have to wait while ACD rings an
extension that is not answered. For multiline terminals, the system enables Automatic Rest Mode for
all telephones with Rest Mode keys. For single line telephones, you must set an option in
programming to enable Automatic Rest Mode. If an agent’s telephone is placed in Rest Mode
because a call is not answered, the agent needs to manually cancel Rest Mode to log back into the
ACD group.
With a Rest Mode key programmed on an ACD agent’s telephone, when the agent is in rest mode, the
key is lit. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while an agent is on a call, the key flashes to indicate a preRest Mode status. When the current call is finished, the agent’s telephone is in rest mode. The agent
can place intercom calls or receive direct incoming calls while in Rest Mode. The ability to receive
incoming intercom calls is defined in system programming for each ACD group.
An ACD System Supervisor cannot be placed in Rest Mode.
Supervisor, ACD Group
You can designate an extension in an ACD Group to be the group supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD
Group Supervisor, the user can:
Take the entire ACD Group out of service.
Check the log out status of each agent after the group is taken down.
Restore the ACD Group to service.
During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each ACD Group supervisor:
Supervisor’s extension cannot receive calls to the ACD Group.
Supervisor’s extension can receive only ACD Group calls during overflow conditions.
Supervisor’s extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent.
An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. An extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD Group.
Supervisor, ACD System
You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD System
Supervisor, the user can:
Take all the system ACD Groups out of service simultaneously.
Check the log out status of each agent after the groups are taken down.
Restore all the ACD Groups to service simultaneously.
The system can have only one ACD System Supervisor.
2 - 64
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Work Time
Work Time temporarily busies-out an ACD agent’s telephone so they can work at their desk uninterrupted.
This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are finished with their call.
There are two types of Work Time:
Manual Work Time:
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Work Time anytime they need to work at their desk undisturbed.
You might prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to fill out follow-up paper work
after they complete their call. When the agent is through catching up with their work, they manually
return themselves to the ACD Group.
Automatic Work Time:
The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call.
This is helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up paperwork is a
requirement for every call. When the agent is done with their work, they manually return themselves to
the ACD Group.
Hotline Key Shows Agent Status
An extension Hotline key provides the normal Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers and a unique BLF for
ACD Agents. Like the supervisor’s DSS Console BLF, the unique BLF shows when the covered agent is in
service, out of service or busy on a call. This enhanced BLF gives a department manager, for example,
ACD Group monitoring abilities without having to become a supervisor with a DSS Console.
Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline
partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer
calls to each other just by pressing a single key. Enhanced for ACD applications, Hotline provides a
unique Busy Lamp Field for ACD agents as well as a BLF for co-workers that are not ACD agents. The
charts below show both sets of BLF indications.
BLF For ACD Agents
When the key is . . .
The ACD Agent is . . .
Off
Idle and is not an ACD Agent
On
Busy
Double Wink Off
Making an Emergency Call
Wink Off
Logged off or not installed
Double Wink On
Logged on
BLF For Co-Workers That Are Not ACD Agents
When the key is . . .
Your co-worker is . . .
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Fast
Flash In Do Not Disturb – All calls (option 3) or Intercom calls (option 2)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 65
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Enhanced Supervisor Options:
An ACD supervisor can individually assign extensions to ACD Groups, and set an agent’s status once
assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agents as work loads
vary.
Queue Status Display with Scrolling:
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call queues and causes the Queue
Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor and/or agent’s display (based on the Class of
Service). The display helps the supervisor keep track of the traffic load in their group. Any display
multiline terminal can have a Queue Status Display Check programmable function key. The multiline
terminal user can press this key anytime while idle, and using the VOL ( ) and VOL ( ), scroll
through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD Groups. The Queue Status Displays shows (see the
Queue Status Display illustration below):
The number of calls queued.
The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
The number of
calls in queue.
How long the longest queued
call has been waiting.
2 LINE-001
01:30
Name of trunk that has
been queued the longest.
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:
The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the Queue Status display Timing illustration
below).
Queue Status Display holding time.
Queue Status Alarm enable/disable.
Queue Status Alarm sending time
2 - 66
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
.
When Logged Out of ACD Group:
When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed into the ACD queue, the telephones of the
logged out agents display the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined
in system programming. Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the
telephone to idle until the time in Program 41-20-03 expires again.
Do not use both Program 41-15-01~02 and Program 41-20-01~05 to set the ACD queue alarm. Select either one or
the other for the system to follow.
Available in
Program 41-15-01~02
Available in
Program 41-20-01~05
Queue Status Display
---
Yes
Queue Status
Display Time
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Program 41-15-02 determines the length/
interval of the alarm.
Yes
Feature
Alarm
Alarm Send Time
Interval Time of Queue Status
Display
Yes
Class of Service
Timing of alarm and display queue
status
---
Yes
Alarm triggered after the number of calls
in Program 41-15-01 is exceeded.
Alarm triggered after the
number of calls in Program 4120-01 is exceeded. Then
follows Program 41-20-03
timing for displaying status.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 67
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
If a telephone is not idle, it cannot use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key.
The Queue Status Display is not shown and the Queue Alarm is not heard by ACD agents in Off-Duty mode.
To scroll through the ACD groups queue status, the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key must be
used. You cannot scroll when the Queue Status Display is displayed due to an alarm.
If the Queue Status display and alarm are active and the queued called is answered/disconnected, the display and
alarm continue until the times in Program 41-20-02 and Program 41-20-05 expire.
When an overflowed call is in queue, the call is included in its original ACD group queue and not in the group queue
to which it overflowed.
The Queue Status is not displayed on a supervisor’s telephone based on the settings in Programs
41-20-xx. The supervisor must use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key to view the queue.
Programmable Wrap-up Timer
When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and blocks any ACD
calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a new call comes
in. When the time expires, the system returns the agent to the ACD Group to handle new callers.
MIS
The UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD MIS is a series of Windows®-based software programs designed to
enhance the ACD features of the UNIVERGE SV8100 Telephone System. The software displays both
real-time data and historical reports. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD MIS Supervisors Manual for
more information.
ACD Group as Overflow Destination
The system can transfer an overflow call to a specific ACD Group, off-site via a speed dial bin, Ring Group
or to voice mail using Program 41-09-01. When Program 41-08-02: ACD Overflow Destination has the
ACD Overflow Destination set to 65, the system overflows the call to the ACD Group programmed in
Program 41-09-01. (The system does not allow you to program an ACD group with that ACD group as the
overflow.) If, while the call is ringing, the extension where the call was transferred becomes available,
both the extension and the overflow ACD group ring.
Conditions
System:
VM8000 InMail can play ACD Delay Announcements.
If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue, a transferred call to the ACD Pilot number
recalls immediately back to the transferring party.
If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue trunk call directly, ringing the Queue is placed
in queue.
If defined in Program 22-11-03, DID calls in queue display the trunk name with the Queue
Status feature.
When Program 12-07-01 is customized, an agent’s display does not indicate the WAIT ACD
LOGIN status, however an agent may still log in.
2 - 68
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conversation Recording is programmed system-wide – it is not ACD feature-specific.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for additional information.
Up to 16 channels (speech paths) are available when using the DSP with VRS installed on
the CD-CP00-AU for messages.
When the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP is providing the 1st Delay Announcements, it continues to play
until the call is answered, abandoned, or the time in 41-10-04 expires and starts to play the
2nd Delay Announcement. The 2nd Delay Announcement continues to play until the call is
answered, abandoned, or the time in 41-10-05 expires and drops the call. This message
does not start from the beginning because it is on a constant loop.
The Dial Out of Queue feature is not supported during VM8000 InMail Delay
Announcements.
Wireless DECT (SIP) is not supported with ACD.
When all VM8000 InMail talk paths (ports) are simultaneously being accessed by VM8000
InMail Mailbox subscribers or Voice Mail Delay Announcements, or combination of the two,
the next incoming call to the VM8000 InMail will Ring No Answer until an available talk path
becomes idle (First Come – First Served).
When Voice Mail Delay Announcements are being played, VM8000 InMail talk paths (ports)
are used.
VM8000 InMail cannot be used for ACD Night Announcement.
Program 41-08-03: ACD Overflow Options – Delay Announcement Source Type.
The ACI port used for the ACD Delay Announcements is programmed like Music on Hold
(MOH) ACI ports. Refer to the MOH Music on Hold on page 2-763.
MIS:
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system does not buffer the ACD Statistics when the PC running the
ACD Server application is not connected.
If an ACD Queue call is transferred to another logged-in Agent, it shows that both agents
took a call but the queue only shows it as one total call.
The programming of the Agents and Queues in the UNIVERGE SV8100 system are not
transferred to the PC running the ACD Server/MIS applications. The ACD Server/MIS
applications are programmed separately.
If the caller overflows out of the Queue to a Speed Dial Bin, Ring Group, or Voice Mail it
reports as an abandoned call.
If the caller overflows out of the Queue to a Speed Dial Bin, Ring Group, or Voice Mail it
reports as an overflow call.
A supervisor assigned to not receive calls or take calls after the overflow time is reached will
show as idle in MIS when they are logged in and idle even when calls are queued up and not
reaching the overflow time.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 69
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for more details.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
ACD Software License
PZ-VM21 Unit
VM8000 InMail (2 or 4) port flash drive
(For Delay Announcements using VM8000 InMail)
Required Software
None
Related Features
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
VM8000 InMail
Music on Hold
Night Service
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 70
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for complete programming information.
Program
Number
11-13-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD LogIn/Log Out (for KTS)
Assign for multiline terminals and
single line telephones.
MLT, SLT
(default =
5)
3
11-13-02
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Log Out (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 655)
3
11-13-03
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 656)
3
11-13-04
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Cancel ACD Wrap-Up Time
(for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 657)
3
11-13-05
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 658)
3
11-13-06
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 659)
3
11-13-08
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Agent ID Code Login
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log
into a group.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-13-09
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Agent ID Code Logout
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log
out of a group.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-13-10
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Login by Supervisor
Assign to allow an ACD Supervisor
to log into a group.
MLT
(default = 667)
3
11-13-11
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor
Assign to allow an ACD Supervisor
to log out of a group.
MLT
(default = 668)
3
11-13-12
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Change Agent ACD Group by
Supervisor
When using service code 669 to
change an agent ACD group, the
supervisor must enter a 2-digit
number for the group. For example,
to change to ACD group 4, the entry
would be 669 04.
MLT
(default = 669)
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Changing Own ACD
Group
When this service code is used, an
ACD Agent can reassign themselves
to another ACD Group.
MLT
(default = 670)
11-13-13
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 71
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
11-17-01
15-07-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Group Pilot Number
Programmable Function Keys
Assign the ACD Master Number for
each ACD Group.
Assign functions to multiline terminal
line keys.
ACD Group Number:
01~64
ACD Group Pilot
Number:
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
15-08-01
15-09-01
15-11-01
20-04-03
20-06-01
20-13-06
2 - 72
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Setup
2
3
3
When an extension or a virtual
extension is assigned to the function
key on the key telephone, select the
ring tone when receiving a call on
that key.
For ACD CAR keys, only tone
pattern 1 (entry 0) can be used. The
remaining patterns are not checked
with this feature.
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Ring Tone
Extension
(default = 0, Tone
Pattern 1)
Assign the ringing options for an
extension Virtual Extension Key or
Virtual Extension Group Answer Key,
which is defined in Program 15-07.
Make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode. There are 256 Virtual
Extension Ports.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Ringing:
0 = No Ringing
1 = Ring
(default = 0)
Assign the delayed ringing options
for an extension Virtual Extension or
Virtual Extension Group Answer
keys (defined in Program 15-09).
You make an assignment for each
Night Service Mode. There are 256
Virtual Extension Ports.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Ringing:
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
(default = 0)
System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed Ringing
(see Program 15-11) ring the
extension after this interval.
0~64800
(default = 10 seconds)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (COS) to
an extension. There are 15 Classes
of Service that can be assigned.
Assign eight entries, one for each
Night Service Mode.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port =
Class 1
3
Allows a busy extension to Manually
(0) or Automatically (1) receive offhook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Virtual Extension Ring
Assignment
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
3
3
3
3
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-33
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
Set this option to on for the operator
to use service codes in Program 1113-10 ~ 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension,
which has this option enabled, also
hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
System Options for Incoming
Calls – VRS Waiting Message
Interval Time
Setup the sending duration time of
the Auto – Attendant & Queuing.
The message is repeatedly sent out
within the specified time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
DSS Console Operating Mode
Use this program to set the mode of
the system DSS consoles. The entry
for this option applies to all the
system DSS consoles.
0 = Business Mode
1 = Hotel Mode
2 = ACD Monitor Mode
3 = Business/ACD Mode
(default = 0)
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Busy
Use this program to define the LED
patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles. The entry for this option
applies to all the system DSS
consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data
0~7
[default = 7(on)]
30-05-05
DSS Console Lamp Table – Out of
Schedule (ACD DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
out of schedule (ACD/DSS)
functions on the DSS consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data
0~7
[default = 0 (Off)]
3
30-05-06
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log Out (ACD DSS)
Use this program to define the LED
patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data: 0~7
[default = 5 (IL)]
3
30-05-07
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log In (ACD DSS)
Use this program to define the LED
patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data: 0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]
3
30-05-08
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Emergency (ACD DSS)
Use this program to define the LED
patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data: 0~7
[default = 6 (IW)]
3
40-10-01
Voice Announcement Service
Option – VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system
ability to play the fixed VRS
messages (such as You have a
message).
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
(default = 0)
3
System Options for ACD –
System Supervisory Extension
Define the ACD Supervisor for the
entire system.
Up to eight digits
(0~9, , #)
(default not assigned)
3
41-01-02
System Options for ACD – Login
ID Code Digit
Define the number of digits for agent
login ID code.
0~20 (0 = No Login ID)
(default = 0)
3
41-01-03
System Options for ACD – ACD
MIS Connection Ports
Define what port is used for ACD
MIS connection. Currently only LAN
is supported.
0 = None
3 = LAN (CD-CP00-AU)
(default = 0)
System Options for ACD –
ACD-MIS Command Notification
when a BT Message is returned
ACD-MIS Command Notification
when a BT message is returned.
0 = Notifies
1 = No notification
(default = 0)
20-13-39
22-01-11
30-01-01
30-05-04
41-01-01
41-01-04
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 73
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
41-02-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
For each ACD extension number,
assign an ACD Group (1~64). An
ACD Group number is assigned to
each Work Period number (1~8).
ACD Work Period Mode
Number: 1~8
ACD Group Number:
0~64 (0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
3
Incoming Ring Group
Assignment for ACD Group –
ACD Group Number
For each incoming trunk group set
up in Program 22-05, designate
which ACD Group (1~64) the trunks
should ring for each of the eight
Work Periods.
ACD Group Number:
0~64
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
3
Incoming Ring Group
Assignment for ACD Group –
Night Announcement Service
Designate for each incoming trunk,
whether or not Night Announcement
Service is assigned.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)
3
Incoming Ring Group
Assignment for ACD Group –
Priority Data
Determine whether an incoming call
to a trunk ring group should follow a
priority assignment.
0, 1~7
0 = No Priority
1 = Highest Priority
7 = Lowest Priority
(default = 0)
3
41-04-01
ACD Group Supervisor – Group
Supervisor Extension
Assign the group supervisor
extension.
Extension Number = Up
to eight digits
(default not assigned)
3
41-04-02
ACD Group Supervisor –
Operation Type
Assign the supervisor operating
type.
0 = Do Not receive any
ACD incoming calls (No)
1 = Receive ACD
incoming calls in case of
overflow (Busy)
2 = Receive ACD
incoming calls all the
time (Yes)
(default = 0)
3
41-03-01
41-03-02
41-03-03
41-05-01
41-06-01
2 - 74
ACD Group and Agent
Assignments
2
ACD Agent Work Schedules
Trunk Work Schedules
Use this program to set up the Work
Schedules for ACD Agents and
Groups. For each ACD Work
Schedule (1~4), designate the start
and stop times for each of the eight
Work Periods. After the schedules
are set up in this program, assign
them to days of the week in Program
41-07. (This is the same program
used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)
After the schedules are set up in this
program, assign them to days of the
week in Program 41-07.
Work Period Mode
Number = 1~ 8
Start Time = 0000~2359
End Time = 0000~2359
Default:
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
Use this program to set up the Work
Schedules for trunks. For each Work
Schedule (1~4), designate the start
and stop times for each of the eight
Work Periods.
After the schedules are set up,
assign them to days of the week in
Program 41-07.
Work Period Mode
Number = 1~ 8
Start Time = 0000~2359
End Time = 0000~2359
Default:
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
3
3
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
41-07-01
41-08-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
ACD Overflow Options – Overflow
Operation Mode
Assign the four Work Schedules
(1~4) to days of the week.
The assignments made in this
program apply to both the ACD
Agent Work Schedules (Program 4105) and the Trunk Work Schedules
(Program 41-06).
Assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement
message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number calls.
Each ACD Group can have unique
overflow options.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
Day No./Time Pattern:
1 = Sunday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
2 = Monday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
3 = Tuesday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
4 = Wednesday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
5 = Thursday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
6 = Friday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
7 = Saturday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
0 = No overflow (None)
1 = Overflow with No
Announcement
2 = No Overflow with
First Announcement
Only
3 = No Overflow with
First & Second
Announcements
4 = Overflow with First
Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First
and Second
Announcement
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = No Overflow with
Second Announcement
Only
9 = Overflow with
Second Announcement
Only
(default = 0)
2
3
3
3
2 - 75
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
41-08-02
41-08-03
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Overflow Options – ACD
Overflow Destination
ACD Overflow Options – Delay
Announcement Source Type
2
Assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement
message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number calls.
Each ACD Group can have unique
overflow options.
0 = No Setting
1~64 = ACD Group
65 = Overflow Table
(Program 41-09)
66 = Voice Mail
Integration
67 = System Speed
(Program 41-08-05)
68 = Incoming Ring
Group (Program
41-08-06)
(default = 0)
Assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement
message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number calls.
Each ACD Group can have unique
overflow options.
0 = ACI
1 = VRS
2 = VM8000 InMail
(default = 0)
3
3
41-08-04
ACD Overflow Options – ACD
Overflow Transfer Time
Define the time before ACD overflow
occurs. Each ACD Group can have
unique overflow options.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
3
41-08-05
ACD Overflow Options – System
Speed Dial Bin
Assign the speed dial bin to be used
as the ACD overflow destination.
Using a speed dial bin for ACD
Overflow is supported only for off
premise calls.
0~1999
(Used when 41-08-02 is
set to 67)
(default = 1999)
3
ACD Overflow Options –
Incoming Ring Group
Assign the Ring Group for ACD
overflow calls to go to.
1~100
(Used when 41-08-02 is
set to 68)
(default = 1)
3
ACD Overflow Table Setting
Use this program to define the ACD
group to which a call is transferred
when overflow occurs.
0~65
0 = No Setting
65 = In-Skin Voice Mail
Integration
(default = 0)
3
ACI Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Announcement ACI Port
Number
Use this program to define the ACI
port number to be used for the delay
announcement. This program is
activated when the delay
announcement source and options
are assigned as ACI in Program 4108-03.
0~96
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
ACI Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Announcement ACI Port
Number
Use this program to define the ACI
port number to be used for the delay
announcement.This program is
activated when the delay
announcement source and options
are assigned as ACI in Program 4108-03.
0~96
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
ACI Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Announcement Connection
Timer
Use this program to define the time
before the 1st Delay Announcement
is played.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 4 seconds)
41-08-06
41-09-01
41-10-01
41-10-02
41-10-03
2 - 76
3
3
3
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
41-10-04
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACI Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Announcement Connection
Timer
Set the time between when the 1st
Delay Announcement plays and
when the 2nd Delay Announcement
plays.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
ACI Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Announcement Sending
Duration
Set the timer for how long the 2nd
Delay Announcement plays. After
this time expires, the call
disconnects. To keep the call in
queue, set this time to 0.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
41-11-01
VRS Delay Announcement –
Delay Message Start Timer
Input the time before the 1st Delay
Message Starts.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
41-11-02
VRS Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Message Number
Assign the VRS message number to
be used as the message source for
the 1st and 2nd Delay
Announcement Messages. Refer to
Program 41-08 for more on setting
up the ACD overflow options. This
program is activated when the delay
announcement source and options
are assigned as VRS in Program 4108-03.
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
(default = 0)
41-10-05
2
3
3
3
3
41-11-03
VRS Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Message Sending Count
Input the number of times the 1st
Delay Message is sent. If set to 0,
the message is not played.
0~255
(default = 0)
3
41-11-04
VRS Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Message Number
Input the VRS Message to be played
as the 2nd Delay Message.
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
(default = 0)
3
41-11-05
VRS Delay Announcement – 2nd
Waiting Message Sending Count
Input the number of times the 2nd
Delay Message is sent. If set to 0,
the message is not played
0~255
(default = 0)
3
41-11-06
VRS Delay Announcement – Tone
Kind at Message Interval
Input what is heard between the
Delay messages.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
(default = 0)
3
VRS Delay Announcement – ACD
Forced Disconnect Time after the
2nd Delay Message
Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay
Message is played, before the call is
disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
0 = No Disconnect
(default = 60 seconds)
3
VRS Delay Announcement –
Queue Depth Announcement
(Requires VRS)
Input when the Queue Depth
Announcement will be played.
0 = Disable
1 = After 1st (1st)
2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)
(default = 0)
3
Night Announcement Setup –
Night Announcement Source
Type
Define the source for each ACD
groups night announcement. Night
announcement availability depends
on the setting in Program 41-03-02.
0 = ACI
1 = VRS
(default = 0)
3
Night Announcement Setup –
Night Announcement ACI Port
Number
Define the ACI port to be used for
the ACD Night Announcement
function.
0~96
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
41-11-07
41-11-08
41-12-01
41-12-02
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 77
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
41-12-03
41-13-01
41-13-02
41-14-01
41-14-02
41-14-03
41-14-04
41-14-06
41-14-07
2 - 78
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Night Announcement Setup –
ACD Night Announce Sending
Time
Define the length of time the ACD
night Announcement will play. Only
used when Program 41-12-01 is set
to 0 (ACI). Night announcement
availability depends on the setting in
Program 41-03-02.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
VRS Message Number for Night
Announcement – VRS Message
Number
Define the VRS message number to
be used as the night announcement.
This program is activated when the
night announcement source is
assigned as VRS in Program
41-12-01.
0~100
0 = No Message
(default = 0)
VRS Message Number for Night
Announcement – Tone Kind at
Message Interval
Input what is heard between VSR
Night Announcements.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
(default = 0)
3
ACD Options Setup – Emergency
Call Operation Mode
Define if Emergency Calls ring the
system supervisory extension or not
when the group supervisory
extension is busy. This option allows
the supervisor to press an
Emergency Key (programmed for
this feature) once to monitor the call
or twice to barge in on the call. The
supervisor must be logged in for this
feature to work.
0 = Call to system
supervisory extension
when group supervisory
extension is busy.
1 = No calls to system
supervisory extension
when group supervisory
extension is busy.
(default = 0)
3
Define if agents manually enter wrap
mode by pressing a key, or are put
automatically into wrap mode at end
of an ACD call. This setting applies
to all agents in the selected group.
0 = After wrap up mode
key is pressed (Manual)
1 = After call is finished
automatically (Auto)
(default = 0)
3
ACD Options Setup – ACD
Priority for Overflow Calls
This option determines whether the
ACD group should use its own
priority assignment or if it should
follow the priority assigned in
Program 41-03-03.
0 = Own group priority
1 = Priority order by
Program 41-03-03
(default = 0)
3
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Answer
This option Enables/Disables
Automatic Answer for agents using
headsets.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
3
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Wrap Up Mode
3
ACD Options Setup – Call
This option determines whether the
Queuing after 2nd Announcement caller should hear the 2nd Delay
Announcement and then be taken
out of queue (1), or be placed back
into queue (0).
0 = Enable (Yes)
1 = Disable (No)
(default = 0)
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Off Duty for SLT
0 = No change to off duty
mode
1 = Change to off duty
mode automatically
(Skip)
(default = 0)
This option Enables/Disables
Automatic Off Duty (rest) mode for
agents with single line telephones.
3
3
3
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
41-14-08
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Options Setup – ACD Off
Duty Mode
This option Enables (1) or Disables
(2) the agent’s ability to receive
internal calls in ACD Off Duty Mode.
0 = Cannot receive
internal call
1 = Can receive internal
call
(default = 0)
3
3
41-14-09
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Wrap Up End Time
This option sets the number of
seconds for the Automatic Wrap Up
End Time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
41-14-10
ACD Options Setup – ACD No
Answer Skip Time
This option sets how long a call to
the ACD Group rings an idle
extension before routing to the next
agent.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
ACD Options Setup – Start
Headset Ear Piece Ringing (for
SLT)
This option sets the ringing start time
for the headset ear piece on a single
line telephone.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
ACD Options Setup – ACD Queue
1-Digit Assignment
Set various options for ACD Groups.
When an option is set for an ACD
Group, the setting is in force (if
applicable) for all agents in the
group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64) assign
the One-Digit number (0~9, , #) to
be used for the One-Digit Dial Out
Option.
1st Data:
Up to one digit
(0, 1~9, #, )
2nd Data:
(default = Blank)
Set various options for ACD Groups.
When an option is set for an ACD
Group, the setting is in force (if
applicable) for all agents in the
group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64), assign
the Destination Number Type.
2nd Data:
0 = None
1 = Extension or Voice
Mail
2 = Incoming Ring Group
3 = Speed Dial Bin
4 = ACD Group
(default = 0)
Set various options for ACD Groups.
When an option is set for an ACD
Group, the setting is in force (if
applicable) for all agents in the
group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64), assign
the destination number for the
assigned Destination Type.
3rd Data:
Up to eight digits
(0, 1~9, #, )
(default = Blank)
Set various options for ACD Groups.
When an option is set for an ACD
Group, the setting is in force (if
applicable) for all agents in the
group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64), assign
if the One-Digit Dial Out option can
(1 = Yes) or cannot (0 = No) be
pressed during the Delay
Announcements.
0 = Does not detect
during message
1 = Detect during
message
(default = 1)
41-14-12
41-14-13-1
41-14-13-2
41-14-13-3
41-14-14
ACD Options Setup – Destination
Number Type
ACD Options Setup – Destination
Number
ACD Options Setup – DTMF
Detection Assignment during
Delay Announcement
2
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 79
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
41-14-15
41-15-01
41-15-02
41-16-01
41-16-02
41-17-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Options Setup – DTMF
Detect Time after Delay
Announcement Message
2
Set various options for ACD Groups.
When an option is set for an ACD
Group, the setting is in force (if
applicable) for all agents in the
group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64), assign
the amount (0~64800 seconds) of
time after the Delay Announcement
that the 1-Digit Dial Out option
works.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
ACD Queue Alarm Information –
Number of Calls in ACD Queue to
Activate Alarm Information
Define the number of calls that must
be in queue before the Alarm
Information is activated.
Do not use these programs if the
alarm options are defined in Program
41-20-01 through 41-20-05.
0~200
0 = No Alarm
(default = 0)
ACD Queue Alarm Information –
Interval Time of Alarm
Information
Define how long the Alarm will ring
when activated.
Do not use these programs if the
alarm options are defined in Program
41-20-01 through 41-20-05.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
ACD Threshold Overflow –
Number of Calls in Queue
This option defines the maximum
number of calls allowed in the ACD
queue before overflow occurs.
0~200
(0 = No Limitation)
(default = 0)
3
ACD Threshold Overflow –
Operation Mode for ACD Queue
This option defines how the system
should handle calls when the
number of calls in queue exceeds
the threshold.
0 = The last waiting call
is transferred
1 = The longest waiting
call is transferred
2 = Send Busy Tone
(default = 0)
3
Define the ACD login mode for each
extension. If the AIC Login Mode is
enabled, set the AIC Login and AIC
Logout service codes for the AIC
members in Program 11-13-08 and
11-13-09.
0 = Normal Login Mode
1 = AIC Login Mode
(default = 0)
3
ACD Login Mode Setup
3
3
3
41-18-01
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Agent Identity Code
Define the ACD Agent Identity
Codes.
Up to four digits
(default not assigned)
3
41-18-02
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
Default ACD Group Number
Define the default ACD group for AIC
Agents in each AIC table.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 1
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 1.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 2
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 2.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 3
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 3.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
41-18-03
41-18-04
41-18-05
2 - 80
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
41-18-06
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 4
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 4.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 5
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 5.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 6
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 6.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 7
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 7.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 8
For each AIC table, define the ACD
group AIC Agents are in during
mode 8.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
41-19-01
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Delay Message
Start Timer
This option assigns how long the
system waits before playing the
Delay Message.
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
3
41-19-02
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Mailbox Number
for 1st Announcement Message
This option assigns the Voice Mail
ACD Announcement Mailbox as the
message source for the 1st
Announcement Message.
Dial (up to eight digits)
(default not assigned)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – 1st Delay
Message Sending Count
This option assigns the 1st Delay
Message Sending Count. This entry
must be set to 1 or higher for the
message to play.
0 = No message is
played
1 ~ 255
(default = 0)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Mailbox Number
for 2nd Announcement Message
This option assigns the Voice Mail
ACD Announcement Mailboxes as
the message source for the 2nd
Announcement Message.
Dial (up to eight digits)
(default not assigned)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – 2nd Delay
Message Sending Count
This option assigns the 2nd Delay
Message Sending Count. This entry
must be set to 1 or higher for the
message to play.
0 = No message is
played
1 ~ 255
(default = 0)
3
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Wait Tone Type
at Message Interval
This option assigns what the caller
hears between the messages.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = Music On Hold Tone
2 = Background Music
Source
(default = 0)
3
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – ACD Forced
Disconnect Time after 2nd
Announcement
This option assigns how long the
system waits after the end of the
ACD Delay Message before
disconnecting.
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Delay Message
Interval Time
This option sets the timer for the
interval between the Delay
Messages.
0 ~ 64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
41-18-07
41-18-08
41-18-09
41-18-10
41-19-03
41-19-04
41-19-05
41-19-06
41-19-07
41-19-08
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 81
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
41-20-01
41-20-02
41-20-03
41-20-04
41-20-05
47-03-02
47-03-03
2 - 82
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Queue Display Settings –
Number of Calls in Queue
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should not
be used if 41-15 is set.
This option assigns the number of
calls that can accumulate in the ACD
queue before the Queue Status
Display (and optional queue alarm)
occurs.
0=No Display, 1~200
(default = 0)
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should not
be used if 41-15 is set.
This option assigns how long the
Queue Status display remains on the
telephone display.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should not
be used if 41-15 is set.
This option assigns the interval that
refreshes the Queue Status Alarm
time in queue display and causes the
optional queue alarm to occur on
telephones active on a call, logged
out, or in wrap-up.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should not
be used if 41-15 is set.
This option Enables or Disables the
queue alarm.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
ACD Queue Display Settings –
ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold
Time
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should not
be used if 41-15 is set.
This option assigns how long the
Call Waiting Alarm should sound.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox
Options – Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox Number is the
same as the Department Group
master (pilot) number. Use this
option to select the Department
Group master (pilot) number
associated with the Group Mailbox
you are programming.
Digits (eight maximum,
using 0~9).
No Setting (entered by
pressing Hold)
(default not assigned)
Use this option to set the Group
Mailbox type.
0 = None
1 = Subscriber
2 = Call Routing
(default = 1)
ACD Queue Display Settings –
Queue Status Display Time
ACD Queue Display Settings –
Queue Status Display Interval
ACD Queue Display Settings –
ACD Call Waiting Alarm
SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox
Options – Mailbox Type
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
Using the Headset with Automatic Answer for ACD Agents:
1.
With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press Feature.
2.
Press the HEADSET key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 05).
The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated.
To cancel Automatic Headset, repeat these steps.
Transferring Trunk Calls to the ACD Pilot Number:
1.
While on an outside call, press Transfer.
2.
Dial the ACD Pilot number.
3.
Hang up.
The call is transferred to the ACD group.
A Supervisor can monitor an ACD call:
1.
When an ACD agent is on an outside call, the supervisor presses the MONITOR key (Program
15-07-01 or SC 752: 15).
The supervisor can hear but cannot participate in the call. If participation is required, use the Barge-In feature
instead.
2.
To cancel the call monitoring, press the MONITOR key again.
AIC Agent Log In
To log in:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2.
Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).
This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
3.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 83
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To log out (for single or multiple agent log ins):
Multiline Terminal
All AIC log ins become logged out.
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
2.
Dial 1 to accept.
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key goes out.
Single Line Telephone
All AIC log ins become logged out.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the AIC Log Out service code (Program 11-13-08).
- OR -
1.
To log out of an ACD group without using AIC, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the ACD Log Out service code 655 (Program 11-13-02).
Multiple Agent Log In
To log in:
Multiline Terminal
After already being logged in:
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel the log out option.
3.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
4.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
The ACD Log In/Log Out key lights.
Single Line Telephone
Follow Steps 1~3 to log in with additional AICs (up to three) anytime.
1.
Lift the handset and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2.
Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).
This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
2 - 84
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 1.0
Dial the first Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
You hear a confirmation tone when immediately logging in with additional AICs.
4.
For second agent log: Dial the second Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
You hear a confirmation tone.
5.
For third agent log: Dial the third Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).
You hear a confirmation tone.
Queue Status Display
When Logged Into ACD Group
1.
With an idle multiline terminal, press the Queue Status Display Programmable Function Key (Code:
19).
The display indicates the number of calls in queue, the trunk name, and the time the call has been waiting.
When the Queue Status Display key is pressed, the queue status of the extension group is displayed. When the
extension is not in an ACD group, the Queue Status of group 1 is displayed instead.
When an agent logs in using an AIC code, the Queue Status of the default ACD group defined in PRG
41-18-02 is displayed.
2.
Press VOL UP and VOL DOWN to scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD Groups.
3.
Press the CLEAR key to return the telephone to an idle state.
When Logged Out of ACD Group
When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed in the ACD queue, the telephone of the logged out
agents displays the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system
programming.
Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle until the time
in Program 41-20-03 expires again.
Rest Mode
To set the manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1.
With the multiline terminal idle state, press the ACD Rest Mode key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752:
13).
The ACD Rest Mode key lights. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while the agent is on an active call, the key flashes
until the agent hangs up.
This operation is not available for the System Supervisor.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 85
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset and dial 658.
A fast busy is heard.
To set Pre-Rest Mode (while on a call), press the hookflash and then dial 658. Press the Hookflash again to return
to the outside party. Rest Mode begins once the call is completed.
2.
Hang up.
To cancel the manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press the ACD Rest Mode key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 13).
The ACD Rest Mode key light goes off.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.
A fast busy is heard.
2.
Dial 659.
3.
Hang up.
2 - 86
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Automatic Release
Description
Automatic Release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For this feature to work
with Loop Start Trunks, the CO/PBX providing the outside line must provide a timed disconnect signal.
Automatic Release is normally provided on Ground Start, DID, ISDN, and Tie Line trunks.
Conditions
Automatic Release on ISDN trunks is provided by the protocol.
When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key, the LED associated with the
line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs.
This feature functions while a call is in progress, on hold, or in a conference.
This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress, holding or parked.
When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode, Speaker
automatically turns off. If using the handset, the station is set to idle when the handset goes
on-hook.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Not applicable
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 87
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-02-09
14-02-14
80-04-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Busy
Tone Detection
This option Enables/Disables Busy
Tone Detection.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 1)
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Start/Ground Start
This option identifies the analog
trunk as either loop or ground start.
0 = Loop Start (Loop)
1 = Ground Start (Ground)
(default = 0)
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – Detection Level
Use this option to set the Detection
Level.
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 0
(-25dBm)
Type 2 (BT) – 0
(-25dBm)
Type 3 (RBT) – 0
(-25dBm)
2
3
3
3
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
2 - 88
Automatic Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
80-04-02
80-04-03
80-04-04
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – Min. Detection Level
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – S/N Ratio
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – No Tone Time
Use this option to set the minimum
detection level.
Use this option to set the Signal to
Noise ratio.
Use this option to set No Tone
Time.
2
3
0~15
detect level 0:
-15dBm(0) to
-30dBm(15)
detect level 1:
-30dBm(0) to
-45dBm(15)
detect level 2:
-40dBm(0) to
-55dBm(15)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 15
(-25dBm)
Type 2 (BT) – 15
(-25dBm)
Type 3 (RBT) – 15
(-25dBm)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
3
0~4 (0dB ~ -20dB)
Default:
Type 1 (DT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 2 (BT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 4 = 0
Type 5 = 0
3
0~255 (30+30-7680 ms)
default: 13 (420 ms)
Type 1 (DT) – 132
(3990 ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 132
(3990 ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 132
(3990 ms)
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
80-04-05
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – Pulse Count
Use this option to set the Pulse
Count.
1~255
default: 2
Type 1 (DT) – 1
Type 2 (BT) – 1
Type 3 (RBT) – 1
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
80-04-06
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – ON Minimum Time
Use this option to set the minimum
On time.
1~255 (30+30-7680 ms)
default: 10 (330 ms)
Type 1 (DT) – 9 (300 ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 9 (300 ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 25
(780ms)
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 89
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
80-04-07
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – ON Maximum Time
Use this option to set the maximum
On time.
0~255 (30+30-7680ms)
default: 14 (450 ms)
Type 1 (DT) – 0
Type 2 (BT) – 20 (630 ms)
[ET]
Type 3 (RBT) – 40
1230 ms)
2
3
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
80-04-08
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – OFF Minimum Time
Use this option to set the minimum
Off time.
1~255 (30+30-7680ms)
default: 10 (330 ms)
Type 1 (DT) – 1 (60 ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 12 (390 ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 83
(2520 ms)
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
80-04-09
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – OFF Maximum Time
Use this option to set the maximum
Off time.
0~255 (30+30-7680 ms)
default: 14 (450 ms)
Type 1 (DT) – 1 (60 ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 20 (630 ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 115
(3480ms)
3
Type 4, Type 5 – 0
Operation
None
2 - 90
Automatic Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Automatic Route Selection
Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a user dials.
ARS gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distance carriers.
ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system options) from a display
telephone. ARS accommodates 400 call routing choices – without a custom-ordered rate structure
database. With ARS, you can modify the system routing choices quickly and easily. This is often
necessary in the telecommunications world of today where the cost structure and service choices
frequently change.
The ARS feature can add or delete digits and route calls according to predetermined levels. When
UNIVERGE SV8100 systems are networked together by Tie Lines or K-CCIS, the networked systems can
be called by a system number and a user extension number, just an extension number, or by using a trunk
access code.
ARS Feature Summary
ARS provides:
Call Routing
ARS can apply up to 24-digit analysis to every number dialed. For programming, ARS provides
separate 8-digit and 24-digit tables. Each table can have up to 250 numbers.
Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions)
ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it chooses
a route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can:
Insert or delete an area code (NPA)
Add digits (such as a dial-up OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialing sequence
Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call (refer to Program 44-03)
Time of Day Selection
For routing purposes, ARS provides 10 different day selections (called Time Schedule Patterns).
Each Time Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to one of the
eight day/night modes. The Time Schedule Patterns are then assigned to a day of the week
(Monday~Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Holiday).
Hierarchical Class of Service Control
ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extension ARS Class of Service. This allows
lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of Service (e.g.,
16). The system provides up to 16 (0=unrestricted, 1~16) ARS Classes of Service.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 91
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Separate Routing for Selected Call Types
To provide unique control, you can program separate routing instructions for:
Directory assistance calls
Emergency calls
Basic ARS Operation
When a user places an outside call, ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 400 Selection
Numbers to the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed. ARS then
checks the time of day, the day of week and the extension ARS Class of Service. Based on these call
routing options, ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if
any).
Class of Service Option Allows Outgoing Calls to Not Follow Access Map
Using this option allows a Class of Service to be set so that ARS does not follow the trunk access map
settings (Program 14-07-01 and Program 15-06-01). The feature allows an extension user to have CO
line keys on their telephone which allow incoming access only. The user has only outgoing access on the
CO lines when using ARS to place a call.
Class of Service Matching
With the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature, you can determine whether the system should
allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table (Program 26-02). This change can be
used to create a tenant-like application. It then uses the trunk group defined in the Additional Entry in
Program 26-02-03 to place the outgoing call.
When this feature is enabled, the calls are routed in sequential order, and fare allowed if the Class of
Service for the trunk groups matches.
For this feature, Program 26-01-06: Automatic Route Selection Service, COS Match Access is used.
The examples below use the following system programming:
Program 26-02 for Dial Analysis Table for ARS set as:
Table No.
Program 26-02-01 Dial
Program 26-02-02
Service Type
Program 26-02-03
Add Data
Program 26-02-04
ARS COS
1
[email protected]@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
3 (Group 3)
5
2
[email protected]@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
1 (Group 1)
4
197
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
2 (Group 2)
4
198
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
3 (Group 3)
3
199
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
2 (Group 2)
2
200
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
1 (Group 1)
1
2 - 92
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 12-02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as:
Time
Pattern No.
Program 12-02-01
Start Time
Program 12-02-02
End Time
Program 12-02-03
Operation Mode
1
00:00
08:30
2 (Night)
2
08:30
17:00
1 (Day)
3
17:00
00:00
2 (Night)
Program 12-02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as:
Mode
Ext. 301
Ext. 302
Ext. 401
Ext. 402
Mode 1 (Day)
1
2
3
3
Mode 2 (Night)
1
4
3
5
Program 26-01-03 for ARS Misdialed Number Handling as: 1 (Warning Tone)
With Program 26-01-06: ARS COS Match Access disabled (set to 0):
If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
All Extension would use Trunk Group 3
If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
All Extension would use Trunk Group 1
If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
All Extension would use Trunk Group 3
If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
Extension 301, 302 and 401 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS is lower
With Program 26-01-06: ARS COS Match Access enabled (set to 1):
If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3
If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3
If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3
If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
Extension 301, 302 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 401 would use Trunk Group 3
Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS does not match
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 93
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
Do not use ARS behind a Centrex/PBX.
Line keys, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, outgoing trunk group keys, dialing 704 + trunk
group, dialing +trunk number, and speed dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk group can
all be used to by-pass ARS.
If no PBX access code is entered in the Dial Treatment, the system can still dial 000.
Toll Restriction overrides ARS.
A system with Automatic Route Selection cannot also have Trunk Group Routing.
With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The
system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.
Speed Dialing may bypass ARS routing.
Set up other options for outgoing calls (e.g., unassign line keys, adjust gains, ARS access
key, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, etc.).
Refer to the Dial Tone Detection feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial
Tone Detection.
ARS does not permit 0 and 011+ calls to be routed out separate trunk groups. The
UNIVERGE SV8100 supports only direct trunk selection for dial 9 (Operator) type calls.
If an entry of 000 is programmed in ARS, but ARS is turned off, 000 calls still attempt to route
using ARS.
When using ARS Class of Service Matching, CCIS calls will always follow Class of Service 1.
Default Setting
ARS is off (disabled) at default.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 94
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-01-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Numbering
Set the system internal (Intercom)
numbering plan. The numbering plan
assigns the first and second digits
dialed and affects the digits an
extension user must dial to access
other extensions and features, such
as service codes and trunk codes. If
the default numbering plan does not
meet the site requirements, use this
program to tailor the system
numbering to the site.
Refer to SV8100
Programming Manual
for a detailed description
of this program.
3
3
11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
Specify the digit or digits to be used
to access ARS (normally 9).
Dial up to four digits
(default = 0)
11-09-02
2nd Trunk Route Access Code
Use this program to define additional
trunk access codes.When a user
dials the Alternate Trunk Route
Access Code, the system routes
their call to the Alternate Trunk
Route.
Dial up to four digits
(default not assigned)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
2 - 95
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
12-01-01
12-01-02
12-02-01
12-02-02
12-02-03
2 - 96
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Night Mode Function Setup –
Manual Night Mode Switching
Turns Off (0) or On (1) any
extensions from activating Manual
Night Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)
Night Mode Function Setup –
Automatic Night Mode Switching
According to a preset schedule,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) Automatic
Night Service for the system. Make
sure to set the Service Patterns in
Program 12-02-01, Program 12-0202 and Program 12-02-03.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
Define the daily pattern of the
Automatic Mode Switching. Each
Mode Group has 10 patterns. These
patterns are used in Programs 12-03
and 12-04. The daily pattern consists
of 20 timer settings.
This option defines the starting time.
0000~2359
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for defaults.
3
Define the daily pattern of the
Automatic Mode Switching. Each
Mode Group has 10 patterns. These
patterns are used in Programs 12-03
and 12-04. The daily pattern consists
of 20 timer settings.
This option defines the ending time.
0000~2359
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for defaults.
3
Define the daily pattern of the
Automatic Mode Switching. Each
Mode Group has 10 patterns. These
patterns are used in Programs 12-03
and 12-04. The daily pattern consists
of 20 timer settings.
This option defines the operation
mode that the system should be in
during each time number.
1~8
(default = 1 or 2
depending on time
pattern and time
number.)
3
Automatic Night Service Patterns
–Start Time
Automatic Night Service Patterns
–End Time
Automatic Night Service Patterns
–Operation Mode
3
3
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
12-03-01
12-04-01
12-05-01
12-06-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Weekly Night Service Switching
Night Mode Service
Group Numbers: 01~32
Time Schedule Pattern
Number: 1~10
Day of Week:
01 = Sunday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)
02 = Monday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
03 = Tuesday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
04 = Wednesday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
06 = Friday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
07 = Saturday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)
3
Define a yearly schedule of holiday
night-switch settings. This schedule
is used for setting special days when
the company is expected to be
closed, such as national holidays.
Days and Months:
0101~1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1;
1231 = Dec. 31)
Time Pattern Number:
0~10
(0 = No Setting)
(default not assigned)
3
Night Mode Group Assignment
for Extensions
Assign Day/Night Mode Group for
each extension.
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
(default = 1)
3
Night Mode Group Assignment
for Trunks
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group for
each trunk port.
Trunk Port Number:
001~200
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
(default Night Mode
Service Group
Number = 1)
3
Holiday Night Service Switching
Define which time pattern should be
used on each day of the week.
2
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 97
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
12-07-01
Text Data for Night Mode
12-08-01
14-05-01
2 - 98
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Night Mode Service Range
Trunk Group – Trunk Group
Number
Use this program to make an original
text message, which, depending on
programming, can be displayed on
an LCD of a multiline telephone in
each Mode.
Define the changing range of toggle
key for each Day/Night Mode.
Program trunks of the same carrier
type into the same trunk group.
2
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Text Message:
Maximum 12
Characters (alphabetic
or numeric)
Default Text Messages
for Day/Night Modes:
Mode 1 = No Setting
Mode 2 = <Night>
Mode 3 = <Midnight>
Mode 4 = <Rest>
Mode 5 = <Day2>
Mode 6 = <Night2>
Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
Mode 8 = <Rest2>
3
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
Range: 2~8
(default = 2)
3
Trunks 1-200
Trunk Group 1-100
Priority - 1-200
(default = All trunks in
Trunk Group 1 with
priorities of:
Trunk 1 = Priority 1
Trunk 2 = Priority 2
Trunk 200 = Priority
200)
3
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
14-07-01
Trunk Access Map Setup
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This
sets the access options for trunks.
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is on
Hold).
3
3
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
(default = 1)
20-03-04
System Options for Single Line
Telephones – Dial Sending Start
Time for SLT or ARS
When ARS or an analog extension
user accesses a trunk and dials an
outside call, the system waits this
interval before outdialing the first
digit.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1 second)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Class of Service for
Extensions: 1~15
Defaults:
Extension number 101
as Class 15.
All other extension
numbers are set as
Class 1.
20-06-01
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
2 - 99
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-08-17
21-02-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension
capability to override the trunk
access map programming (Program
14-07-01 and Program 15-06-01) for
outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
Trunk Group Routing for
Extensions
Use this program to assign Program
14-06 routes to extensions.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Route Table Number:
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
3
26-01-01
Automatic Route Selection
Service – ARS Service
26-01-02
Automatic Route Selection
With Networking, this timer (0~64800
Service – Network Outgoing Inter- seconds) replaces Program 20-03Digit ARS Timer
04 when determining if all network
protocol digits are received. If ARS is
enabled at Site B, this timer can be
programmed for 5 (500 msec) at Site
A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is
using F-Route for outbound dialing,
this timer should be programmed for
30 (3 seconds) at Site A.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
Automatic Route Selection
Service – ARS Misdialed Number
Handling
If a user dials a number not
programmed in ARS, this option
determines if the system should
Route over trunk group 1 (0) or Play
error tone (1).
0 = Route to Trunk
Group 1
1 = Play Warning Tone
to Dialer
(default = 0)
Automatic Route Selection
Service – Class of Service Match
Access
With the ARS Class of Service
Match Access feature, you can
determine whether or not the system
should allow a call based on the
COS assigned to the Dial Analysis
Table (Program 26-02). This change
can be used to create a tenant-like
application. It then uses the trunk
group set in the Additional Entry in
Program 26-02-03 to place the outgoing call. When this feature is
enabled, the calls are routed in
sequential order, and forward –
provided the Class of Service for the
trunk groups match.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
26-01-03
26-01-06
2 - 100
2
Enable (1) or Disable (0) ARS.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
3
3
3
3
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
26-01-07
Automatic Route Selection
Service – F-Route Access COS
Reference
Use this program to define the
system options for Automatic Route
Selection (ARS).
0 = F-Route
1 = ARS
(default = 0)
26-02-01
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR –
Dial
Enter the digits (16 digits maximum:
1~9, 0 #, @; 400 separate entries)
for the Dial Analysis Table which is
analyzed by ARS/LCR. This table is
checked after any programmed
F-Route operations have completed.
The system then refers to Program
26-02-02 and Program 26-02-03 to
determine the routing for the call. To
enter a wild card/don’t care digit,
press Line Key 1 to enter an @
symbol. It is important to remember
that the system checks the table
numbers in numerical order. This
means that entries for specific
numbers should be entered first
(such as your local area codes), then
enter the items containing wild card
digits. If the system sees an entry of
[email protected]@, any table entries which follow
are ignored.
For example, if 268, 269, and 270
are local exchanges, these would be
the first three table entries which
route according to the settings made
in Program 26-02-02 and Program
26-02-03 for each of the table
entries. If the next entry is [email protected]@, the
system checks no further in this
program and routes all other 2xx
numbers according to the entries
made in Program 26-02-02 and
Program 26-02-03 for this table
entry.
Dial Digits
(16 digits maximum)
1~9, 0, , #, or for wild
character (Press line
key 1)
(default not assigned)
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~200), select 0 for no ARS, 1 for
Service Type 1 – Route to Trunk
Group Number to have the number
route to a trunk group [Refer to
Program 26-02-03] or 2 for Service
Type 2 – F-Route Selected to have
the dialed number controlled by the
F-Route table. If Service Type 2 is
selected and F-Route operation is
on, the F-Route table used is
determined by Program 44-04. If FRoute operation is off, the routing is
determined by Program 44-05.
0 = No Service (None)
1 = Route to Trunk
Group
2 = Select F-Route
Access
(default = 0)
26-02-02
Dial Analysis Table for ARS – ARS
Service Type
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
2 - 101
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
26-02-03
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Additional Data/Service Number
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~200), if Service Type 1 was
selected in Program 26-02-02, enter
the trunk group number (0~100,
0 = No Route).
If Service Type 1 (in
26-02):
Select Trunk Group
Number
(0~100, 0 = No Route)
If Service Type 2 (in
26-02):
F-Route Time Schedule
Not Used = 0~500
(F-Route Table
Number).
Refer to Program 44-05:
ARS/F-Route Table
2
3
3
F-Route Time Schedule
Used = 0~500 (F-Route
Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04:
ARS/F-Route Selection
for Time Schedule.
(default = 0)
26-02-04
26-02-05
26-02-07
2 - 102
Dial Analysis Table for ARS – ARS
Class of Service
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~200), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Class of Service
(0~16).
0~16
(default = 0)
Dial Analysis Table for ARS – Dial
Treatment for ARS
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~200), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Dial Treatment
(0~15) to be used.
0~15
(default = 0)
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Network Specified Parameter
Table
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~200), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Network Specified
Parameter Table (0~16) to be used.
0~16
(default = 0)
3
3
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
26-03-01
26-04-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ARS Dial Treatments – Treatment
Code
ARS Class of Service
Assign the Dial Treatments (1~15)
for automatic ARS dialing
translation. Assign Dial Treatments
to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups)
in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial
Treatment options are:
3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of
the initial call. This requires at least
eight digits in the ARS table
(Program 26-02-01).
2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed
as part of the initial call. This requires
at least eight digits in the ARS table
(Program 26-02-01).
1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as
part of the initial call. This requires at
least eight digits in the ARS table
(Program 26-02-01).
INPA - Insert the NPA specified by
NPA.
DNN - Outdial the NN number of
digits or execute the code that
follows. For example, D041234 outdials 124. Valid entries are 0~9, #, ,
Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P
(pause). Each digits code counts as
a digit. So for example, if a P was
added for a pause, the entry would
look like: D05P1234. This Dial
Treatment can only be added from
telephone programming.
Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
P - Pause in analog trunk.
R - Redial the initially dialed number,
including any modifications.
E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial
Treatments must end with the E
code.
X - When ARS is enabled, X must be
entered in the Dial Treatment for the
system to output the extension
number of the call originator to the
black box for the E911 feature (US
Only).
To allow hop-off from a CCISoIP
network, assign one of the following
dial treatment codes:
D010RE - Trunk access = 0 (e.g.
Australia)
D019RE - Trunk access = 9 (e.g.
New Zealand, USA)
24 characters maximum
(default not assigned)
Set an extension ARS Class of
Service (0~16). Automatic Route
Selection uses ARS Class of Service
when determining how to route
extension calls.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Class = 0~16
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
2 - 103
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
26-11-01
44-01-01
44-02-01
44-02-02
44-02-03
44-02-04
2 - 104
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Transit Network ID Table –
Transmit Network ID (Carrier ID)
Enter the Transit Network Selection
information element to be added to
an ARS call using an ISDN trunk.
This information element identifies a
requested transit network.
0000~9999
(Fixed four digits)
(default not assigned)
System Options for ARS/F-Route
– ARS/F-Route Time Schedule
Select whether the ARS/F-Route
feature should use the time schedule
(0=not used, 1=used). If this option is
set to 0, the F-Route table selected
is determined only by the digits
dialed without any relation to the day
or time of the call. If this option is set
to 1, the system first refers to
Program 44-10. If there is a match,
the pattern defined in that program is
used. If not, the F-Route pattern in
Program 44-09 and time setting in
Program 44-08 are used.
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
(default = 0)
Set the Dial digits for the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting
ARS/F-Route (eight digits max: 1~9,
0 #, @). To enter a wild card/don’t
care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter
an @ symbol.
Up to eight digits
(Use line key 1 for a
‘Don’t Care’ digit, @)
(default not assigned)
Set the Service Type (0~3) for the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting
ARS/F-Route.
0 = No Setting (None)
1 = Extension Call
(Own)
2 = ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)
3 = Dial Extension
Analyze Table (Option)
(default = 0)
3
1=Delete Digit = 0~255
(255 : Delete All Digits)
2=0~500 (0 = No
Setting)
3=Dial Extension
Analyze Table Number
= 0~4
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
3
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Dial
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Service Type
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Additional Data
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Dial Tone
Simulation
If a Service Type is set to F-Route in
Program 44-02-02, set which
F-Route table to be used.
Determine if the Dial Tone Simulation
is On (1) or Off (0) for the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting
ARS/F-Route. If enabled, this option
sends dial tone to the calling party
once the routing is determined. This
may be required if the central office
at the destination does not send dial
tone.
2
3
3
3
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
44-03-01
44-03-02
44-03-03
44-03-04
44-04-01
44-05-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
Dial
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
ARS/F-Route Select Table
Number (1~250)
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
ARS/F-Route Select Table
Number (251)
2
Set the Dial digits (24 digits max:
1~9, 0 #, @) to be used for the
Dial Extension Analysis Table. When
Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3,
this program sets the dial extension
analysis table. These tables are
used when the analyzed digits must
be more than eight digits. To enter a
wild card/don’t care digit, press Line
Key 1 to enter an @ symbol.
Up to 24 digits
Digits = 1~9, 0, , #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for
wild character @)
(default not assigned)
When dialed digits match the setting
in Program 44-03-01, select the
ARS/R-Route table number (0~500)
to be used for the Dial Extension
Analysis Table.
0~500
(ARS/F-Route Table
Number)
With Program 44-01 set
to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set
to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.
(default = 0)
3
If the received digits are not
identified in tables 1~250, the
F-Route selection table number
(0~500) defined in table 251 is used.
0~500
(ARS/F-Route Table
Number)
With Program 44-01 set
to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set
to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.
(default = 0)
3
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
Next Table Area Number (252)
If the received digits do not match
the digits set in tables 1~250, table
number 252 is used refer to the next
Extension Table Area (1~4) to be
searched.
0~4
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Selection for Time
Schedule
Assign each ARS/F-Route Selection
number (1~500) to an ARS/F-Route
table number for each ARS/F-Route
time mode. There are eight time
modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
ARS/F-Route Time
Mode: 1~8
ARS/F-Route Table
Number = 0~500
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Trunk Group
Number
Select the trunk group number to be
used for the outgoing ARS call.
0~100, 255
0 = No Setting
255 = Extension Call
(default = 0)
44-05-02
ARS/F-Route Table – Delete Digits For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4). Enter
the number of digits to be deleted
(0~255) from the dialed number.
0~255
(255 = Delete All)
(default = 0)
44-05-03
ARS/F-Route Table – Additional
Dial Number Table
0~1000
(default = 0)
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4). Enter
the table number (defined in
Program 44-06) for additional digits
to be dialed (0~1000).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 105
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
44-05-04
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4).
Select whether or not a beep is
heard if a lower priority trunk group is
used.
0 = Off (No Beep)
1 = On (Beep)s
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Gain Table
Number for Internal Call
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4).
Select the gain table number to be
used for internal calls (0~500).
0~500
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Gain Table
Number for Tandem Connections
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4).
Select the gain table number to be
used for the tandem call (defined in
Program 44-07).
0~500
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – ARS Class
of Service
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4).
Select the Class of Service to be
used for ARS (0~16). Extension ARS
COS is determined in Program 2604-01.
0~16
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Dial
Treatment
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign a priority number (1~4).
Select the Dial Treatment to be used
(0~15). The Dial Treatments are
defined in Program 26-03-01
0~15
(default = 0)
44-05-09
ARS/F-Route Table – Maximum
Digit
Input the maximum number of digits
to send when using the F-Route.
0~24
(default = 0)
3
44-05-10
ARS/F-Route – CCIS over IP
Destination Point Code
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500). Set the CCIS over IP
Destination Point Code (0~16367).
0~16367
(default = 0)
3
44-05-11
ARS/F-Route – Network Specified
Parameter Table
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500)
assign the priority (1~4). Assign the
Network Specified Parameter Table
(0~16).
0~16
(default = 0)
Additional Dial Table
If an Additional Dial Number Table is
entered in Program 44-05-03, define
the additional dial table (1~1000) to
add digits in front of the dialed ARS/
F-Route number (24 digits max: 1-9,
0 #, Pause). To enter a wild card/
don’t care digit, press Line Key 1 to
enter a P (pause) symbol.
Up to 24 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, , #,
Pause (press line key 1
to enter a pause)
(default not assigned)
44-05-05
44-05-06
44-05-07
44-05-08
44-06-01
2 - 106
ARS/F-Route Table – Beep Tone
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Incoming Transmit
44-07-02
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Incoming Receive
44-07-03
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Outgoing Transmit
44-07-04
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Outgoing Receive
44-09-01
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
44-07-01
44-08-01
Issue 1.0
Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Weekly Schedule for ARS/
F-Route
2
Set the gain table to be used
(1~500). If an extension dials ARS/FRoute number;
The Extension Dial Gain Table is
activated, which is assigned in
Program 44-05.
The Extension Dial Gain Table
follows Outgoing transmit and
Outgoing receive settings.
If the incoming call is transferred to
another line using ARS/F-Route;
The Tandem Gain Table is activated,
which is assigned in Program 44-05.
The Tandem Gain Table follows the
Incoming transmit and Incoming
receive settings for incoming line,
and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing
receive settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC
gains defined in Program 14-01-02
and Program 14-01-03 are not
activated.
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])
3
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])
3
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])
3
Define the daily pattern of the ARS/
F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has
10 time patterns. These patterns are
used in Program 44-09 and Program
44-10. The daily pattern consists of
20 time settings.
Time Number: 01~20
Start Time = 0000~2359
End Time = 0000~2359
Mode: 1~8
Default = All Schedule
Patterns: 0:00 – 0:00,
Mode 1
3
Define a weekly schedule for using
ARS/F-Route day numbers 1~7
(1 = Sun, 7 = Sat), pattern numbers
(1~10). The pattern number is
defined in Program 44-08-01.
1 = Sunday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
2 = Monday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
3= Tuesday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
4 = Wednesday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
5 = Thursday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
6 = Friday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
7 = Saturday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])
3
2 - 107
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
44-10-01
80-03-01
80-03-02
2 - 108
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Holiday Schedule for ARS/
F-Route
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Detect Level
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup – Start
Delay Time
2
Define a yearly schedule for ARS/
F-Route. This schedule is used for
setting special days such as national
holidays (pattern numbers 1~10).
The pattern number is defined in
Program 44-08-01.
Date: 0101~1231
Schedule Pattern
Number = 0~10
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
3
Use Items 11~32 to set the criteria
for dial tone detection for outgoing
ARS calls.
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
default: Type 1~5 = 0
3
0~255
(0.25 ms ~ 64 ms)
default:
Type 1~5 = 0
3
Use this option to define the start
delay time for DTMF Tone Receiver.
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
80-03-03
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup – Min.
Detect Level
Use this option to define the
minimum detection level for DTMF
Tone Receiver.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
0~15
detect level 0:
–10dBm(0) to
–25dBm(15)
detect level 1:
–15dBm(0) to –
30dBm(15)
detect level 2:
–20dBm(0) to –
35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
–25dBm(0) to –
40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
–30dBm(0) to –
45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
–35dBm(0) to –
50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
–40dBm(0) to –
55dBm(15)
detect level 7: 45dBm(0) to 60dBm(15)
detect level 8: 50dBm(0) to 65dBm(15)
detect level 9: 55dBm(0) to 70dBm(15)
detect level 10: 60dBm(0) to 75dBm(15)
detect level 11: 65dBm(0) to 80dBm(15)
detect level 12: 70dBm(0) to 85dBm(15)
detect level 13: 75dBm(0) to 90dBm(15)
detect level 14: 80dBm(0) to 95dBm(15)
detect level 15: 85dBm(0) to 100dBm(15)
default:
Type 1 = 10 (-20dBm)
Type 2~3 = 15 (-25dBm)
Type 4~5 = 10 (-20dBm)
2
3
3
2 - 109
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
80-03-04
80-03-05
2 - 110
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup – Max.
Detect Level
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Forward Twist Level
Use this option to define the
maximum detection level for DTMF
Tone Receiver.
Use this option to define the forward
twist level for DTMF Tone Receiver.
2
0~15
detect level 0: 0dBm(0)
to –15dBm(15)
detect level 1:
–5dBm(0) to –
20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
–10dBm(0) to –
25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
–15dBm(0) to –
30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
–20dBm(0) to –
35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
–25dBm(0) to –
40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
–30dBm(0) to –
45dBm(15)
detect level 7: 35dBm(0) to 50dBm(15)
detect level 8: 40dBm(0) to 55dBm(15)
detect level 9: 45dBm(0) to 60dBm(15)
detect level 10: 50dBm(0) to 65dBm(15)
detect level 11: 55dBm(0) to 70dBm(15)
detect level 12: 60dBm(0) to 75dBm(15)
detect level 13: 65dBm(0) to 80dBm(15)
detect level 14: 70dBm(0) to 85dBm(15)
detect level 15: 75dBm(0) to 90dBm(15)
default:
Type 1~5 = 0
3
0~9
(1dB ~ 10dB)
default:
All Receivers = 9
3
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
80-03-06
80-03-07
80-03-08
2
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Backwards Twist Level
Use this option to define the
backwards twist level for DTMF Tone
Receiver.
0~9
(1dB ~ 10dB)
default:
All Receivers = 9
3
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup – ON
Detect Time
Use this option to define the On
detection time for DTMF Tone
Receiver.
1~255
(15+ 15 ms ~ 3825 ms)
default:
All Receivers = 1
3
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup – OFF
Detect Time
Use this option to define the Off
detection time for DTMF Tone
Receiver.
1~255
(15+ 15 ms ~ 3825 ms)
default:
All Receivers = 1
3
3
Operation
To place a call using ARS:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
You hear normal Intercom dial tone.
2.
Dial 9.
You hear a second, “stutter” dial tone.
3.
Dial the outside number.
If you hear another “stutter” dial tone, you must enter your extension ARS Authorization Code.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 111
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 112
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Description
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to the
speakers of the Multiline Telephone when the station is idle.
Conditions
An ACI [PGD(2)-U( ) ADP] port must be used as an alternate External Music on
Hold or Background Music source when different External MOH and BGM
sources are required.
Background Music stops while the Multiline Terminal is in use.
Originating a call, answering a voice announcement, a ringing call, or internal
paging interrupts Background Music.
B
Background Music is not available on single line telephones.
Default Settings
Background Music (BGM) is allowed
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
Externally provided Music Source.
Use the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP if different external MOH and BGM sources are
required.
Related Features
Music on Hold
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 113
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
10-38-01
10-38-02
20-06-01
20-13-30
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
BGM Resource Setup – BGM
Resource Type
Configure the Background Music
Source input (0) for CD-CP00-AU
or (1) for ACI Port.
0 = CD-CP00-AU
(MOH/IN)
1 = ACI Port
(default = 0)
BGM Resource Setup – ACI Port
Number for BGM Source (only
used if Program 10-38-01 is set
to 1)
Program the ACI Port to be used for
BGM (0~96).
0 ~ 96
(default = 0)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
For extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) an extension
from turning Background Music on
and off.
2
3
3
3
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:
1.
Press idle Speaker.
2.
Dial 725.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 114
Background Music
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Barge-In
Description
Barge-In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call, including
Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and the
parties on the initial call. With Barge-In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy co-worker
right away.
There are two Barge-In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode, the
caller Barging In can listen to another user’s conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode, the
caller Barging In can listen and join another user’s conversation.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not
contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under
federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state
laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation,
such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of
all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
An extension user can barge-in on a conference.
An extension user cannot barge-in on an Intercom call if one of the intercom callers is using
Handsfree Answerback. Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a barged into call can be placed on hold by the originator of
the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension that barged into the call are placed
on hold.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is barged into can be placed on Park by the
originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in Park. The extension
which barged into the call is dropped.
Privacy blocks Barge-In attempts.
Function keys simplify the Barge-In operation.
When Silent Monitor Mode is used, MIC or Feature + 1 can be used to activate speech path
to the internal and external parties.
Default Setting
Disabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 115
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
Multiline and Single Line Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Monitoring
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Off-Hook Signaling
Park
Programmable Function Keys
2 - 116
Barge-In
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)
11-16-02
Singl;e Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Use this option to set up Item 02 for
single digit Barge-In. For example,
you can assign Item 02 to use digit
5 for Barge-In. This allows you to
program a function key with an
extension number plus the Barge-In
code (i.e., 5). This allows onetouch access to the Barge-In
feature for extension.
(default not assigned)
Assign a function key for Barge-In
(code 34).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
15-07-01
20-06-01
20-13-10
20-13-15
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
3
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enables the extension Barge-In
Mode to be Speech mode (0) or
Monitor mode (1).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to barge-in on other's
calls.
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
2 - 117
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-32
20-14-11
20-18-07
21-01-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) Barge-In at
the receiving extension (i.e., BargeIn receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 1 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) the extension
ability to deny multiple users BargeIn to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
In an extension Class of Service,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the BargeIn feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Service Tone Timers – Intrusion
Tone Repeat Time
After a user barges in, the system
repeats the Barge-In tone after this
interval.
Intrusion tone is not available if
Program 20-13-17 is set to disable
(0).
0~64800 seconds
(default = 0 seconds)
Program how long an extension
must wait before using the Barge-In
feature can be used on a call (this
timer waits until it expires before
putting a call in a talk state). This
timer also affects Voice Over.
0~64800 seconds
(default = 5 seconds)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
3
3
3
3
3
Operation
To Barge-In after calling a busy extension:
The time in Program 21-01-03 must expire before you can Barge-In.
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press Barge-In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
To Barge-In without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial 710.
- OR -
Press Barge-In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
2 - 118
Barge-In
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 1.0
Dial busy extension.
The extension user hears a warning tone.
The DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.
The Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
To Barge-In to a Conference Call:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).
If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a callback to the extension.
2.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a conference call.
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the
Conference, depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the joined
party. If a Conference is not possible:
The extension user hears a warning tone.
The DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.
The Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
Not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks.
- OR -
1.
Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 119
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 120
Barge-In
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Battery Backup – System Memory
Description
The battery on the CD-CP00-AU retains the Clock/Calendar and Last Number Redial (LNR) buffers for
each station when the CD-CP00-AU encounters a power loss. With a fully charged battery, the settings
are retained for approximately three years.
The system programmed memory (Customer Database) is stored in Nonvolatile Memory and can be
erased only by performing a First Initialization.
For additional storage time, the database and Caller ID History can be copied to the Compact Flash card on the
CD-CP00-AU.
Conditions
The battery on the CD-CP00-AU should be removed during long term storage but must be
installed (protection against loss of power) just before blade installation to provide battery
backup for System Memory.
When fully charged, the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years.
You should replace the CD-CP00-AU battery every three years.
During normal operation, the battery is continually recharged using a built-in charging circuit
from the CD-CP00-AU.
To prevent loss of the Caller ID History, you should save the database before storing the
CD-CP00-AU.
Battery backup on the CD-CP00-AU does not protect the following:
Callback
Off-line Status (for programming system or station assignments)
Repeat Redial
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Caller ID History
Default Settings
None
The battery must be installed on the CD-CP00-AU prior to programming a customer database.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 121
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
Not applicable
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Battery Backup – System Power
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
90-03-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Save Data
Use this program to save the
programmed data on the SRAM
and Flash ROM to the 16MB/32MB
ATA removable Compact Flash
memory card. This program should
be used after changing the
programmed data.
2
3
Dial 1 + Press Hold
(default not assigned)
3
Operation
None
2 - 122
Battery Backup – System Memory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Battery Backup – System Power
Description
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30 minutes during
commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries are connected and fully charged,
full system operation can be maintained for an extended time. Actual time depends on system
configuration, traffic conditions, and the capacity of the batteries.
Conditions
During normal operation, the batteries are continually recharged by a built-in charging circuit.
The CD-CP00-AU is equipped with batteries for system battery backup.
External Battery Pack can be connected to the system to provide extended time during a
commercial power outage. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100/SV8300 System Hardware
Manual for further details.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Not applicable
Required Component(s)
CD-CP00-AU
Related Features
Battery Backup – System Memory
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 123
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Programming
None
Operation
None
2 - 124
Battery Backup – System Power
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Description
This feature automatically places an outside call on a Call Appearance key when the system
is operated as a hybrid (Multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned on any Multiline
Terminal or the same key can appear on multiple terminals. This feature allows efficient call
handling when numerous CO calls are received and a limited number of CO line key
appearances are available.
Once a Call Appearance (CAP) Key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk
call. For example, the user can place the call on hold, transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a
park orbit. An incoming call is answered on the first available CAP key, beginning with the
lowest numbered key. If keys 1~3 are Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, for example, the first
incoming call is answered on key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next call is answered on key 2. If keys
1 and 2 are busy, the next call is answered on key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional
incoming calls queue for the first available key.
C
Conditions
A trunk call that is originated or answered at a multiline terminal must appear on
a line key. The line key can be assigned as the Trunk Key, or as a Call
Appearance Key. A CAP is dynamic because it is used for any trunk call. An
8-button multiline terminal can have eight CAP keys that allow the telephone to
process all trunks, eight trunks at a time.
Multiline terminals can be assigned to the same CAP Key. Trunk calls that
appear on the same CAP Key at multiple stations have the same visual
appearance of the call (Busy or Hold).
Any held call left on a CAP key for more than the programmed time recalls to the
multiline terminal where the call was originally put on hold.
When a multiline terminal (other than the one that originally initiated or received a
call) is used to retrieve a held call, the SMDR records a transfer to the multiline
terminal where the call was retrieved.
Only outside lines use a CAP key.
A multiline terminal can have multiple CAP keys assigned to it.
Outside lines reside on the CAP key in the order of lowest to highest line key
number on the station. For instance, when line keys 1, 2 and 3 are CAP keys, the
first call resides on line key 1, the second call resides on line key 2 and third call
resides on line key 3.
All Flexible Line keys on a multiline terminal can be assigned as CAP keys in
System Programming.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 125
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
A conference call involving two outside lines cannot reside on one Call Appearance key.
For Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, trunks must be assigned to trunk group 1 or higher
(Program 14-05-01). Trunk Group 0 means KF (Key Function) mode.
CAP Keys can be programmed from 0001~9999. 0000 assigns the next available CAP Key.
Trunk Group ( 02), Virtual Extension ( 03) and Call Appearance (CAP) Key ( 08), codes
cannot be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.
If you have both trunk line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, the line key has priority.
An incoming call rings the trunk line key and when answered, the trunk line keys lights, not
the CAP Key. When you access the trunk for an outgoing call, the Trunk line key lights, not
the Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 126
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Off-Hook Signaling
Programmable Function Keys
Secondary Incoming Extension
User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
( 08 + XXXX = CAP
key where XXXX is the
CAP orbit number
0001-9999)
2
3
3
2 - 127
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-11-19
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Hold Recall Time
A call on Hold recalls the extension
that placed it on Hold after this time.
This time works with the Hold
Recall Callback Time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90)
System Options for Hold – Hold
Recall Callback Time
A call that is parked longer than the
programmed interval recalls the
extension where it was initially
parked.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
24-01-03
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls
the extension that placed it on Hold
after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90)
24-01-04
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback
Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked
up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
Forced Release of Held Call
Depending on the setting of
Program 14-01-16, the system
disconnects calls on Hold longer
than this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800)
Set the Park Hold Time (0~64800
seconds). A call that is parked
longer than the programmed time
recalls the extension where it was
initially parked.
Refer to Flexible System
Numbering on page 2-515 for
setting Flexible Timeouts for Class
of Service.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
Set the Extended Park Hold Time
(0~64800 seconds). A call that is
parked longer than the programmed
time recalls the extension where it
was initially parked.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 300
seconds)
24-01-01
24-01-02
24-01-05
24-01-06
24-01-07
2 - 128
System Options for Hold – Park
Hold Time - Normal
System Options for Hold – Park
Hold Time - Extended (Recall)
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To place an outgoing call on hold and retrieve it using a multiline terminal:
1.
Go off-hook using the handset and wait for internal dial tone.
- OR -
Press Speaker and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 0).
3.
Dial the outside party (the Call Appearance key lights). Begin your conversation.
4.
Press Hold (the Call Appearance key flashes).
5.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
To receive an incoming call, put it on hold and then retrieve it using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Go off-hook using the handset, or press Speaker (the Call Appearance key lights). Talk with outside
party.
3.
Press Hold (the Call Appearance key flashes).
4.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 129
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 130
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Description
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are software extensions available on the Basic and Expanded Port Packages. A
Call Arrival Extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual station or multiple
stations. Call Arrival Keys are busy only when ringing state and are not used during talking.
Call Arrival Keys are shared with the Virtual Extensions (VE). In virtual extension mode, the key acts as a
secondary extension. Up to 256 CAR/VE keys are provided.
Conditions
CAR keys and virtual extensions share 256 available ports/extensions.
The 256 available ports/extensions are assigned per extension for CAR key mode or virtual
extension (VE) key mode.
More than one extension can share a CAR key.
An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned.
Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key.
If multiple CAR/SIE/VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time, the CAR/SIE/VE key
on the lowest Line Key is answered first.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 131
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Virtual Extensions
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-01-01
System Numbering – Service
Code
Use to set system numbering plan.
Refer to Univerge
SV8100 System
Program Manual
11-04-01
Virtual Extension Numbering
Assign virtual extension numbers.
Up to eight digits
1 201
2 202
3 203
~
~
2
3
3
3
99 299
100 3601
~
~
256 3857
15-01-01
Basic Extension Data Setup –
Extension Name
Define the extension/virtual
extension name.
Up to 12 characters
Default:
STA 101 = Ext 101
STA 102 = Ext 102,
etc.
15-01-05
Basic Extension Data Setup –
Restriction for Outgoing Disable
on Incoming Line
Enable (1) or Disable (0)
supervised dial detection for an
extension.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)
3
15-02-07
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Hold for CO
Lines
Assigned automatic hold condition
(or disconnect) for CO lines.
0 = Hold
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
(default = 1)
3
2 - 132
3
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-02-21
15-07-01
15-08-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Virtual Extension
Access Mode (when idle Virtual
Extension key pressed)
Programmable Function Keys
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Setup
Determine whether a Virtual
Extension/Call Arrival Key (CAR)
should function as a DSS key, a
Virtual Extension, or a CAR key.
When DSS (0) is selected, the key
functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1)
is selected, the key functions as a
virtual extension and can be used
for incoming and outgoing calls.
When Ignore (2) is selected, the key
functions as a CAR key and can
receive incoming calls only.
Virtual Extension Key
Mode
0 = DSS
1 = Outgoing
2 = Ignore
(default = 2)
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
( 03 + ICM = VE or
CAR where ICM is the
extension number of
the VE or CAR)
When an extension or a virtual
extension is assigned to the
function key on the key telephone,
select the ring tone when receiving
a call on that key.
For ACD CAR keys, only tone
pattern 1 (entry 0) can be used. The
remaining patterns are not checked
with this feature.
15-09-01
15-10-01
Assigned Data
3
3
3
ICM Tone Pattern,
0 = Pattern 1
1 = Pattern 2
2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Ring
Tone Extension
(default = 0)
Virtual Extension Ring
Assignment
Use to assign the ringing options for
an extension Virtual Extension Key
or Virtual Extension Group Answer
Key which is defined in Program
15-07.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
0 = No Ringing
1 = Ring
(default = 0)
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Order Setup
When two or more virtual
extensions are set on a function key
on the telephone, and the tone
pattern by which the sound of each
extension differs, the priority of ring
sound is set up.
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension
Ring Tone
Order 1 Pattern 0 =
Pattern 1 (default)
Order 2 Pattern 1 =
Pattern 2 (default)
Order 3 Pattern 2 =
Pattern 3 (default)
Order 4 Pattern 3 =
Pattern 4 (default)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
2 - 133
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
15-11-01
15-18-01
15-18-02
20-04-03
20-06-01
20-07-10
20-10-08
20-13-27
21-01-15
2 - 134
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment
Use to assign the delayed ringing
options for an extension Virtual
Extension or Virtual Extension
Group Answer keys (defined in
Program 15-09).
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
(default = 0)
Virtual Extension Key Enhanced
Options – Virtual Extension Key
Operation Mode
Defines if calls to a Virtual
Extension Key land on the Virtual or
on the extension / CAP / CO
appearance.
This is assigned for the Virtual
Extension Key not the
extension it resides on.
0 = Release
1 = Land On the Key
(default = 0)
Virtual Extension Key Enhanced
Options – Display Mode When
Placing a Call on Virtual
Extension Key
Defines if calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual
Extension Key name or the name of
the extension it resides on.
0 = Secondary
Extension Name
1 = Actual Station
Name
(default = 0)
System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed Ringing
(see Program 15-11) ring the
extension after this interval.
0~64800
(default = 10 seconds)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the ability for
an extension to program the
Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to answer an incoming call on
a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set
to off for this option to work.
1 = Off
0 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable or Disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 1)
3
3
3
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
23-04-01
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Ringing Line Preference for
Virtual Extensions
When an extension has a virtual
extension assigned to a
Programmable Function Key,
program this option to determine
the priority for automatically
answering the ringing calls when
the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is
selected, when the user lifts the
handset, the user answers a ringing
call from any group.
2
3
00~64
(0 or 00=Don’t Care)
(default = 00)
3
Operation
To answer a call ringing a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:
1.
Press the flashing Call Arrival (CAR) Key.
To place a call to a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:
1.
Lift the handset, or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the CAR key extension, or press the Call Arrival (CAR) Key.
The operation depends on the setting in Program 15-02-21.
To program a Call Arrival (CAR) Key on a telephone:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 752.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Dial 03.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6.
Press Hold once for Immediate Ring
To set for Delayed Ring, skip to Step 8.
7.
Dial the Mode number in which the key rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 135
Issue 1.0
8.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press Hold to set up Delayed Ring.
- OR -
Skip to Step 10.
9.
Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
10.
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
Press Speaker.
2 - 136
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Duration Timer
Description
Call Duration Timer lets a multiline terminal with an LCD time their trunk calls on the telephone display.
This helps users that must keep track of their time on the telephone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call
Time begins as soon as the user answers the call.
Conditions
The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 137
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-09-06
20-13-36
21-01-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminals LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) a Call Timer
for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
System Options for Outgoing
calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
The time the system waits for this
time to expire before starting the
Call Timer.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
3
2
3
Operation
To time your trunk calls:
1.
Place a trunk call.
The timer starts automatically.
2 - 138
Call Duration Timer
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Description
The Call Forwarding – Centrex feature allows a station to forward an incoming PBX/Centrex CO call to an
outside location using the same PBX/Centrex CO line to free the line for additional use.
Call Forwarding – Centrex supports the following:
Call Forward – Immediate
Call Forward – Busy
Call Forward – No Answer
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Conditions
Call Forwarding – Centrex calls transferred from another station are forwarded when the
transferred Trunk is assigned as PBX in Program 14-04-01.
The following incoming calls follow Call Forwarding – Centrex when the incoming trunk is a
PBX/Centrex trunk:
DIT/ANA
Station Transfer
Automated Attendant Transfer
DISA Calls
Call Forwarding – Centrex is not supported for Call Forward Both Ring Split.
A maximum of 24 digits can be assigned in the destination for Call Forwarding – Centrex.
When a trunk is set to CTX/PBX, and is set for Call Forwarding – Centrex to an incorrect
number, the call recalls and follow CO incoming ringing (i.e., DIL, Normal Ring Group
Programming).
When Call Forwarding – Centrex is set and all trunks are changed in PRG 14-04-01 from
PBX to Trunk, Call Forward is cleared from memory.
When DND and any Call Forwarding – Centrex is set, the call forwards immediately.
Call Forwarding – Centrex does not follow the Code Restriction of the stations.
Default Setting
Disabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 139
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
PBX/Centrex CO line
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Code Restriction
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
PBX Compatibility
Virtual Extensions
Voice Response System (VRS)
2 - 140
Call Forwarding – Centrex
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
2
Allocate the circuits on the
CD-CP00-AU ETUs for either
DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection. Program 14-01-13 Basic
Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Supervision Enable (1) loop
supervision for each trunk that
should be able to use Call
Forwarding – Centrex.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available
3
11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Used to assign the Call Forward All
Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Used to assign the Call Forward
Busy Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Used to assign the Call Forward No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
(Split)
Used to assign the Call Forward
Busy No Answer Split Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
14-01-13
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Use this option to Enable or Disable
loop supervision for the trunk.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 1)
3
14-04-01
Behind PBX Setup
Indicate if the trunk is installed
behind a PBX (1) or not (0). There
is one item for each of the Night
Service Modes.
0 = Stand Alone
(Trunk)
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
2 = Not Used
3 = CTX assume 9
(default = 0)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 141
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL,
or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive Off-Hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
System Options for Transfer –
Hook Flash Sending Timer When
the System Answers
Automatically
Set the time the system waits
before sending the hookflash for the
Centrex Transfer after answering
the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 2)
24-09-06
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for All Call, No Answer
Use to assign Call Forwarding Type
and the destination numbers for
CTX/PBX all call, no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-07
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for Busy
Use to assign Call Forwarding Type
and the destination numbers for
CTX/PBX busy calls.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
20-09-07
20-13-05
20-13-06
24-02-13
2 - 142
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
2
3
3
3
Call Forwarding – Centrex
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding – Centrex:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Split Service Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 3 (CTX/PBX).
4.
Dial 1 (Set).
5.
Dial number to Centrex Forward to.
6.
Hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding – Centrex:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Split Service Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial 3 (CTX/PBX) or 0 (All).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 143
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 144
Call Forwarding – Centrex
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Forwarding – Park and Page
Description
When an extension user is away from their phone, Park and Page can let them know when they have a
call waiting to be answered. The Personal Greeting and Park & Page options can have up to 200
messages total (note that the Park & Page feature uses two messages). To enable Park and Page, the
user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. Park and Page then
answers an incoming call and plays the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens to Music on
Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the prerecorded Paging announcement. When the
extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to intercept
the call.
For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says:
“Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am automatically
paged.”
The prerecorded Paging announcement could say:
“John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line.”
The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the
second message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John doesn’t pick up
the call, the Page periodically repeats.
Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This means that
Park and Page activates for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It also activates for calls
transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Automated Attendant follow
Automatic Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page activates for transferred outside calls but does
not play the Personal Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when the specified Page zone is busy, the
system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes free.
Conditions
Park and Page announcements only repeat once.
Voice Announcement (VAU) recording time is fixed at two minutes and cannot be changed.
While Park and Page is enabled, only one DID call at a time can be processed. Subsequent
callers hear a busy tone.
This feature is not supported for CO transferred calls.
Default Setting
Park and Page is available at default for internal paging access code 701, zone 1.
Use access code of 713. See feature Operation. Set Program 40-10-01 for VRS guidance
message.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 145
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
VM8000 InMail, PZ-VM21 and CC-CP00
Related Features
Analog Communication Interface (ACI)
Music on Hold
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-58
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
with Personal Greeting
Call forward with Personal greeting
VRS. Service code setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 713)
3
11-12-19
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Internal Group Paging
Service code setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 701)
3
11-12-20
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – External Paging
External paging access code.
Service code setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 703)
3
11-12-24
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Combined Paging
Combined paging, internal/external
access code. Service code setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 1)
3
2 - 146
3
Call Forwarding – Park and Page
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-06-01
31-02-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Internal Paging Group
Assignment – Internal Paging
Group Number
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Assign extensions to Internal
Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones).
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
0~64
(0 = No Setting)
Default: 1
0 for IP Station
2
3
3
3
1 for TDM Station
31-03-01
31-04-01
31-06-01
31-06-02
Internal Paging Group Settings –
Internal Paging Group Name
External Paging Zone Group –
Paging Group Number
Assign names to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The
system shows the names you
program on the telephone displays.
Up to 12 Characters
01 = Group 1
02 = Group 2
:
64 = Group 64
3
Assign each External Paging
Speaker to an External Paging
Zone.
Paging Group Number
0~8 (0 = No Setting)
Speaker 1 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 1 (Group 1)
Speaker 2 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8 [PGD(2)-U( )
ADP] = 8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9
(CD-CP00-AU) = 1
(Group 1)
3
External Speaker Control –
Broadcast Splash Tone Before
Paging (Paging Start Tone)
Use this option to Enable or Disable
splash tone before Paging over an
external zone. If enabled, the
system broadcasts a splash tone
before the External Paging
announcement.
0 = No Tone (None)
1 = Splash Tone
2 = Chime Tone
(default = 2)
External Speaker Control –
Broadcast Splash Tone After
Paging (Paging End Time)
Use this option to Enable or Disable
splash tone after Paging over an
external zone. If enabled, the
system broadcasts a splash tone at
the end of an External Paging
announcement.
0 = No Tone (None)
1 = Splash Tone
2 = Chime Tone
(default = 2)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 147
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
40-10-01
40-10-05
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Voice Announcement Service
Option – VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system
ability to play the fixed VRS
messages (such as You have a
message.).
0= Not Used
1= Used
(default = 0)
3
Voice Announcement Service
Option – Park and Page Repeat
Timer (VRS Msg Resend)
If a Park and Page is not picked up
in this interval, the Paging
announcement repeats.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
3
2
3
Operation
To have the system page you when you have a call:
1.
Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone) and dial 713.
2.
When you hear, “Please start recording,” record your Personal Greeting.
If you already have Park and Page or Personal Greeting set up, you can dial:
3 to erase (the optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)
5 to listen (then # again to listen again)
7 to re-record
3.
Dial #7.
4.
When you hear, “Please start recording,” record your page and dial # when the announcement is
complete.
A paging chime overrides the first four seconds of an announcement. Allow a delay in announcement recording
for chime time.
5.
Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement.
For example, for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 + 1, or for Combined Paging Zone, 1 dial 1 + 1.
6.
Dial the Park and Page type:
2 = All Calls
3 = Outside Calls Only
7.
Press Speaker to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone).
To pick up your Park and Page:
1.
Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone).
2.
Dial
+ your extension number.
To cancel your Park and Page:
1.
Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone).
2.
Dial 713 + 3.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone).
2 - 148
Call Forwarding – Park and Page
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension or an off-premise
number. Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work
area. The types of Call Forwarding are:
Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered
Calls to the extension forward when busy or unanswered.
Call Forwarding – Centrex
When using PBX/Centrex trunks, calls to the extension perform a Centrex transfer using Immediate,
Busy and No Answer Forwarding.
Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.
Call Forwarding with both Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded
extension ring (not for Voice Mail).
Call Forwarding when Unanswered
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).
Call Forwarding Follow Me
Refer to Call Forwarding with Follow Me on page 2-161 for more information.
Personal Answering Machine Emulation
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to SV8100 In-Mail for more
information.
Call Forwarding reroutes calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extension.
Call Forwarding can also be split, allowing internal and external calls to forward to different destinations.
The extension user can enable Call Forwarding from their telephone. An extension user can also set the
forwarding for another extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination. To redirect calls
while a user is at another telephone, use Call Forwarding with Follow Me. A periodic VRS announcement
can remind users that their calls are forwarded.
Conditions
Virtual Extensions can be set to Call Forward. Program 15-02-21 must be set to a 1 to allow
the Virtual Extension to place outgoing calls.
If an extension in a call forward chain has Call Forward with Both Ring or Call Forward with
Follow Me set, calls do not continue routing to other extensions in the chain.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 149
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Call Forwards can be chained allowing calls to forward from one extension to the next. Up to
32 extensions can be linked in a call forward chain.
Periodic reminder message requires a PZ-VM21 daughter board for Voice Response System
(VRS).
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving
Department Pilot Calls.
Ring Groups do not follow Call Forwarding.
Call Forward Split does not allow for Call Forward with Follow Me.
If Call Forwarding off premise, a trunk access code must be included in the forwarding
number.
Call Forward with Follow Me allows for a single station to set follow me for multiple stations.
When canceling Call Forward with Follow Me, the use must specify the station to cancel or
cancel all.
The telephone must be idle to enable call forwarding with a Programmable Function Key, or
receiving dial tone to enable call forwarding with a service code.
Call Forward for any Extension to Destination cannot be set or canceled from a Virtual
Extension.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override allows for Overriding a Call Forwarding or DND
setting at another extension.
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing their telephone.
An extension user can forward their calls to a Department number.
A DSS key indicates a Call Forwarding indication for extensions.
When DND All and Call Forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If
Busy and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the Busy forwarding.
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation.
If an extension Class of Service denies Call Forwarding (Program 20-11-01~Program 20-1105, off), the extension can still dial the service code to Set/Cancel Call Forwarding, but it
cannot set any data.
Call Forward Both Ring Split does not work to an off-premise destination.
If an IP telephone has forwarding set and then loses connection, it follows the forwarding.
If an IP phone has Busy and No Answer Forwarding set to different locations and it loses
connection, it follows No Answer forwarding.
2 - 150
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station and Virtual Extensions
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Central Office Calls, Answering
Department Calling
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Do Not Disturb
Programmable Function Keys
Voice Response System (VRS)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 151
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-10-06
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Set the service code for setting
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 733)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Canceling the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Set the service code for canceling
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 734)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Destination for Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Set the service code for setting the
destination for automatic trunk
transfer.
MLT
(default = 735)
11-10-18
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Off-Premise
Call Forward by Door Box
Set the service code for setting
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 722)
3
11-11-01
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– All
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding all calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 741)
3
11-11-02
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 742)
3
11-11-03
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– No Answer
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 743)
3
11-11-04
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy/No Answer
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy or no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 744)
3
11-11-05
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Both Ring
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy or no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 745)
3
11-11-07
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call
Forwarding – Follow Me
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for follow me.
MLT, SLT
(default = 746)
3
11-11-08
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Do Not
Disturb
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for Do Not Disturb.
MLT, SLT
(default = 747)
3
11-10-07
11-10-08
2 - 152
3
3
3
3
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward all
split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward busy
split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward no
answer split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
(Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward busy
or no answer split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-49
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward the
both ring split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-52
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All Destination (No
Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward all
destination with no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 790)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy Destination
(No Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward busy
destination with no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 791)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward no
answer destination with no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 792)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
Busy No Answer Destination (No
Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward busy
or no answer destination with no
split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 793)
11-11-58
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call forward
with Personal Greeting
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding with Personal Greeting.
MLT, SLT
(default = 713)
3
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for bypass
calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
3
11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
Use to customize the one-digit
Service Codes used when a busy or
ring back signal is heard.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
11-11-53
11-11-54
11-11-55
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 153
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-09-01
20-09-07
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
2 - 154
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
3
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL,
or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forward Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) an extensions
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-23
20-13-05
20-13-06
24-02-03
24-09-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability to
set and cancel Call Forwarding for a
CAR or Virtual Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension user to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive Off-Hook signals.
An example of an Off-Hook signal is
the tone heard when receiving a
second call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Transfer –
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding
interval. For an unanswered call,
Call Forward No Answer occurs
after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Type:
Use to assign Call Forwarding Type
and the destination numbers for
each extension/virtual extension.
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding
with
both ring
2 = Call Forwarding
when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all
calls
4 = Call Forwarding
busy
or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding
when busy
(default = 0)
3
3
3
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
24-09-02
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Destination for
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer
Use to assign CO Call Forwarding
Destination for ring, all call and no
answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-03
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding
Destination for Both ring, All
Call, No Answer
Use to assign Intercom Call
Forwarding Destination for ring, all
call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-04
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Use to assign CO Call Forwarding
for busy destinations.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-05
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Use to assign Intercom Call
Forwarding for busy destinations.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-06
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for All Call, No Answer
Use to assign Call Forwarding for
CTX/PBX all call, no answer
destinations.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-07
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for Busy
Use to assign Call Forwarding
destinations for busy CTX/PBX
calls.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 155
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To set Call Forward – Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function Keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
Refer to Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-145.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key lights.
To cancel Call Forward – Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 13 or SC 751, Key Code 13)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
Refer to Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-145.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on.
2 - 156
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 13 or SC 751, Key Code 13)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward – Both Ring at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751, Key Code 14)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on.
To cancel Call Forward – Both Ring at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward – Follow Me from the destination station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Follow Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 157
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the station number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key goes on.
To cancel Call Forward – Follow Me from the destination station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Follow Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 15)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number, which is forwarded, or 0 to cancel all extensions.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (Default: 790).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To cancel Call Forward Immediate for any Extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default: 790).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number which is forwarded.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default: 793).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
2 - 158
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
Issue 1.0
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default: 793).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number, which is forwarded.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To set Call Forward – Immediate using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
Refer to Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-145.
To cancel Call Forward – Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (Default: 744).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
Refer to Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-145.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 159
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
2 - 160
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Description
While at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the coworker’s extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker’s desk longer than
expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me
from the co-worker’s telephone.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the
initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Conditions
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving
Department Pilot Calls.
Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station.
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
ring an idle Department Group member, then follow Program 22-08 programming then
Program 22-05 programming.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 161
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-11-07
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call
Forwarding – Follow Me
Assign the service code of Call
Forward Follow Me.
MLT, SLT
(default = 746)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
(15 = Call Forward with
Follow Me)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
20-06-01
20-11-05
2 - 162
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
In an extension's Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) an extensions
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
2
3
3
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a multiline terminal:
1.
At a multiline terminal, other than your own, press Speaker and dial Service Code (746, Program
11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2.
Dial 1 to set.
3.
Dial the Extension to forward.
The multiline terminal with display indicates on the display of the telephone which Call Forward Follow Me is set.
Also, the Programmed Follow Me Flexible Line Key flashes (if assigned) when Follow Me is set.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own Multiline Terminal:
1.
At your multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial Service Code (746, Program 11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel.
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a single line telephone:
1.
At a single line telephone, other than your own, lift the handset and dial the Service Code (746
Program 11-11-07).
2.
Dial 1 to set.
3.
Dial the extension to forward.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own single line telephone:
1.
At your single line telephone, lift the handset and dial Service Code (746, Program 11-11-07).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel.
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 163
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 164
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Description
Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By
enabling Call Forward, Off-Premise, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls
while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any telephone number the user
enters, such as a mobile phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can
route the off-site telephone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route
Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:
Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions
Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail 1
Direct Inward Lines 1
DISA, DID and Tie Line calls to the forwarded extension 1
Transferred calls 1
Off-Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, or Ring
Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Program 22-04 and
Program 22-05).
Conditions
If a call that forwards Off-Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID, and the called
party does not answer before the time in Program 34-07-05, the call recalls to the station that
performed the transfer.
Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or
ground start trunks.
The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24
digits.
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving
Department Pilot Calls.
If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10~17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.
DID calls to an extension with Off-Premise Call Forwarding set do not recall if there is no
answer.
1.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (refer to the Programming section).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 165
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
ring an idle Department Group member, then follow Program 22-08 programming then
Program 22-05 programming.
Door Boxes must be programmed for the calls to be transferred Off-Premise.
The outside number Call Forwarding dials can be only a number normally allowed by the
forwarded extension Toll Restriction.
In systems with a DSP daughter board for VRS, callers to an extension forwarded
off-premise hear, “Please hold on, your call is being rerouted.” This option can be disabled in
Program 40-10-01 by setting it to disable.
When a station is in DND and any Call Forwarding Off Premise is set, the call forwards
immediately.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise is not supported when using Alternate Trunk Group Routing.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 166
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Forwarding
Code Restriction
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
Virtual Extensions
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
Allocate the circuits on the
CD-CP00-AU ETUs for either
DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available
2
3
3
2 - 167
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot
Numbers – Dial
Use to assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-11-01
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– All
Use to assign the Call Forward All
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 741)
3
11-11-02
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 742)
3
11-11-03
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– No Answer
Use to assign the Call Forward No
Answer Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 743)
3
11-11-04
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy/No Answer
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy No Answer Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 744)
3
11-11-05
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Both Ring
Use to assign the Call Forward Both
Ring Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 745)
3
11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward All
Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
(Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy No Answer Split Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-49
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward Both
Ring Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-52
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All Destination (No
Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward All
for any Extension Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 790)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy Destination
(No Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy for any Extension Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 791)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Used to assign the Call Forward No
Answer for any Extension Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 792)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy No Answer for any Extension
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 793)
11-11-53
11-11-54
11-11-55
2 - 168
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
1
14-01-13
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for
each trunk that should be able to
use Call Forwarding Off-Premise.
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
20-06-01
20-09-01
20-09-07
20-11-12
20-13-05
20-13-06
Assigned Data
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL,
or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
In an extensions Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) setting up
Call Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive Off-Hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
2 - 169
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
24-02-07
24-09-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Transfer –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release
Warning Tone
Timer starts when a trunk begins
talking with another trunk (for
example: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer,
outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking). When this time expires, a
warning tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Type
Use to assign Call Forwarding Type
and destination numbers for each
extension/virtual extension.
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding
with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding
when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all
calls
4 = Call Forwarding
busy or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding
when busy
(default = 0)
3
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Destination for
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer
Use to assign CO Call Forwarding
destination numbers for both ring,
all call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-03
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding
Destination for both ring, All
Call, No Answer
Use to assign Intercom Call
Forwarding destination numbers for
both ring, all call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-04
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Use to assign CO Call Forwarding
busy destination numbers.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-05
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Use to assign Intercom Call
Forwarding busy destination
numbers.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-06
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for All Call, No Answer
Use to assign Call Forwarding
destination numbers for CTX/PBX
for all call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
24-09-07
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for Busy
Use to assign Call Forwarding
destination numbers for CTX/PBX
for busy.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
25-07-07
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller or
any Trunk-to-Trunk (such as
Tandem Trunking) conversation can
talk before the Long Conversation
tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting
a DISA or any trunk-to-trunk (such
as Tandem Trunking) call after the
Long Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
2 - 170
3
3
24-09-02
25-07-08
2
3
3
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding – Normal (0) Trunks
Program
Number
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
13-01-01
13-04-01
14-01-26
20-06-01
20-07-05
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Automatic Transfer for each
Trunk Line
Customize the service code to be
used to set the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature.
MLT
(default = 733)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Canceling the
Automatic Transfer for each
Trunk Line
Customize the service code to be
used to cancel the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature.
MLT
(default = 734)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Destination for Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Customize the service code to be
used to set the destination for the
Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature.
MLT
(default = 735)
Speed Dialing Option Setup –
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing
Call Mode
Determine if dialing an Speed
Dialing number will dial an outside
number (seizing a trunk as
assigned in Program 13-05) or an
Intercom number (0 = Trunk Dialing
Mode, 1 = Extension Dialing Mode).
0 = Trunk Outgoing
Mode
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode
(default = 0)
3
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Speed Dialing Data
Enter the Common and Group
Speed Dialing numbers and names
which are to be used for Trunk-toTrunk Forwarding.
1~9, 0, , #
Pause (Press line key
1)
Recall/Flash (Press
line key 2)
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(maximum 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
3
3
Enable or Disable each trunk the
ability to use Step Transfer.
0 = Normal Transfer
(Normal)
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)
(default = 0)
3
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Mode
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic Trunk-toTrunk Transfer
2
2 - 171
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
22-02-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup –
Incoming Type
Used to assign the incoming trunk
type for each trunk. There is one
item for each Mode. When using
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding the
trunks must be set for Normal (0).
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial
tone if no VRS
installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
3
3
24-02-11
System Options for Transfer –
No Answer Step Transfer
Assign the amount of time each
transfer destination rings before
step transfer is performed.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
24-02-12
System Options for Transfer –
No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
This timer defines the amount of
time that elapses before the
automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
is performed.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Target Setup
Assign the Speed Dialing number
bin (0~1999) to a trunk and the
mode which should be used as the
destination of the Automatic Trunkto-Trunk Forwarding.
0~1999
24-04-01
(default = 1999)
2
3
3
3
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding – DID (3) Trunk Forwarding by Department Groups
Refer to Departmental Calling for additional Department Group programming.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
– Dial
Assign pilot numbers to the
Extension (Department) Groups you
set up in Program 16-02.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-11-25
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Setup for Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to set the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature for a Department
Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 602)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to cancel the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature for a Department
Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 603)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Destination of
Automatic Transfer Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to set the destination for the
Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature
for a Department Group.
MLT
(default = 604)
11-11-26
11-11-27
2 - 172
2
3
3
3
3
3
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
13-01-01
13-04-01
14-01-04
14-01-05
14-06-01
15-07-01
16-02-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Speed Dialing Function Setup –
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing Call
Mode
Determine if dialing an Speed Dialing
number will dial an outside number
(seizing a trunk as assigned in
Program 13-05) or an Intercom
number (0 = Trunk Dialing Mode, 1 =
Extension Dialing Mode).
0 = Trunk Outgoing
Mode
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode
(default = 0)
3
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Speed Dialing Data
Enter the Common and Group
Speed Dialing numbers and names
which are to be used for Trunk-toTrunk Forwarding.
1~9, 0, , #
Pause (Press line key 1)
Recall/Flash (Press line
key 2)
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(maximum 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
3
2
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Gain Level for
Conference and Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [Program
14-01-04 = 32 (CODEC Gain Type
2)] can be used to set the transmit
CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference or transferred calls.
1~63(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Receive
Gain Level for Conference and
Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [Program
14-01-04 = 32 (CODEC Gain Type
2)] can be used to set the transmit
CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference or transferred calls.
1~63(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
Trunk Group Routing – Priority
Order Number
Used to set the priority order number
1~4.
0 = Not Specify1~100 :
(Trunk Group
Number)1001~1100 :
(1000 + Route Table
Number)
Default:
Route 1, Order Number
1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 =
0 (Not Specified)
All Other Routes
(2~100) and Order
Numbers (1~4) = 0 (Not
Specified).
3
Assign an Automatic Forwarding at
Department Group key (58) or a
Delayed Forwarding at Department
Group key (59) for an extension
user.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
Set up the Department Group called
by the pilot number and the
extension priority when a group is
called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in 2302.
Department Groups
1-64
Priority 1-512
Default = All extensions
in Department Group 1
with priority in port
order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 512 priority = 512
3
Programmable Function Keys
Department Group Assignment
for Extensions
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 173
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-11-17
24-05-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group Transfer)
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension in a Department Group
to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Department Group Transfer
Target Setup
Assign the Speed Dialing number bin
to be used as the destination of the
Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding.
0~1999
(default = 1999)
2
3
3
3
3
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding – DID (3) Trunk Forwarding Using DID Translation Table
Refer to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) for additional DID programming.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Assigned Data
1
22-11-05
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 1
22-11-06
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 2
2 - 174
Description/Comments
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1-2000), specify the first and
second Transfer Destinations if the
callers receives a busy or no answer
(action defined in Program 22-1104)
If the Transfer Destinations are
busy or receive no answer,
those calls are transferred to
the final transfer destination
(Program 22-10).
0 = No Setting
1~100 = Incoming
Group
101 = (Not Used)
102 = In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or In-Mail
201~264 = Extension
Group
400 = Valid Extension
Number
401 = DISA
501~548 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000~1999 = Speed
Number (000~999)
(default = 0)
2
3
3
3
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys (Program
15-07-01, Program 15-07-10 ~Program 15-07-15 or SC 751 Key Code 10~15).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 0) + Number (0+2142622000).
Trunk access codes are 0 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #0 + Line
number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial 1 (Internal) or 0 (External).
5.
Dial Trunk Access Code (default: 0) + number (0 + 2142622000).
Trunk access codes are 0 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #0 + Line
number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 175
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
2.
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
3.
Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
4.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
If Internal and External are set both are canceled.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes
These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751, code
54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3.
Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4.
Press Speaker (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751, code
54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
2 - 176
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 735.
3.
Dial trunk port number (001~200) to be defined.
4.
Select the mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.
The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry overwrites any
existing number defined in the bin.
6.
Press Hold to accept the entry.
7.
Repeat from Step 3 to define another mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel the Line Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 735.
3.
Dial trunk port number (001~200) to be defined.
4.
Select the mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Press the Exit key.
6.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Step Transfer) (follows the predefined destination in Program
24-04-01) Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13-04-01 for the line to forward.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 733.
3.
Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 734.
3.
Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 177
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Department Group Line Forwarding
Method 1
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 604.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.
The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry overwrites any
existing number defined in the bin.
6.
Press Hold to accept the entry.
7.
Repeat from Step 3 to define another time mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel the Line Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 604.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Press the Exit key.
6.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Method 2 (follows the pre-defined destination in Program 24-05-01)
Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13-04-01 for the line to forward.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 602.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 603.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 178
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Description
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful,
for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 179
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Customize the Service Code which
is to be used for Call Forwarding/
DND Override.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
Customize the 1-digit Service Code
used for DND/Call Forward
Override.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-13-04
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Turns On or Off the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Operation
To override an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:
1.
Call the forwarded or DND extension.
2.
Press the Override key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 37).
2 - 180
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Monitoring
Description
Call Monitoring allows selected Multiline Terminal Users to monitor another user’s conversation without
the ability to participate. A programmable audible alert tone can be sent to that station user. Without the
audible alert (silent monitor), no indication is provided to either the monitored station or the outside party.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not
contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under
federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state
laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation,
such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of
all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Call Monitoring with Coaching Ability
Call Monitoring with Coaching Ability allows for the transmit path to be opened only to the monitored
station, to provide the Coaching ability for the person that is performing the Call Monitoring. Press the
MIC key, or dial Feature + 1 to toggle the Coaching ability on and off.
Conditions
Call Monitoring is allowed for internal calls.
An extension user cannot Monitor an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using
Hands-free Answerback. Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker.
An extension user cannot monitor a conference, however an extension programmed for Call
Monitor can barge In to a conference.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a call, which has been barged into, can be placed on hold
by the originator of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension, which is
monitoring the call, are placed on hold.
The handset and microphone are muted during Call Monitoring.
Live Record does not work for Call Monitor calls.
While being monitored, an extension cannot receive Voice Over.
When a monitored extension places a call on hold, Call Monitor is automatically finished.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 181
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is being Monitored can be placed on park by
the originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in park. The extension
which is monitoring the call is dropped.
When Program 20-13-10 is set to 0 (Off), coaching is not permitted. When Program 20-1310 is set to 1 (On), Program 20-13-45 takes effect.
When Silent Monitor Mode is used, MIC or Feature + 1 can be used to activate speech path
to the internal and external parties.
Default Setting
Disabled.
System Availability
Terminals
All terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Barge-In
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Park
Programmable Function Keys
VM8000 InMail
2 - 182
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)
11-16-02
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Use to customize the one-digit
Service Codes used for Barge-In.
(default not assigned)
3
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-06-01
20-13-10
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enables the extension Barge-In
Mode to be Speech mode (0) or
Monitor mode (1) (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to barge-in on other's
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) Barge-In at
the receiving extension (i.e., BargeIn receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
2 - 183
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-32
20-13-45
20-14-11
20-18-07
21-01-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) the extension
ability to have multiple users BargeIn to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines if
the monitored parties receives the
barge in alert tone when Coaching
Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
In an extension Class of Service,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the BargeIn feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Service Tone Timers – Intrusion
Tone Repeat Time
After a user Barges In, the system
repeats the Barge-In tone after this
interval. Normally, you should
disable this time by entering 0. (This
time also affects any other type of
call interruption features, such as
Voice Mail Conversation Recording,
Voice Over, etc.)
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Program how long an extension
must wait before using the Barge-In
feature can be used on a call (this
time expires before a call is put in a
talk state). This time also affects
Voice Over.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
3
3
3
3
Operation
The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before it can be Monitored. Listen for busy/ring or busy
tone.
To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension:
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 34).
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks.
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710 (the access code will change).
2 - 184
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
To Call Monitor without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Press Speaker or lift handset.
2.
Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 34) (the access code will change).
3.
Dial a busy extension.
If Monitoring is not possible:
the extension user hears a warning tone.
the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.
the Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751:34).
3.
Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station.
- OR -
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710 (the access code changes).
3.
Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off.
To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability without first calling the busy extension
1.
Press Speaker or lift the handset.
2.
Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751:34). The access code changes.
3.
Dial a busy extension.
4.
Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 185
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 186
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Redirect
Description
Call Redirect allows a multiline terminal user to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are on a
call and another rings in to your extension. Press the Call Redirect key to transfer the call, allowing you to
continue with your current call.
This feature works with the following calls:
Normal trunk call
DID
DISA
DIL
E&M
ICM
The following calls cannot be redirected with the feature:
ACD
Transferred
Department Group (all ring mode)
Door Box
Virtual Extension
Conditions
After pressing the Call Redirect key, the call does not recall to the extension.
The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number.
When a call is Redirected to another phone it does not follow the forwarding on that phone.
Default Setting
Enabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 187
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
Any Multiline Terminal
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
2 - 188
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
2
3
Call Redirect
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-11-16
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns On (1) or Off (0) a multiline
terminal user’s ability to transfer a
call to a predefined destination
(such as an operator, voice mail, or
another extension) without
answering the call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3
3
Operation
To redirect a ringing call:
With an incoming call ringing your extension, press the Call Redirect key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 49 +
Destination Extension Number) without lifting the handset.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 189
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 190
Call Redirect
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Description
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without
hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating
the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy
extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in queue for a busy
extension without being forgotten.
Conditions
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).
If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp-On to a
callback.
Off-Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 704 to
Camp-On and/or DID callers from automatically camping on.
Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp-On operation.
An extension user may Transfer a call to a busy extension.
Trunk Queuing lets an extension user camp-on to a trunk.
Call Queuing must also be disabled to disable Call Waiting.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Multiline Terminal and Single Line Telephone
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 191
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Callback
Off-Hook Signaling
Programmable Function Keys
Transfer
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-11-23
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Second Call
for DID/DISA/DIL
This service code enables Second
Call to each extension when
Program 20-09-01 (Second Call) is
set to 0 (disable).
MLT
(default = 679)
11-12-04
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Set Camp-On
Customize the Service Code, which
is to be used for setting Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 750)
3
11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Cancel Camp-On
Customize the Service Code, which
is to be used for cancelling CampOn.
MLT, SLT
(default = 770)
3
11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Waiting Answer/
Split Answer
If required, use this program to
change the code users dial to Split
while on a call.
SLT
(default = 794)
3
11-16-05
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Camp-On
Customize the 1-digit Service Code
used for setting Camp-On.
(default = #)
3
15-02-06
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Hold Key Operating
Mode
Use this option to set the function of
the Multiline Hold key. Hold can
activate normal Hold or Exclusive
Hold.
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(default = 0)
3
2 - 192
3
3
Call Waiting/Camp-On
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-02-12
15-07-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Off-Hook Ringing
Programmable Function Keys
Use this option to set the telephone
Off-Hook signaling.
0 = Muted Off-Hook
Ringing
1 = No Off-Hook
Ringing
2 = Not Used
3 = Beep in Speaker
(SP)
4 = Beep in Handset
(HS)
5 = Speaker & Handset
Beep
(default = 5)
3
Use to assign a function for
Camp-On (code 35). This key is
also the Callback key.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
2
20-01-08
System Options – Trunk
Queuing Callback Time
Set the Trunk Queuing callback
time. A Trunk Queuing Callback
rings an extension for this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 15 seconds)
3
20-01-09
System Options – Callback/
Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queueing
request after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 64800
seconds)
3
20-03-01
System Options for Single Line
Telephones – SLT Call Waiting
for Answer Mode
For a busy single line (500/2500
type) telephone, set the mode used
to answer a camped-on trunk call.
For ESL sets, enabling this option
(1) allows the user to dial Service
Code for Voice Mail Conversation
Record.
0 = Hookflash
(Hooking)
1 = Hookflash +
Service Code 654
(default = 0)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-06-01
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 193
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-07
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-35
20-18-06
2 - 194
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DDI/
DIL/ E&M Override
2
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL,
or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook signaling
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns On (1) or
Off (0) extension ability to block
callers from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Service Tone Timers – Interval of
Call Waiting Tone
Use this option to set the interval
between call waiting tones. This
timer also sets the interval between
Off-Hook signaling alerts.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
3
3
3
3
Call Waiting/Camp-On
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To Camp-On a busy extension:
1.
Call the busy extension.
2.
Dial # or press the Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3.
Do not hang up.
To camp-on to a trunk, refer to Trunk Queuing/Camp-On on page 2-1135.
To cancel a Camp-On request:
1.
Hang up.
2.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial 770.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal, press the Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:
Listen for Call Waiting Tones.
1.
Hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls.
The operation depends on the setting in Program 20-03-01.
This operation is valid only before the caller performs the camp-on operation (refer To Camp-0n a busy extension
– step 2).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 195
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 196
Call Waiting/Camp-On
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Callback
Description
When an extension user calls a co-worker that does not answer or is busy, they can leave a Callback
request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back,
hoping to find it idle.
The system processes Callback requests as follows:
1.
Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.
Caller can place or answer additional calls in the meantime.
2.
When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3.
Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy or unanswered) extension
B.
If caller A does not answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
4.
As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When
Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset.
When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer
the Callback ring.
Conditions
An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).
If an extension user initiates a Callback but does not hang up, their extension Camps-On to
the busy extension.
Function Keys simplify Callback operation.
Default Setting
Enabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 197
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp-On)
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Cancel Camp-On
If required, redefine the service code
used cancel Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 770)
3
11-12-44
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Callback Test for SLT
If required, redefine the service code
used for SLT Callback Test.
SLT
(default = 799)
3
11-16-05
Single Digit Service Code Setup –
Camp-On
If required, redefine the service code
used to set Camp-On.
(default = #)
3
15-02-11
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Callback Automatic
Answer
Enable (1) or Disable (0) Callback
Automatic Answer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)
3
2 - 198
3
Callback
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
15-07-01
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
2
3
3
20-01-07
System Options – Callback Ring
Duration Time
Set the duration of the Callback ring.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 15 seconds)
3
20-01-09
System Options – Callback/Trunk
Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and
Trunk Queuing requests after this
interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 64800
seconds)
3
Operation
To place a Callback:
1.
Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.
2.
Dial # or press the Callback key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3.
Hang up.
4.
Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back.
If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your co-worker uses their
telephone for the first time.
If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you
lift the handset. If you do not have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing line appearance to
place the call.
To cancel a Callback:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker and Dial 770.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal, press Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 199
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To test Callback at a single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 799.
3.
Hang up.
4.
When the telephone rings, lift the handset.
You hear the Hold tone.
5.
Hang up.
2 - 200
Callback
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Caller ID Call Return
Description
The Caller ID Call Return feature allows the voice mail system to use Caller ID information captured with
the message to call and connect the person that left the message with the voice mail user that is checking
messages.
Conditions
A caller using a telephone without Softkeys, calling from outside the system, or from a
remote system is prompted to hear Caller ID information and return a call.
Return Call is available for subscriber messages and public messages.
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber during and after message playback.
Return Call is available for new and old messages.
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber using Softkeys in Softkey mode or using DTMF in
voice conversation Mode.
On the UM8000 Mail one minute before disconnecting the original caller, voice mail plays a
warning prompt and immediately before disconnecting plays a prompt to indicate dropping
the call.
When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey equipped telephone, and Caller ID
information is unavailable, the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank.
When Caller ID is disabled on the system, voice mail displays the message count.
On the UM8000 Mail, from the subscriber options Softkey menu, a subscriber can access a
Softkey menu that allows selection of name or number to be displayed on the LCD during
message playback. The default is name. Voice mail uses this setting to determine the initial
display on the LCD during playback.
Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post-message playback menu
is still displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys.
On the UM8000 Mail, during return call, the voice mail port is in conference with the box
owner and messages.
When Centralized Voice Mail is used, the remote voice mail user gets only Caller ID number
when voice mail answers incoming CO calls and performs an Await-Answer transfer to the
remote user. A Call that forwards to voice mail from the remote system does not have Caller
ID information.
Live Record is not available when using Return Call.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 201
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
A Telephone used as an ACD agent or supervisor station should not have mailboxes that
support Softkeys. Softkeys can be disabled per mailbox in Access Codes Options by
enabling Hands Free Play for a particular station.
On the UM8000 Mail, the Return Call feature is enabled per mailbox in Subscriber/Access
Options and can be enabled for internal numbers only or for both internal and external
numbers.
To use this feature for long distance calls, ARS must be programmed for the voice mail ports
set to dial out. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for detailed
programming instructions.
On the UM8000 Mail the Return Call parameter must be entered on the Integration Options
line of System/Switch/Switch Information Screen to enable this voice mail feature. Default is
RCV=6,10 where 6 is the number of rings voice mail tries when returning a call, and 10 is
the number of minutes a retuned call can last.
On the UM8000 Mail a trunk access code must be entered on the Return call outdial access
code line of System/Switch/Dialing Codes screen so the Return Call feature can access a
trunk to return the call. When this is not entered, the mailbox user is not prompted to return
the call even when Caller ID information is available.
Use Program 14-01-22 Caller ID to Voice Mail to enable or disable per trunk the ability to
send the Caller ID digits to voice mail.
After the call is ended by either party, the voice mail user is disconnected.
Toll restrictions apply to the voice mail extension and not to the extension of the subscriber
initiating the call back.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
UM8000 Mail
VM8000 InMail
2 - 202
Caller ID Call Return
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
UM8000 Mail
VM8000 InMail
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
14-01-22
14-02-10
15-02-04
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID to Voice Mail
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system
ability to send the Caller ID digits to
voice mail.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
3
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID
Enable or Disable a trunk to receive
Caller ID information.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Redial (Speed Dial)
Control
Use this option to control the
function of the extension Redial key
when used with Speed Dialing. The
Redial key can access either the
Common or Group Speed Dialing
numbers.
0 = Common and
Individual Speed
Dialing
1 = Group Speed
Dialing
(default = 0)
3
2
3
Operation
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 203
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 204
Caller ID Call Return
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Caller ID
Description
Caller ID allows a display terminal to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called the Directory
Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as pre-answer display. With the
pre-answer display, the user previews the caller’s number before picking up the ringing line.
On the CD-CP00-AU for Caller ID (also used for DTMF receivers and Call Progress Tone Detection) 32 resources are
available. The PZ-BS10 Unit provides an additional 64 resources.
Second Call Display
While busy on a call, the telephone display can show the identity of an incoming trunk or Intercom call. For
incoming trunk calls, the display shows the Caller ID or ANI data or the trunk name if Caller ID or ANI are
not installed. For incoming Intercom calls, the display shows the calling extension name.
Caller ID supports the Telco Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND)
service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the
first and second ring burst of an incoming call. Two types of Caller ID message formats are currently
available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message Format, the Telco
sends only the caller’s telephone number (DN). The DN is 10 digits long. In Multiple Message Format, the
Telco sends the DN and the caller’s name. The DN for this format also has seven or 10 digits, and the
name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters.
The telephone display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits (for non-ACD calls).
Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all trunk calls, including:
Ring Group calls
Calls transferred from another extension
Calls transferred from the VRS
Calls transferred from Voice Mail (unscreened)
Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
Caller ID temporarily stores 50 calls (total of abandoned and answered/unanswered). New calls replace
old calls when the buffer fills.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call causes the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, to indicate a new
call was placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone display shows
CHECK LIST.
This Caller ID data from the temporary memory can be saved in either Speed Dial bins or in One-Touch
keys making them available for placing future calls.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 205
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Outputting Caller ID Data
The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call DN in
the DIALED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).
Caller ID data can also output to a PC or other type of computer through the 1st Party TAPI driver. This
allows for off-line database lookups. In a customer service department, for example, the computer could
search for a caller’s records and display their account status even before a customer service
representative picked up the telephone.
Caller ID Digits to Voice Mail
A Caller ID/ANI trunk can send Remote Log-On Protocol with Caller ID digits to the voice mail. When a
60001 12345 .
trunk 001 receives the Caller ID as 12345, the protocol becomes
Display Reason for No Caller ID Information
With Caller ID enabled, the system provides information for analog calls that do not detect the Caller ID
information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display shows PRIVATE. If the system
cannot provide Caller ID information because Telco information is not detected, the display shows NO
CALLER INFO.
Calling Party Number Information
When using the Wireless DECT (SIP) telephone, the system can provide the Caller ID information for an
external call if it is provided by the Telco.
Option to Enable Caller ID Name for SLT
System programming provides an option for single line telephones to display Caller ID.
Add Trunk Access Code to Caller ID with Wireless DECT (SIP) – Phones
UNIVERGE SV8100 SIP DECT Phones on the UNIVERGE SV8100 can hold incoming call history. This
history is created based on the Caller ID information element contained in the call Setup message which
is transmitted from the UNIVERGE SV8100. This information allows users to return calls dialing the
number stored.
The stored number, however, does not contain the trunk access code. Without this code, the system may
not be able to seize an outside line to complete the call.
With this feature, when an Wireless DECT (SIP) user receives an incoming trunk call, the trunk access
code defined in programming can be added to the Caller ID. This allows the system to seize an outside
line and then dial the stored number.
This function is applied only to incoming ISDN calls. It does not apply to incoming extension calls.
Caller ID must be available for this feature to work.
The maximum number of Caller ID digits is 20. If the total number of digits [trunk access code
(Program 10-02-05) and Caller ID] is over 20, the remaining Caller ID digits are not dialed.
For example:
Trunk Access Code (Program 10-02-05): 123456# (eight digits)
Incoming Caller ID: 12345678901234567890 (20 digits)
UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless Dials: 123456# 123456789012
2 - 206
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
An additional digit (such as 1) may be required to complete the call (Program 10-02-04).
For example:
Incoming Caller ID shows: 2125551212.
If your area code is NOT 212, define a 1 in Program 10-02-04. When callback is executed, the
system prefixes 1 on the digits dialed string.
Caller ID Sender Queuing Added
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system can provide Caller ID (calling party number) to a single line telephone
with a display.
The system can queue incoming calls to the single line telephone if the system Caller ID sender resources
are busy. Refer to Program 20-19-05 in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual.
If the single line telephone user lifts their handset while an incoming call is waiting in queue, they hear
silence (no dial tone) and cannot dial out. When the single line telephone user goes back on-hook, the
system immediately sends the queued call to the single line telephone without Caller ID.
Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type for Single Line Telephone
An option (Program 15-03-11) is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select either FSK or DTMF
as the Caller ID type to be received by a single line telephone.
Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type from Analog Trunk
An option (Program 14-02-16) is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select the type of Caller ID
signal from an analog trunk – FSK or DTMF.
Conditions
To have pre-answer Caller ID from the voice mail, the call must be an unscreened transfer.
Caller ID is provided by the CD-CP00-AU. The PZ-BS10 blade, which plugs into the chassis,
can provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed.
Caller ID Name can display up to 12 characters.
Caller ID Number can display up to 11 characters.
A Caller ID Number with more than 12 digits follows Program 20-19-01 (first 10 or the last 10
digits).
Caller ID information can be stored in Speed Dialing or One-Touch bins.
Caller ID can be displayed for incoming calls and transferred calls.
ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information all-by-call. To do this, insert the Caller ID block
code (e.g., .67) in the ARS Dial Treatments.
Trunks with Privacy Release enabled display Caller ID until the call is answered. To view it
after the call has been picked up, press the line key, which sets the call to private mode. To
keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 207
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
An extension user can display the Caller ID information for a call in Park if Automatic
Handsfree in Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (Preselect).
An extension user can display the Caller ID information for multiple incoming calls without
answering the call by pressing the line key if Automatic Handsfree in Program 15-02-08 is
set to 0 (Pre-select).
Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report.
The system can send Caller ID digits to the voice mail if allowed in Program 14-02-10.
When more than 20 characters set in Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data, either the first or last character is missing (based on the entry in Program 20-19-01).
If Program 20-09-06: Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service): Incoming Time
Display is set to 1 (On), the first line displays the time and date.
When you shut down the system, incoming history data is cleared. But you can back up the
history data by pressing Speaker + # # 9.
Program 15-07-01 button (63) when enabled, removes the CPN from the setup message
when making an outbound ISDN call, this is a toggle enable/disable button and can be used
on a Call-by-Call basis. Programs 14-01-20, 14-01-21 and 20-08-15 are used for copper
trunks only and can be set only per trunk/Class of Service.
SLT users cannot block an incoming call based on the incoming Caller ID information on a
station-by-station basis.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with a display and Single Line Telephones equipped to receive Caller ID.
Required Component(s)
CD-4COTC with PZ-4COTG Daughter Board
CD-2BRIA with PZ-2BRIA Daughter Board
CD-PRTA
2 - 208
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Caller ID Call Return
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Dterm Cordless II Telephones /Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephones
Park
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
VM8000 InMail
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
10-02-04
Location Setup – Area Code
Enter the local area code.
(default not assigned)
3
10-02-05
Location Setup – Trunk Access
Code
Enter the trunk access code digits
required to place an outgoing call.
Dial up to eight digits
0~9, , #
(default not assigned)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 209
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
10-09-01
11-15-03
14-01-20
14-01-21
14-01-22
14-02-10
15-02-08
2 - 210
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
Allocate the circuits (1~16 or 1~64)
on the CD-CP00-AU for either
DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource 01~08
= 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource 09~32
= 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource 33~96
= 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Backup Data Save
This service code is used for back
up the programmed data on the
SRAM and Call History to the
Flash ROM.
While saving the database, it may
cause system lock up.
MLT
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
system from automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID information
when a user places a call.If
allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the
system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code 1831 defined
in 14-01-21 before the user dialed
digits.
If prevented (i.e., block disabled),
the system outdials the call just as
it was dialed by the user.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Enter the code, up to eight digits,
that should be used as the Caller
ID Block Code. This code is
automatically inserted before
dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is
set to ‘1’.
Trunks 1~200
Dial (up to eight digits)
1831
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID to Voice Mail
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
system ability to send the Caller ID
digits to voice mail.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID
Enable or Disable a trunk to
receive Caller ID information.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to set whether
pressing a key accesses a
One-Touch Key (1) or if it
preselects the key (0).
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic Handsfree)
(default = 1)
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID Block Code
#
2
3
3
#9
3
3
3
3
3
3
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
15-02-40
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Additional Dial for Caller
ID Call Return
Enter the digits to be dialed in front
of the Caller ID when using Caller
ID Call Return.
Up to four digits
(0, 1~9, #, )
(default not assigned)
15-03-09
Single Line Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Caller ID Function – For
External Module
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the Caller
ID FSK signal for an external Caller
ID module or a 3rd party vendor
telephone with Caller ID display.
If voice mail is used, this setting
must be disabled or the system
integration codes for disconnect
are incorrect. For Caller ID Sender
Queuing, set this option to “1”.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Single Line Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Caller ID Name
Determine whether or not a single
line telephone extension user’s
telephone should display the Caller
ID name.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
15-03-11
Single Line Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Caller ID Type
Determine whether the Caller ID
type is FSK or DTMF.
0 = FSK
1 = DTMF
(default = 0)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
15-03-10
2
3
3
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code)
(Service Code 752 by
default)
3
3
20-02-08
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – LCD Display
Holding Time
This time determines how long a
user display shows Caller ID for a
second incoming call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-08-15
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turns Off (0) or On (1) a user Class
of Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed. If
block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 1831 defined in
Program 14-01-21 before the user
dialed digits (this requires Program
14-02-10 to be enabled). If block is
disabled, the system outdials the
call just as it was dialed by the
user.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
2 - 211
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-09-02
20-09-04
20-13-06
20-19-01
20-19-05
20-20-01
20-20-02
20-20-03
90-03-01
2 - 212
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Caller
ID display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is
displayed to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
System Options for Caller ID –
Caller ID Displaying Format (If
displaying digits are more than
12 digits)
Determine whether the first 10
digits (0) or last 10 digits (1) should
be displayed when Caller ID
exceeds 12 digits.
0 = First 10 digits
(Upper)
1 = Last 10 digits
(Lower)
(default = 0)
3
System ID Options for Caller ID –
Caller ID Sender Queuing Time
(Sender Wait)
With the Caller ID Sender Queuing
option, determine how long an
incoming call will wait in queue for
a DSP resource to become
available. If a resource becomes
available during this time, the call
immediately rings the single line
telephone with Caller ID. If the time
expires before a resource
becomes available, the system
rings the single line telephone
without Caller ID (until the queuing
time expires, the single line
telephone does not ring). If the
queuing timer is set to "0", the
system does not queue the
incoming call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data – Private Call
Enter the text to be displayed for
Caller ID when a user receives a
call which is classified as a private
call.
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
(default = PRIVATE)
3
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data – Call from Out of Service
Area
Enter the text to be displayed for
Caller ID when a user receives a
call which is classified as an out-ofservice area call.
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
(default = OUT OF
AREA)
3
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data – Call Information with Error
Enter the text to be displayed for
Caller ID when a user receives a
call which is classified as a call
with a CID error.
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
(default = NO CALLER
INFO)
3
Save Data
Use to save the programmed data
on the SRAM and Flash ROM to
the 16MB/32MB ATA removable
Compact Flash memory card.
Also, used to save stored Caller ID
if permanently saved with service
code #*#9 (11-15-03).
Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold to cancel.)
3
3
3
3
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
90-04-01
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Load Data
Use to load the system data from
the inserted Compact Flash
Memory to the SRAM and Flash
ROM in the system.
Also, used to load stored Caller ID.
Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold to cancel.)
2
3
3
Operation
Storing a Number
To store a Caller ID number in an Speed Dial bin:
1.
With a multiline terminal idle the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301
STA 301
LIST DIR ICM PROG
2.
Press the LIST Softkey. The display shows:
LIST MENU
Redial CID
3.
Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:
##:
↑
↓
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store
DEL
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
↑ = Preview List
↓ = Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4.
Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA SYS
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
SYS - Store in System Speed Dial bin.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 213
Issue 1.0
5.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press the STA or SYS Softkey. The display shows:
Store to SYS: COMMON
ENTER BIN
6.
Dial the Speed Dial bin in which the number is to be stored. If you press Hold, the next available
Speed Dial bin is used. The display shows:
SYS XXXX:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
If all Speed Dial bins are used, the display shows TABLE IS FULL.
7.
Press HOLD. The display shows:
SYS XXXX
-
8.
Enter the name to be associated with the stored number.
Table 2-5 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
1
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0
!
“
#
$
%
&
→← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
’
(
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
α ε
θ
Enter characters:
+
#
2 - 214
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
π Σ σ Ω
¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed
- ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use
the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
9.
Issue 1.0
Press Transfer. The display shows:
SET SYS
10.
Press Speaker.
The telephone returns to idle.
To store a Caller ID number in a One-Touch key:
1.
With a telephone idle the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301
STA 301
LIST DIR ICM PROG
2.
Press the LIST Softkey. The display shows:
LISTlMENU
Redial CID
3.
Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:
##:
↑
↓
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store
DEL
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
↑ = Preview List
↓ = Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4.
Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA SYS
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
SYS = Store in System Speed Dial bin.
5.
Press the STA Softkey. The display shows:
Store to ONE-TOUCH
ENTER BIN
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 215
Issue 1.0
6.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press the One-Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1~9, 0. If you press Hold, the
next available One-Touch key is used. The display shows:
Key ##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
If all One-Touch keys are used, the display shows TABLE IS FULL.
7.
Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY ##
-
8.
Enter the name to be associated with the stored number. Refer to Table 2-5 Keys for Entering
Names on page 2-214.
9.
Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY PROG
10.
ONE TOUCH
Press Speaker.
The telephone returns to idle.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call causes the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, indicating a new
call was placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone display shows
CHECK LIST.
1.
Press the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) or press the LIST Softkey and CID.
The last addition to the list is displayed.
2.
Press the ARROW DOWN Softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory.
3.
Press the DEL Softkey to delete the entry and scroll to the next entry.
4.
The Call History key remains on as long as entries remain in memory.
5.
To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list, with the number to be dialed
displayed, press a line key or Speaker. (Refer to Table 2-5 Keys for Entering Names on page
2-214.)
The outgoing call is placed.
To display Caller ID for a call in Park:
Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (preselect) for this feature.
1.
With Program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) and a call in park, press the PARK key. (Program 15-07
or SC 752: 04.
With Program 15-02-08 set to 1 (One-Touch) and a call in park, press RECALL then the PARK key
(Program 15-07 or SC 752 04).
2 - 216
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Checking your Answered/Unanswered Caller ID Calls
To review the last 50 outside calls your extension received:
1.
At a display multiline terminal, press the LIST Softkey.
2.
Press CID.
The first row of your display shows the Caller ID number. If there is an “ ” next to the call record number in the
left-hand corner, this indicates that it is a call you missed (unanswered). The second row shows the date and time
of the call.
Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer.
3.
If the Caller ID includes a name, you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller.
4.
To call the displayed number, press a line/Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
- OR -
To erase the displayed number without returning the call, press the DEL Softkey.
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 217
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 218
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Central Office Calls, Answering
Description
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact site requirements.
This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. A maximum of 200
trunks are available. For additional information on making trunks ring, refer to Ring Groups on page
2-887.
Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its original
destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group (this ring group applies to DIL or non-DIL trunks). This
could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss does not answer the call, it rings the
secretary’s telephone after a programmable interval.
Universal Answer
Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any multiline terminal and dialing a
unique Universal Answer code. The employee does not have to know the trunk number or dial any other
codes to pick up the ringing trunk. You normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night
Answer (refer to Night Service on page 2-775). When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External
Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone. You might also want to use
Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is
not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick up the call from
a shop telephone.
The Automatic Off-Hook Answer of Universal Answer Call options (Program 20-10-07) determines
whether or not the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls. This option allows a user to lift
the handset to answer a ringing call; dialing the service code is unnecessary.
Additional Trunk Ring Tones
Various ring tone patterns and melodies for incoming calls are available (Program 22-03-11); Ring Tone
Patterns 1~4 and Melodies 1~5.
Sidetone Volume Setup
This option allows system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Conditions
The incoming ring group assignment programmed in Program 41-03-01 overrides the setting
in Program 22-05-01.
Ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming.
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 219
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls
to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
Line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys simplify answering outside calls.
If the Absent text message was set by the originating extension, the destination extension
displays the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer message.
If an extension is assigned to a Trunk Access Map that has no access for a trunk, the
extension can still retrieve parked calls on that trunk. The extension can also Group Call
Pickup and Direct Call Pickup calls ringing another extension on that trunk.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
Any Trunk Blade (i.e., CD-4COTC, CD-2BRIA, CD-PRTA, etc.)
2 - 220
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Call Forwarding
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Directed Call Pickup
Do Not Disturb
Group Call Pickup
ISDN Compatibility
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Night Service
Programmable Function Keys
Selectable Display Messaging
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 221
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-XX
11-11-13
11-12-30
14-01-02
14-01-03
14-02-02
2 - 222
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup
2
Use program 10-03-XX to setup
and confirm the basic configuration
data for each blade. This program
represents different data depending
on the blade installed in the slot.
Please refer the SV8100
Programming Manual for a more
detailed description of this program.
The assigned data
varies depending on
the blade installed in
the slot. Please refer
to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for a more detailed
description of the
10-03-XX programs.
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
Select the service code which can
be used at an extension to change
the displayed language on a
multiline terminal display.
MLT
(default = 678)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Specified Trunk
Answer
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 672)
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Level
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Level
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Ring
Detect Type
This option sets Extended Ring
Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for
the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start
trunks, this option must be set to 1
for the trunks to ring and light
correctly.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal/delayed
1 = Immediate Ringing
(default = 1)
3
3
3
3
3
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
14-05-01
14-06-01
14-07-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Group – Trunk Group
Number
Trunk Group Routing – Priority
Order Number
Trunk Access Map Setup
Assign trunks to trunk groups then
go to Program 14-06-01 below to
set up Trunk Group Routing.
Used to set the priority order
number 1~4.
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This
sets the access options for trunks.
Ring Group programming overrides
Access Map programming.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
Trunks 1-200
Trunk Groups 1-100
Default = Trunks 1-200
assigned to trunk
group 1 with priorities
equal to the trunk
number.
Trunk 1 = Priority 1
Trunk 200 = Priority
200.
3
0 = Not Specify 1~100 :
(Trunk Group Number)
1001~1100 : (1000 +
Route Table Number)
Default:
Route 1, Order
Number 1 = 1 (Trunk
Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4
= 0 (Not Specified)
All Other Routes
(2~100) and Order
Numbers (1~4) = 0
(Not Specified).
3
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold).
3
3
2 - 223
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
15-01-05
Basic Extension Data Setup –
Restriction for Outgoing Disable
on Incoming Line
Enable or Disable supervised dial
detection for an extension.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)
3
15-02-01
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Language
Selection
Use to define the display language
for Multiline terminals. (To select
options 8~10, press either 8 or
Recall, then press line keys 1~3.
Key 1 is option 8, Key 2 is option 9,
and Key 3 is option 10.)
0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
(default = 1)
3
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
(default = 2)
3
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key
2 is option 9, and Key 3 is option
10.)
15-02-02
15-02-22
15-03-03
2 - 224
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Trunk Ring Tone
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Multiple Incoming From
Intercom and Trunk
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Terminal Type
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for
the extension port you are
programming.
When this option is set to 0
(disabled), incoming calls to an
extension indicate on any Hotline
key for that extension as solid
(busy). When this option is set to 1
(enabled), lighting is determined by
the setting of Program 22-01-01
Incoming Call Priority. If set to trunk
priority (1), the Hotline key lights
solid when a trunk call rings in. If set
to intercom priority (0), the Hotline
key does not light for incoming trunk
calls, but lights solid for intercom
calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mail, always enter
1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
0 = Normal
1 = Special
(default = 0)
3
3
3
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunks 1~200
(default = 1)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2
3
3
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Disconnect
Supervision
Use this option to Enable (1) or
Disable (0) disconnect supervision
for the system trunks.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
20-02-15
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Caller ID Display
Mode
Use to define the Caller ID display
mode for multiline terminals.
0 = Name and Number
(Both)
1 = Name
2 = Number
(default = 0)
3
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-06-01
20-10-07
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to use Continued
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal
sending while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
feature.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Supervise Dial Detection
Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
20-13-13
20-13-23
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 225
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
21-01-17
22-01-01
22-01-02
22-01-03
22-01-04
22-02-01
22-03-01
2 - 226
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Restriction Digit in
Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be
disconnected.
Digits 0~9
(default = 4)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Incoming Call Priority
Use this option to determine if
Intercom calls or trunk calls have
answer priority when both are
ringing simultaneously.
0 = Intercom call
priority
1 = Trunk call priority
(default = 1)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Incoming Call Ring No
Answer Alarm
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
Incoming Call RNA Alarm. If
enabled, the ring cadence will
change for a call that rings longer
than the interval set in Program
22-01-03.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Ring No Answer Alarm
Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm
interval. If a trunk rings a multiline
terminal longer than this interval,
the system changes the ring
cadence.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Use this option to set the feature
type for the trunk you are
programming.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
3
0~8
(Ring Tone Pattern
1~4)
(Melody 1~ Melody 5)
(default = 0)
3
Trunk Ring Tone Range – Ring
Tone Pattern
Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks.
Trunks ring extensions according to
the Ring Tone Range selected in
Program 22-03-0 and the settings
made with either Service Code 720
or Program 15-02-02.
3
3
3
3
3
3
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
22-04-01
22-05-01
22-06-01
22-07-01
22-08-01
23-03-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
Incoming Trunk Ring Group
Assignment
Normal Incoming Ring Mode
DIL Assignment
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Assign extensions to ring groups.
2
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
3
To have the trunks ring extensions,
assign trunks to a Ring Group. The
incoming ring group assignment
programmed in Program 41-03-01
overrides the setting in this
program.
Incoming Group
Number for Day/Night
Mode (1~8):
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Group)
102 (In-Skin/ External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)
3
Indicate whether the trunks in the
Ring Group assigned in Program
22-04-01 should ring (1) or not ring
(0).
0 = No Ring
1 = Ring
(default = 1)
3
Assign the destination extension for
each DIL incoming trunk (001~200).
For this selection to work, set
Program 22-02-01 to 4 = DIL.
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
3
If an incoming trunk call rings longer
than the DIL No Answer Time
(Program 22-01-04), it routes to the
destination you specify in this
option. Determine if the destination
should be a Ring Group, In-Skin/
External Voice Mail, or Central
Voice Mail.
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
3
Use this program to let an extension
user automatically answer trunk
calls that ring other extensions.
When the user lifts the handset,
they automatically answer the
ringing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).
Maximum eight digits
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Route Table Number
0~100
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 227
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
82-08-01
Sidetone Volume Setup
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Use this program to adjust of the
multiline terminal side tone volume.
There are two levels, based on
whether the connected trunk is a
digital trunk or analog trunk.
Input (0 ~ 9)
Digital Sidetone Level
(second column)
Analog Sidetone Level
(third column)
0 -54 (dB) -54 (dB)
1 -48 (dB) -54 (dB)
2 -42 (dB) -54 (dB)
3 -36 (dB) -48 (dB)
4 -30 (dB) -42 (dB)
5 -24 (dB) -36 (dB)
6 -18 (dB) -30 (dB)
7 -12 (dB) -24 (dB)
8 -12 (dB) -18 (dB)
9 -12 (dB) -12 (dB)
2
3
3
Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:
1.
Lift the handset.
To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:
1.
Go off-hook.
Depending on system programming, this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2.
2.
Dial #0.
If you hear error tone, your extension Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.
To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 711 + 2.
3.
Select the ringing (1~8) and tone range (1~4) you want to check.
4.
Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
To change the ringing of your incoming trunk:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 720 + 2.
3.
Select the ringing (1~8).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 228
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Central Office Calls, Placing
Description
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets you
customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual’s needs. To place a call
the user can:
Press Line Keys
Press a Trunk Group Key
Press a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) Key
Dial a code for a specific trunk (#0 + the trunk number)
Dial a code for a Trunk Group (704 + group number)
Dial a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (0)
Dial an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)
Press or Use a Speed Dial bin
There are 200 available trunks.
Trunk Port Disable
The system provides a service code (default: 645) which can be used by an extension user to block a
trunk for outgoing calls. The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it. All other users are
blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any user
programmed with the trunk access.
Sidetone Volume Setup
Allows the system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels, based
on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Conditions
If the trunk name seize display is enabled in programming, the Call Timer starts
automatically after the user places a trunk call. Disabling the trunk name seize display also
disables the Call Timer.
The system can automatically select the correct tine to use based on the number dialed and
the time.
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call
without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker. Users without Automatic Handsfree can
preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing Speaker.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 229
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time.
Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear
a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
An extension Toll Class of Service may prevent dialing certain numbers.
Dialing 0 or any other trunk access code after dialing an extension, terminates the intercom
call and seizes a trunk.
Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit timer
expires (Program 21-01-03).
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline terminals
Required Component(s)
Any Trunk Blade (i.e., CD-4COTB, CD-2BRIA, CD-PRTA, etc.)
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Automatic Route Selection
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Long Conversation Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
2 - 230
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Programmable Function Keys
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-XX
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup
Use program 10-03-XX to setup
and confirm the basic configuration
data for each blade. This program
represents different data depending
on the blade installed in the slot.
Please refer the SV8100
Programming Manual for a more
detailed description of this program.
The assigned data
varies depending on
the blade installed in
the slot. Please refer
to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for a more detailed
description of the
10-03-XX programs.
3
3
11-01-01
System Numbering
Use to set system numbering plan.
Refer to UNIVERGE
SV8100 Programming
Manual
11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit
Trunk Access Code (normally 0). If
you change this code, you must
also review the settings in Program
11-01-01 for the new code selected.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default = 0)
11-09-02
Trunk Access Code – 2nd Trunk
Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in
Program 11-01-01 for Alternate
Trunk Route Access.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default not assigned)
11-10-27
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Trunk Port
Disable for Outgoing Calls
Define the service code which
should be used by an extension
user to block a trunk from being
used for outgoing calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 645)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
Select the service code which can
be used at an extension to change
the displayed language on a
multiline terminal display
MLT
(default = 678)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Define the service code for
Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Override. This code is
available only if you disable the
voice mail Single Digit dialing code
in Program 11-16-09.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
11-11-13
11-12-01
2
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 231
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
11-12-14
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Group Access
Define the service code which
should be used by an extension
user to select outgoing Trunk
Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 704)
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Trunk
Name
Set the names for trunks. The trunk
name displays on a multiline
terminal for incoming and outgoing
calls.
Up to 12 Characters
Line 001
Line 002
Line 003
:
Line 200
3
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Level
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Level
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
14-01-07
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Outgoing Calls
Use this option to Allow (1) or Deny
(0) outgoing calls on the trunk you
are programming.
0 = Deny (No)
1 = Allow (Yes)
(default = 1)
3
14-01-10
Basic Trunk Data Setup – DTMF
Tones for Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, Enable (1) or
Disable (0) the ability to hear the
DTMF of the digits dialed when
placing the outgoing call.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
3
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Dial
Tone Detection for Manually
Accessed Trunks
Use this option enable/disable dial
tone detection for directly accessed
trunks. If disabled, the system
outdials on the trunks without
monitoring for dial tone.
0 = Dial Tone Detection
Not Used
1 = Dial Tone Detection
Used
(default = 0)
3
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Next
Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
Use this option to Enable (1) or
Disable (0) the system ability to skip
over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Call Appearance
(CAP) Keys, Speed Dial, Automatic
Route Selection (ARS), Last
Number Redial or Save Number
dialed. It does not pertain to line key
or Direct Trunk Access calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Start/Ground Start
Select Loop start (0) or Ground start
(1) for the trunk.
0 = Loop Start (Loop)
1 = Ground Start
(Ground)
(default = 0)
Trunk Group – Trunk Group
Number
Assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You
can also assign the outbound
priority for trunks within the group.
When users dial up the trunk group,
they seize the trunks in the order
you specify in the outbound priority
entry.
At default, all group are
assigned to Trunk Group 1.
Trunk Group Number:
0~100
14-01-01
14-01-02
14-01-03
14-02-05
14-02-11
14-02-14
14-05-01
2 - 232
3
3
3
Priority Number:
1~200
(default = Trunk Group
1, with priority in
ascending order)
3
3
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
14-06-01
14-07-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Group Routing – Priority
Order Number
Trunk Access Map Setup
Used to set the priority order
number 1~4.
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This
sets the access options for trunks.
Ring Group programming overrides
Access Map programming.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
0 = Not Specify 1~100 :
(Trunk Group Number)
1001~1100 : (1000 +
Route Table Number)
Default:
Route 1, Order
Number 1 = 1 (Trunk
Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4
= 0 (Not Specified)
All Other Routes
(2~100) and Order
Numbers (1~4) = 0
(Not Specified)
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold)
2
3
3
3
2 - 233
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
15-02-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Language
Selection
Use to define the display language
for Multiline terminals.
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.)
15-02-08
15-03-03
Assigned Data
2
0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
(default = 1)
3
3
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to set whether
pressing a key accesses a
One-Touch Key (1) or if it preselects
the key (0).
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic Handsfree)
(default = 1)
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mai or Conference
portsl, always enter 1 (e.g., receive
DTMF tones).
0 = Normal
1 = Special
(default = 0)
3
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunks 1~200
(default = 1)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
To simplify placing calls, assign
function keys for placingt trunk
calls: Line keys (code 01 + trunk),
Trunk Group keys (code 02 +
group), Call Appearance (CAP)
keys (code 08 + Bin No.
Trunks 1~200
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Preselection Time
Set the preselection time When a
multiline terminal user preselects a
line key, the system remembers the
preselection for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Disconnect
Supervision
Use this option to Enable (1) or
Disable (0) disconnect supervision
for the system trunks.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-02-06
2 - 234
3
3
3
3
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-12
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to use the Trunk
Port Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off (0) or On (1) outgoing
trunk calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to use Continued
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal
sending while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable or Disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Supervise Dial Detection
Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Restriction Digit in
Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be
disconnected.
Digits 0~9
(default = 4)
21-02-01
Trunk Group Routing for
Extensions
Assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
21-15-01
Individual Trunk Group Routing
for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed
when a user dials the Alternate
Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to
Trunk Group Routing to set up
outbound routing.
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
System Options for Transfer –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release
Warning Tone
Timer starts when a trunk begins
talking with another trunk (for
example: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer,
outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking). When this time expires, a
warning tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
System Options for Transfer –
Disconnect Trunk to Trunk Timer
Timer starts after the Warning Tone
is heard (24-02-07). When time
expires, the trunk is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
20-08-02
20-13-13
21-01-17
24-02-07
24-02-10
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 235
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
82-08-01
Sidetone Volume Setup
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Use this program to adjust the
multiline terminal side tone volume.
There are two levels, based on
whether the connected trunk is a
digital trunk or analog trunk.
0-9
Digital Sidetone Level
0 = -54 (db)
1 = -48 (db)
2 = -42 (db)
3 = -36 (db)
4 = -30 (db)
5 = -24 (db)
6 = -18 (db)
7 = -12 (db)
8 = -12 (db)
9 = -12 (db)
Analog Sidetone Level
0 = -54 (db)
1 = -54 (db)
2 = -54 (db)
3 = -48 (db)
4 = -42 (db)
5 = -36 (db)
6 = -30 (db)
7 = -24 (db)
8 = -18 (db)
9 = -12 (db)
2
3
3
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial 704.
3.
Dial trunk group number (001~100).
4.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the trunk group key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751:
2.
Dial the number.
02 + group).
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial 0.
If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.
2 - 236
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 1.0
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Trunk Group Routing key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 02
plus trunk group).
2.
Dial the number.
To place a call over a specific trunk:
1.
Dial #0.
2.
Dial the line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press line key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752:
2.
Dial the number.
01 001 to 200).
To busy out a trunk from outbound usage:
1.
Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~200) + 1.
The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it. All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an
outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any user programmed with the trunk access.
To Remove a Trunk from a Busied Out State:
1.
Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~200) + 0.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 237
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 238
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Class of Service
Description
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The
system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a
different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of
dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension
Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 677). There
are 15 available Classes of Service.
Conditions
Before assigning a new COS, make sure the new COS matches the old COS or you may
enable options, which the extension should not have or remove options, which it should
have.
An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Service mode. At default, the
Mode names are assigned as follows:
Mode 1 = No setting
Mode 2 = Night
Mode 3 = Midnight
Mode 4 = Rest
Mode 5 = Day2
Mode 6 = Night2
Mode 7 = Midnight2
Mode 8 = Rest2
Default Setting
The attendant (extension 101) has Class of Service 15 in all Night Service modes. All other
extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:
An extension can use Service Code 677 to change another extension Class of Service
(Program 20-13-28 = 1).
An extension can automatically block another extension attempt to change their Class
of Service via Service Code 677 (Program 20-13-28 = 0).
The default Service Code for this option is 677 (Program 11-11-24 = 677).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 239
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Night Service
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-11-24
20-06-01
2 - 240
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Change
Station Class of Service
If required, use this option to
change the Service Code a user
dials to change an extension Class
of Service.
MLT
(default = 677)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-01
20-07-02
20-07-03
20-07-04
20-07-05
20-07-10
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
for manually Switching the Night
Mode (Service Code 718). This
option must be enabled for an
extension to be able to display the
Night indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Changing the Music on Hold
Tone
Turns Off or On extension user
ability to change the Music on Hold
tone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turns Off or On extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Storing
Speed Dialing Entries
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to store System or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic Trunk-toTrunk Transfer
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the ability for
an extension to program the
Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
This allows the extension to
disconnect an Unsupervised
Conference in progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to use the Trunk
Port Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to record, erase and listen to
VRS messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 241
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-21
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
2 - 242
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turns an extension Off (0) or On (1)
to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to
listen to the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an
extension for dialing Service Code
612 and record, listen to, or erase
the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Determine if the Accumulated
Extension Data is included in the
SMDR printout for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Determine if the Department Group
STG) Data is included in the SMDR
printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Determine if the Accumulated
Account Code Data is included in
the SMDR printout for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Register/
Delete DECT
Turns Off or On extension user
ability to register or unregister an
Wireless DECT (SIP) handset using
the service codes defined in
Program 11-10-30 and Program 1110-31.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-05
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel dial-in
mode switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel do not
call administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turns Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off (0) or On (1) outgoing
trunk calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an
extension ability to make outbound
calls using system speed dial
numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to make outbound calls using
group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Dial
Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Turns Off or On extension user
ability to use Dial Number Preview.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turns Off or On Ringdown
Extension for extensions with this
COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension
allowing it to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 243
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-19
20-08-20
20-08-21
2 - 244
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enabling this
option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice announce
mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicators are to be allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Use to Enable or Disable Call
Address Information for each Class
of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turns Off (0) or On (1) a user Class
of Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed. If
block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 1831 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the user
dialed digits (this requires Program
14-02-10 to be enabled). If block is
disabled, the system outdials the
call just as it was dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E000 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 000.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming for outgoing
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hotline
for SPK
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to activate hotline or
ringdown when pressing the
Speaker key.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hot
Key Pad
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to make a call by just
dialing the number without first
going off hook.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Automatic Trunk Seizing by
Pressing Speaker Key
Used to Enable or Disable the
ability to access trunks when going
off hook by pressing the speaker
key for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-22
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Used to Enable or Disable the
ability to make voice over to a busy
virtual extension for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a line or Call Appearance
(CAP) Keys available for the
second call and a previous call
is ringing the extension but
has not been answered, the
second caller hears busy
regardless of this program
setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether an extension
displays the Caller Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is displayed
to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to enable Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for their
incoming Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminals LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turns Off or On and extension user
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 245
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-10-10
20-11-01
2 - 246
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension Pickup
Group as well as ring group calls
(Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Meet-Me Conference and
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to answer an incoming call on
a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Pickup to Pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Answer
Preset
Used to Enable or Disable Answer
Preset for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service,
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forward Immediate.
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
20-11-13
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) an extension
user ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) an extensions
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to use Transfer Without Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turns Off or On an extension
incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to pick up a call on Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an
extension ability to use Automatic
On-Hook Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
In an extensions Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) setting up
Call Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to have a call which recalls from
hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 247
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
2 - 248
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Trunk-toTrunk Transfer Restriction. If
enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is
not possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 616 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns On (1) or Off (0) a multiline
terminal user ability to transfer a call
to a predefined destination (such as
an operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension in a Department
Group to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0) or Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension
users’s ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically when
they hang up.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restrict
Unsupervised Conference
Allow or deny an extension user to
initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Tandem Trunking).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability to
set and cancel Call Forwarding for a
CAR or Virtual Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-11-27
20-12-02
20-12-03
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-05
20-13-06
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension.
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
2
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Turns On or off an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Park
Automatically Search
Use this option to Turns On (1) or
Off (0) using the Call Park
Automatically Search option.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) –
Advice of Charge
ISDN-AOC
This option Turns Off (0) or On (1) a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or
Automatic Route Selection.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) – Cost
Display (TTU)
ISDN billing information
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Warning
Tone for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns On or Off the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive Off-Hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 249
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
2 - 250
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enables the extension Barge-In
Mode to be Speech mode (0) or
Monitor mode (1) (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to be monitored by other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to use Continued
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal
sending while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to barge-in on other's
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) Barge-In at
the receiving extension (i.e., BargeIn receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to program General
function keys using Service Code
751 (by default). (Refer to Program
20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to use Selectable
Display Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to program its name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns Off or On the ability to display
the detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turns Off or On a user ability to
press a line key to barge into an
outside call. The Barge-In feature
must be enabled if this option is
used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, you can call a busy
extension which is talking on a
virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set
to off for this option to work.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turns Off or On the ability of an
extension COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to display paging
information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 251
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
2 - 252
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
For extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) an extension
from turning Background Music on
and off.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Use to define the supplementary
feature availability for each
extension Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) the extension
ability to have multiple users BargeIn to their conversation.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through Program
11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns On (1) or
Off (0) extension ability to block
callers from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) a Call Timer
for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
which has this option enabled also
hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Voice
Mail Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
20-14-01
20-14-02
20-14-03
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turns Off or On an extensions
ability to use the Station Relocation
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turns Off or On an extensions
ability to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines if
the monitored parties receives the
barge in alert tone when Coaching
Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
in an idle state.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number will
be displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
in an idle state.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station will
light when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes will show which
queue the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are listed (On) or
unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – First Digit
Absorption (Delete First Digit
Dialed)
For Tie Lines, Enable or Disable the
ability to absorb (ignore) the first
incoming digit. Use this to make the
tie trunk compatible with 3- and 4digit Tie Line service. This option
does not apply to DISA.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Routing/ARS Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or
Automatic Route Selection.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
access trunk groups for outside
calls (Service Code 704).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 253
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-14-04
20-14-05
20-14-06
20-14-07
20-14-08
20-14-09
20-14-10
20-14-11
20-14-12
2 - 254
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Outgoing System
Speed Dialing
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
use System Speed Dialing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Operator Calling
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
dial 0 for the telephone system
operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Internal Paging
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
use the telephone system Internal
Paging.
0 =Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – External Paging
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
use the telephone system External
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Direct Trunk Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
use Direct Trunk Access (Service
Code 715).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Forced Trunk
Disconnect <Not for ISDN
T-point>
This option Enables or Disables a
tie trunk caller’s ability to use
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service
Code 26). This option is not
available to DISA callers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Call Forward Setting
by Remote via DISA
Enable or Disable a DISA callers
ability to use the Call Forward
service codes (Program 11-11-01
through Program 11-11-05).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
In an extension Class of Service,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the BargeIn feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Retrieve Park Hold
Turns Off or On the ability for a
DISA caller to retrieve parked or
held calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1
for COS 1~15)
3
3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To change an extension Class of Service (via Service Code 677):
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 677.
3.
Dial the extension number you want to change.
You see: MODE1:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.
4.
Enter the Day 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE2:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
5.
Enter the Night 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE3:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
6.
Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE4:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
7.
Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE5:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
8.
Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE6:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
9.
Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE7:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
10.
Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: MODE8:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
11.
Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.
You see: Enter Station#
12.
Go to step 3 and enter another extension number.
- OR -
Press Speaker to hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 255
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 256
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Clock/Calendar Display
Description
The system uses Clock/Calendar Display for:
Central Office Calls (Access Maps)
Station Message Detail Recording
Class of Service (Class)
System Reports
Direct Inward Lines
Toll Restriction (Class)
Display Telephones
Trunk Group Routing
Night Service (Automatic)
Voice Mail
Programmable Trunk Parameters
Voice Response System
Ring Groups
Using the Daylight Savings Setup program, you can determine whether the system should automatically
adjust the system time for daylight savings time/standard time changes.
Clock Adjustment
The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis. This feature
allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time.
Conditions
The system retains the Clock/Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset.
Changing the time may change the current Class of Service (COS) service depending on the
COS mode setup.
You can program the system to automatically switch modes.
Single line telephones cannot set the time and date.
Changing the system time automatically changes the VM8000 InMail time.
Default Setting
Enabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 257
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with a display
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Class of Service
Night Service
Single Line Telephones
VM8000 InMail
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
2 - 258
Clock/Calendar Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
10-01-01
Time and Date – Year
Enter two digits (00~99) for the
year.
00~99
(default not assigned)
3
10-01-02
Time and Date – Month
Enter two digits (01~12) for the
month.
01~12
(default not assigned)
3
10-01-03
Time and Date – Day
Enter two digits (01~31) for the day.
01~31
(default not assigned)
3
10-01-04
Time and Date – Week
Enter the digit (1 = Sunday, 7 =
Saturday) to indicate the day of the
week.
1 = Sunday, 7 =
Saturday
(default not assigned)
3
10-01-05
Time and Date – Hour
Enter two digits (00~23) for the
hour.
00~23
(default not assigned)
3
10-01-06
Time and Date – Minute
Enter two digits (00~59) for the
minutes.
00~59
(default not assigned)
3
10-01-07
Time and Date – Second
Enter two digits (00~59) for the
seconds.
00~59
(default not assigned)
3
10-24-01
Daylight Savings Setup –
Daylight Savings Mode
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the system
ability to adjust the time for daylight
savings/standard time.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
3
10-24-02
Daylight Savings Setup – Time
for Daylight Savings
Enter the time of day the system
should adjust for daylight savings
time (0000~2359).
00:00~23:59
(default = 02:00)
3
10-24-03
Daylight Savings Setup – Start of
Month (Summer Time)
Enter the month of system should
adjust the time for daylight savings
time (01~12).
01~12
1 = Jan
2 = Feb, etc.
(default = 10)
3
Daylight Savings Setup – Start of
Week
Enter the week of the month the
system should adjust the time for
daylight savings time.
0~5
0 = Last Week of
Month
(default = 1)
3
10-24-05
Daylight Savings Setup – Start of
Week Day
Enter the day of the week the
system should adjust the time for
daylight savings time.
1~7
(1 = Sun, 2 =Mon, etc.)
(default = 1)
3
10-24-06
Daylight Savings Setup – End of
Month
Enter the month of system should
adjust the time for standard time.
01~12
(default =4)
3
10-24-07
Daylight Savings Setup – End of
Week
Enter the week of the month the
system should adjust the time for
standard time.
0~5
0 = Last Week of the
Month
(default = 1)
3
Daylight Savings Setup – End of
Week Day
Enter the day of the week the
system should adjust the time for
daylight savings time.
1~7
(1 = Sun, 2 =Mon, etc.)
(default = 1)
3
10-24-04
10-24-08
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 259
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-02-07
20-06-01
20-07-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Time and Date
Display Mode
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Select the display mode (type 1~8)
for Time and Date (i.e., time and
date format).
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to set the Time via Service Code
728.
2
1~8
Type 1 = (12 hour) 10
MAR TUE 3:15PM
Type 2 = (12 hour)
3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10
TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour)
3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10
MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6 = (24 hour)
15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10
TUE 15:15
Type 8 = (24 hour)
15:15 TUE 10 MAR
(default = 4)
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Operation
The date must be set in system programming (10-01).
To set the system Time:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 728.
3.
Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).
4.
Dial two digits for the minutes (00~59).
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 260
Clock/Calendar Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
CO Message Waiting Indication
Description
This feature provides a Message Waiting indication when Voice Mail from the Central Office is used. The
CO provides this feature using Visual Message Waiting Indication (VMWI) standards. Visual Message
Waiting Indication alerts a user that a message is present in their voice mail box. When VMWI is provided,
the UNIVERGE SV8100 provides a flashing LED on a line key assigned with the trunk appearance.
The VMWI standard supported by the UNIVERGE SV8100 includes:
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the MDMF protocol
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the SDMF protocol
Conditions
When a new message is stored in the CO Voice Mail system, the LED flashes green (0.5 sec
ON, 0.5 sec OFF) on the Direct Trunk Appearance line key at stations assigned for this
feature.
When the Direct Trunk Appearance line key is used by other ports during green blink (flutter),
the line key becomes in use and LED is turned on red.
When the station is using a DTL-8LD telephone, <> flashes on the LCD of a Direct Trunk
appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO voice mail system.
A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system.
When power outage or some other reason causes the Central Office – Message Waiting
Indication (CO-MWI) to be out of synchronization with the system, an Attendant Position can
clear the CO-MWI per CO line.
The CO-MWI Callback Speed Dial number uses System Speed Dial Area.
This feature is supported at Multiline Terminals and DSS Consoles assigned with a direct line
key appearance of the CO/PBX line key supporting this feature and with proper Class of
Service assignment.
When additional digits (e.g., for password) are included in the CO Message Waiting
Indication System Speed Dial buffer, they must be separated by pauses to allow connection
to the CO Voice Mail system.
A Single Line Telephone or Wireless DECT (SIP) Handset cannot indicate the CO-MWI.
The Message Display Board does not support the CO-MWI.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 261
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
CD-4COTC Blade with PZ-4COTG Daughter Board
Related Features
Battery Backup – System Power
Message Waiting
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
VM8000 InMail
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 262
CO Message Waiting Indication
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
15-17-01
CO Message Waiting Indication –
LED Flash Assignment
Use to set the message waiting
LED Flash assignment on each CO
line.
0 = LED Off
1 = LED On
(default = 0)
20-02-08
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – LCD Display
Holding Time
This time determines how long a
user's display shows Caller ID for a
second incoming call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-07-23
21-22-01
21-22-02
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
CO Message Waiting Indication –
Call Back Settings – CO MWI Call
Back Enabling
Enable or Disable CO MWI Call
Back.
0 = Disable VMWI
Service
1 = Enable VMWI
Service
(default = 0)
3
CO Message Waiting Indication –
Call Back Settings – CO-MWI
Call Back Number Area Setting
Define the Speed Dial Bin number
for MWI Call Back.
0000~1999
1999
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 263
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To program the CO Message Waiting Callback Speed Dial Bin from an Attendant Position:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 28.
3.
Press the CO line.
4.
Dial Speed Dial bin (default = 1999).
The valid range is 0000~1999 and depends on system programming.
5.
Press Feature.
To program the Central Office – Message Waiting Indication callback number from an Attendant
Position:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 29.
3.
Press the CO line.
4.
Dial the Central Office – Message Waiting Indication callback number.
The Exit key is used to clear all digits.
5.
Press Feature.
This operation updates data in Program 13-04-01, a user can also edit the dial digits in Program 13-04-01 from
handset-programming or PCPro/WebPro.
To retrieve a Central Office – Message Waiting Indication:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 27.
3.
Press the CO line key.
The LCD indicates ‘ERROR’ if the CO Line is not flashing for a CO Message Waiting.
4.
Listen to the message.
The operation for deletion is based on the remote voice mail system.
5.
Hang up.
To clear the Central Office – Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 20.
3.
Press the CO line key.
2 - 264
CO Message Waiting Indication
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Code Restriction
Description
Code Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only
certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Code Restriction
according to the Code Restriction Class. The system allows for up to 15 Code Restriction Classes and
416 extensions.
Conditions
If a Code Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the
system does not restrict the call.
Code Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance
automated services like ACD and automated Technical Service.
Code Restriction is applied when accessing ARS.
If Program 21-01-10 is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call cannot have a talk path
unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an out
going call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when
dialing 000. Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path, preventing
the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at its default
setting of 0 to prevent any problem with dialing 000.
Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Code Restriction
Classes to dial. To let all users dial 000, for example, put 000 in the Common Permit Code
Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict
Code Tables. The system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is four
digits maximum, using 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild card).
Common Restrict Code Table
The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Code
Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (1223), for
example, put 1223 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you do not allow the codes
you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. The
system provides 1 table, with 10 entries. Each code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #,
and Recall (as a wild card).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 265
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Restrict Code Table
When you want Code Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the
Restrict Code Table. To block only 1800 calls, for example, enter 1800 in the Restrict Code
Table. (If the same Code Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the
system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both
tables are not restricted.) The system provides four tables, with 60 entries (restricted codes)
in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild
card).
Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Code Restriction so that users can dial only selected
(permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To allow
all users to dial only area code 03-9, for example, enter 039 in the Permit Code Table. 1 +
203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Code Restriction Class
has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the
Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) The system provides
four tables, with 200 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A permitted code is 12 digits
maximum, using 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild card).
International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial.
You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to
allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict
Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. The
system provides 10 International Call Restrict tables with up to four digits in each table entry
and 20 International Call Allow tables, with up to six digits in each table entry. Valid entries
are 0~9, #, and Recall (as a wild card).
Code Restriction for Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing can bypass or follow Code Restriction. If you allow many users to program
Speed Dialing, consider code restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can
program Speed Dialing, Code Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately restrict
Group and Common Speed Dialing.
Toll Digit Counting
Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this
option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the
Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to eight. The system provides four tables in which
you can make entries for this option. The range is 4~30 digits.
Code Call Digit Counting
With Code Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can
dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up services.
You can make four entries (4~30 digits).
Toll Free Trunks
Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president’s Private Line.
Users can place calls on Code Free Trunks anytime – to anywhere, without inadvertently
being Code restricted.
2 - 266
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
PBX Call Restriction
Code Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX
access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks
programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility on page 2-825 feature
for the specifics.
Additional Default Entries For Common Permit Code Table
Additional entries have been added to the default Common Permit Code Table. The default
setting is as follows:
Table 1: 000
Table 4: 1822
Table 7: 1855
Table 2: 1800
Table 5: 1833
Table 8: 1866
Table 3: 1888
Table 6: 1844
Table 9: 1877
Tie Line Code Restriction Enhanced
In Program 34-01-05: E&M Tie Line Basic Setup – System Code Restriction, if this option is
set to 0, the system follows the setting in Program 21-05-13: Code Restriction Class –
Restriction of Tie Line Calls to determine whether or not the Code restriction setting in
Program 34-08 is to be followed. If this option is set to 1, the system follows the system Code
restriction settings defined in Program 21-05-01 through Program 21-05-13.
A user can temporarily override a extension Code Restrictions.
The system allows or denies outgoing access to trunks depending on Code Restriction.
If the system detects the call is answered by detecting reversal in an analog trunk this
restores both – way voice paths immediately.
When using DISA or Tie Lines, additional programming is required for Code Restriction
(DISA, refer to Program 25-10; Tie Lines, refer to Program 34-04).
A user can temporarily block their extension Code Restriction access, preventing unwanted
calls from being placed on their telephone while they are away from their desk.
Each phone and trunk have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.
For example:
When trunk class is 01 and station class 02, Toll Restriction Class 02 is applied.
When trunk class is 15 and station class 03, Toll Restriction Class 15 is applied.
Default Setting
Disabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 267
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
PBX Compatibility
Multiple Trunk Types
2 - 268
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-01-08
15-02-30
20-06-01
20-08-02
20-13-20
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Toll
Restriction
For each trunk, enter 1 to enable
Toll Restriction; enter 0 to disable
Code Restriction.
0 = Restriction
Disabled (No)
1 = Restriction Enabled
(Yes)
(default = 1)
3
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Toll Restriction Class
Select the Toll Restriction Class to
be used when placing a call from a
virtual extension.
0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual
Extension Class)
1 = Real Ext. (Real
Extension Class)
(default = 1)
3
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off (0) or On (1) outgoing
trunk calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
2 - 269
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
21-01-10
21-01-15
21-01-16
21-01-17
21-04-01
21-05-01
21-05-02
2 - 270
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Digits for Toll
Restriction Path
If this option is programmed with an
entry other than 0, a call does not
have a talk path unless the user
dials at least the number of digits
entered in this option when placing
an outgoing call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 000. Since it
is only a 3-digit number, the call
does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency
dispatcher from hearing the caller.
This option should be kept at its
default setting of 0 to prevent any
problem with dialing 000. If the
system detects the call is answered,
by detecting Reversal in analog
trunks, this restores both – way
voice paths immediately.
0~24
(default = 0)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable or Disable the Incoming
Line feature system wide. When
enabled applies code restriction
when hook flash is sent on inbound
trunk followed by dialed digits.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Supervise Dial Detection
Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Restriction Digit in
Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be
disconnected.
Digits 0~9
(default = 4)
Toll Restriction Class for
Extensions
Use to assign a Toll Restriction
class to an extension for modes
1-8.
Day/Night Mode
1~9 (9 = Power Failure
Mode)
1~15
(default = 2)
3
Toll Restriction Class –
International Call Restriction
Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Assigned (1) or Unassigned
(0) the International Call Restrict
Table (Program 21-06-01).
0 = Unassigned (No)
1 = Assigned (Yes)
default:
1, 6~15 = 0
2~5 = 1
3
Toll Restriction Class –
International Call Permit Code
Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Assign (1) or Unassign (0)
the International Call Permit Table
(Program 21-06-02).
0 = Unassigned
1 = Assigned
default:
1, 3~15 = 0
2=1
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
21-05-04
21-05-05
21-05-06
21-05-07
21-05-08
21-05-09
21-05-10
21-05-11
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Toll Restriction Class –
Maximum Number of Digits Table
Assignment
Toll Restriction Class – Common
Permit Code Table
Toll Restriction Class – Common
Restriction Table
Toll Restriction Class – Permit
Code Table
Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction Table
Select the table (defined in Program
21-06-03) to be used to determine
the maximum number of digits
allowed for outgoing calls.
1~4 =Table
0 =Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3
3
It chooses whether the table set up
by Program 21-06-04 is referred to,
or not referred to.
0 = Unassigned
1 = Assigned
Default:
1, 8~15 = 0
2~7 = 1
3
It chooses whether the table set up
by Program 21-06-05 is referred to,
or not referred to.
0 = Unassigned
1 = Assigned
Default:
1, 6~15 = 0
2~5 = 1
3
Set the tables 1~4 when referring to
the table set up by Program 21-0606.
1~4 =Table
0 = Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3
3
1~4 =Table
0 = Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3
3
Set the tables 1~4 when referring to
the table set up by Program 21-0607.
2
Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction for Common Speed
Dials
For the Code Restriction Class you
select, Enable (1) or Disable (0)
Code Restriction for Common
Speed Dialing numbers.
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following
Restriction Check
(default =0)
3
Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction for Group Speed
Dials
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Enable (1) or Disable (0)
Code Restriction for Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following
Restriction Check
(default =0)
3
Toll Restriction Class – Intercom
Call Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Enable (1) or Disable (0)
Intercom Call Restriction. If
enabled, extensions cannot place
or receive Intercom calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 271
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
21-05-12
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Enable (1) or Disable (0)
PBX Call Restriction.
1~4 =Table
0 = Disable (None)
Default:
1~6, 8~15 = 0
7=1
3
Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction of Tie Line Calls
Select whether or not the Toll
Restriction set up in Program
34-08-01 is Enabled (1) or Disabled
(0).
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
3
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– International Call Restriction
Table
Enter the international dialing codes
you want to restrict.
Dial (Up to four digits)
default:
Tables 1~10 = No
Setting
3
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– International Call Permit Code
Table
Enter the international dialing codes
you want to permit.
Dial (Up to six digits)
Default:
Tables 1~20 = No
Setting
3
21-06-03
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment
Select the maximum number of
digits allowed in outgoing calls for
each table (4~30).
4-30
default:
Tables 1~ 4 = 30
3
21-06-04
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Common Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Common
Permit Code Table.
Dial (Up to four digits)
default:
Table 1 = 000
Table 2~10 = Not
Assigned
3
21-05-13
21-06-01
21-06-02
21-06-05
Toll Restriction Class – PBX Call
Restriction
2
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Common Restriction Table
Program codes into the Common
Restrict Code Table.
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
default:
All Tables = Not
Assigned
3
21-06-06
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Permit
Code Tables.
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
default:
Table 1~4 = No Setting
3
21-06-07
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Deny Restriction Table
Program codes into the Restrict
Code Tables (200 codes per table
maximum).
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
default:
Table 1~4 = No Setting
3
21-06-08
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– PBX Access Code
The system allows up to four tables
for PBX access codes. PBX
Access Codes can have up to two
digits, using 0~9, #, and LINE
KEY 1 (don’t care). Refer to the
PBX Compatibility feature for the
specifics.
Dial (Up to two digits)
default:
Table 1~4 = No Setting
3
21-21-01
Toll Restriction for Trunks
(Seized Trunk Basis Setting) –
Restriction Class
Enter the Toll Restriction Class for
the selected trunk.
1~15
(default = 1)
3
34-01-05
E&M Tie Line Basic Setup –
System Toll Restriction
Determine if an incoming Tie Line
call should be subject to Toll
Restriction.
0 = No (Off)
1 = Yes (On)
(default = 0)
3
2 - 272
3
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
34-08-01
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie
Lines
Define the Toll Restriction data for
E&M Tie Lines. This data should be
defined if Tie Line Code Restriction
is enabled in Program 21-05-13.
Up to 10 digits
(0~9, , #)
(default not assigned)
2
3
3
Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Code Restricted:
1.
Place call normally.
If your Code Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call is cut off.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 273
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 274
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Code Restriction Override
Description
Code Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass the Code Restriction for an extension. This
helps a user that must place an important call that Code Restriction normally prevents. For example, you
could set up Code Restriction to block 1800 calls and then provide a Code Restriction Override code to
your attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 1800 call, they just:
Press Speaker, dial a service code, and enter their override code.
Press Speaker and dial a trunk access code (e.g., 0 or #0 002).
Place the 1800 call without restriction.
You can assign a different Code Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share
the same override code.
Code Restriction Override bypasses all Code Restriction programming. Walking Code Restriction allows
you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user. When a call is placed using Walking Code
Restriction, the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Programs 21-05-xx
and Programs 21-06-xx.
Conditions
Off-Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.
In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTA indicates that the call was placed using
Temporary Code Restriction Override.
Code Restriction Override and Walking Code Restriction temporarily overrides an extension
Code Restriction.
If the system has VRS, users hear, “Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator”
when they dial a number that Code Restriction prevents.
Default Setting
Disabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 275
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction
Station Message Detail Recording
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-34
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Temporary Toll
Restriction Override
If required, change the service code (775)
for Temporary Toll Restriction Override.
MLT, SLT
(default = 775)
3
11-11-36
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Toll
Restriction Override
If required, change the service code (663)
for Toll Restriction Override.
MLT, SLT
(default = 663)
3
20-08-06
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting Override
(Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Toll Restriction Override
Time
Set the Toll Restriction Override Time.
After dialing the Toll Restriction Override
codes, the system removes Toll
Restriction for this Time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10
seconds)
3
Toll Restriction Override
Password Setup
Assign Toll Restriction Override codes to
extensions. Each code must have four
digits, using any combination of 0~9, #
and . Each extension can have a
separate code, or many extensions can
share the same override code.
Maximum four digits
(0~9, #, )
(default not
assigned)
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction
Override User ID codes (six digits) into
tables. Up to 500 different override codes
can be entered.
Dial (Six digits)
(default not
assigned)
21-01-07
21-07-01
21-14-01
2 - 276
Walking Toll Restriction
Password Setup – User ID
3
3
3
Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
21-14-02
Walking Toll Restriction
Password Setup – Walking Toll
Restriction Class Number
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Class of
Service (1~15) to be used for each table
number assigned in Program 21-14-01.
1~15
(default = 1)
35-02-01
SMDR Output Options – Toll
Restricted Call
SMDR can include or exclude calls
blocked by Toll Restriction.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
35-02-02
SMDR Output Options – PBX
Calls
When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR
can include all calls or just calls dialed
using the PBX trunk access code.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
35-02-03
SMDR Output Options – Trunk
Number or Name
Select whether the system should display
the trunk Name (0) or the Number (1) on
SMDR reports.
If this option is set to 0, Program 3502-14 must be set to 0.
0 = Name
1 = Number
(default = 1)
35-02-04
SMDR Output Options –
Summary (Daily)
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR
report provide a daily summary (at
midnight every night).
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
35-02-05
SMDR Output Options –
Summary (Weekly)
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR
report provide a weekly summary (every
Saturday at midnight).
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
35-02-06
SMDR Output Options –
Summary (Monthly)
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR
report provide a monthly summary (at
midnight on the last day of the month).
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
35-02-07
SMDR Output Options – Toll
Charge Cost
Set this option to (1) have the SMDR
report include toll charges.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
35-02-08
SMDR Output Options – Incoming
Call
Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR
report include incoming calls. If you
disable this option (0), incoming calls do
not print.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
3
SMDR Output Options –
Extension Number or Name
Set this option (1) to have the SMDR
report include extension numbers. Set
this option (0) to have the SMDR report
include extension names.
0 = Name
1 = Number
(default = 1)
3
35-02-10
SMDR Output Options – All Lines
Busy (ALB) Output
Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB)
indication should be displayed.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)
3
35-02-12
SMDR Output Options – DID
Table Name Output
Determine if the DID table name should
be displayed.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)
3
35-02-13
SMDR Output Options – CLI
Output When DID to Trunk
Determine if the CLI output should be
displayed for DID.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)
3
35-02-14
SMDR Output Options – Date
Determine whether the date should be
displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the
trunk name is set to be displayed in
Program 35-02-03.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)
35-02-09
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
2 - 277
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
35-02-15
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
0 = CLI (CLIP)
1 = DID Calling
Number
(default = 0)
3
SMDR Output Options – Trunk
Determine how the SMDR should print
Name or Received Dialed Number incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID
trunks. If set to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can
print DNIS digits. If set to (0) trunk names
are printed instead.
0 = Trunk Port
Name
1 = Received Dialed
Number
(default = 0)
3
35-02-17
SMDR Output Options – Print
Account Code or Caller Name of
Incoming Call
Determine if SMDR should print Account
Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call.
0 = ACC
1 = CNAME
(default = 0)
3
35-02-18
SMDR Output Options – Print
Mode for Caller Name of
Incoming Call
Determine how SMDR should print Caller
Name of Incoming Call.
0 = Normal
1 = Line Feed
(default = 0)
3
35-02-16
2 - 278
SMDR Output Options – CLI/DID
Number Switching
Determine whether or not the CLI/DID
Number Switching should be displayed.
2
3
Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Walking Code Restriction
663?
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 279
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Temporary Code Restriction Override
service code 663 be
775
2 - 280
Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extension Code Restriction:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 775.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Code Restriction Override code.
If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. After dialing the service
code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit is entered, the display is
cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.
You hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
4.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
5.
Dial the number without any restriction.
To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 663 and dial the 6-digit Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service code.
After dialing the service code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit is
entered, the display is cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.
You hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
3.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
4.
Dial the number.
The call is allowed or denied based on the user’s Toll Restriction Class of Service level.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 281
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 282
Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Description
Code Restriction, Dial Block lets a user temporarily block dialing on an extension. This helps a user block
his or her phone from being used by another person while they are away from their desk. A usermust
enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable this feature.
Dial Block can also be set by the supervisor’s access code. If Dial Block is set by an extension user, the
supervisor cannot release it. If Dial Block is set by the supervisor’s code, the extension user cannot
release it.
Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an
assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a
supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Conditions
If the system is reset by a first initialize, the Dial Block feature is cleared.
This feature is not available for ISDN S-Bus extensions.
Both Program 21-09-01 (Code Restrict Class) and Program 21-10 (Dial Block Restriction
Class per Extension) can be set at the same time. However the system gives priority to the
setting in Program 21-10.
Dial Block can temporarily block an extension Code Restriction setting by changing to a
predefined table that has more restrictions.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals:
None
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 283
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Code Restriction
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-10-17
Service Code Setup (for System
Administration) – Dial Block by
Supervisor
Assign a service code used by the
supervisor to set Dial Block for
another extension.
MLT
(default = 601)
3
11-11-33
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Dial Block
Assign a service code to use for
Dial Block.
MLT, SLT
(default = 600)
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
20-08-08
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
21-09-01
Dial Block Setup – Toll
Restriction Class with Dial Block
Assign a Code Restriction COS
(1~15) when the Dial Block feature
is used.
1~15
(default = 15)
3
21-09-02
Dial Block Setup – Supervisor
Password
Assign a 4-digit password used by
the supervisor to Enable or Disable
Dial Block for other extensions.
0~9, , #
(4-digit fixed)
(default not assigned)
3
2 - 284
3
Code Restriction, Dial Block
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
21-10-01
90-19-01
Dial Block restriction Class per
Extension
Assign the Code Restriction COS
(1~15) used by an extension when
the Dial Block feature is enabled. If
this data is “0”, Code Restriction
COS follows Program 21-09-01.
0, 1~15
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
Dial Block Release
Enter the extension number to
release from the Dial Block
Restriction. This program can be
used when a password is forgotten
by the user.
[Release?]: Dial 1+
press Transfer
(Press Hold to cancel.)
2
3
3
3
Operation
To set Dial Block:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 600 (default).
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block Code (as set in programming).
4.
Dial 1.
Confirmation tone is heard.
5.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
To release Dial Block:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 600.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4.
Dial 0.
Confirmation tone is heard.
5.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 285
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To set Dial Block from another extension:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 601 (default).
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code (as set in programming).
4.
Dial the extension number to blocked.
5.
Dial 1.
Confirmation tone is heard.
6.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
To release Dial Block from another extension:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 601.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4.
Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block.
5.
Dial 0.
Confirmation tone is heard.
6.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
2 - 286
Code Restriction, Dial Block
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conference
Description
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With
Conference, a user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The
CD-CP00-AU provides 64 conference ports, to allow any number of internal or external parties to be
conferenced together for a limit of 32 parties. This means that one extension can conference up to 31
internal and/or external parties together (the originator would be the 32nd party reaching the maximum of
32). While this Conference call is active, another user can initiate a separate Conference also for a limit of
32 parties, or any number of conferences can be initiated with any number of parties (up to 32) until all 64
Conference ports are busy.
Conditions
An ADA module is required for speech recording.
Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This allows
a dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer
and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up a
service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule.
Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially
set up. If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 101 followed by extension
102, Split cycles from the trunk, to 101 and finally to 102. The Split cycle then repeats.
If a user’s extension has Barge-In enabled, they can also Barge-In on an established
Conference. This permits, for example, an attendant or supervisor to join a Conference in an
emergency. It also allows a co-worker to leave a conference – and then rejoin the telephone
meeting when it is convenient to do so.
If a user’s extension has Barge-In monitor enabled (Program 20-13-10), they can Silent Monitor a
conference already in progress (Program 99-01-49 option 49 must be set to 1).
A Class of Service option is available which allows or denies an extension user from
automatically setting up a Conference/Tandem Trunking call upon hanging up the telephone.
An extension with Barge-In can Transfer a call to an existing Conference. This allows, for
example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then Transfer them to an existing telephone
meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the same time and
sequentially add them into the Conference. Transfer Call Into Conference Code (624).
An option is available which allows an extension Conf key to be programmed for Conference
or for Transfer. When set for Transfer, the user places a call on hold, dials the extension to
which it should be transferred, and presses Conf. The call is then transferred. When set for
Conference, with an active call, the user presses Conf, places a second call, then presses
Conf twice. All the calls are then connected.
Users can Barge-In on a Conference call if allowed in programming.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 287
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Define the outgoing call options for each trunk and user.
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
DISA and Tie Line users may use the Barge-In feature on a Conference call if they know the
service code and are permitted in their DISA/Tie Line Class of Service.
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Conference and then drop out of the call,
allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation. Establish two trunk calls, press
Hold and dial #8.
You can optionally program Conf (Transfer) for Transfer. In this case, the Multiline Terminal
must have a Conference function key. The system also allows a call to be transferred into a
Conference call.
When the Conference Originator hangs up with a conference on Hold, or when trying to add
another caller, all internal calls are dropped.
Conferencing when talking on a Virtual Extension:
While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station has an internal call on Hold, a
conference call cannot be established.
While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station receives an intercom call (call to its
actual station number), a conference call cannot be established.
While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station has a call on Hold, a conference call
cannot be established.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Multiline and Single Line Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 288
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)
3
11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Waiting Answer/
Split Answer
If required, use this program to
change the code users dial to Split
while on a call.
SLT
(default = 794)
3
11-12-57
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Tandem Trunking
With two trunks in Conference
press Hold and dial #8 and the
Conference/Tandem happens.
MLT, SLT
(default = #8)
3
11-12-58
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Transfer Into
Conference
If required, change the service code
used to transfer a call into a
Conference call.
MLT, SLT
(default = 624)
3
11-16-02
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Use to customize the one-digit
Service Codes used for Barge-In.
(default not assigned)
3
14-01-04
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Gain Level for
Conference and Transfer Calls
Use to select the CODEC gain type
used by the trunk when it is part of
an unsupervised conference.
1~63(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Conference Key Mode
This option allows an extension
Conf key to be programmed for
Conference or for Transfer. When
set for Transfer (1), the user places
a call on hold, dials the extension to
which it should be transferred, the
presses the Conf key. The call is
then transferred. When set for
Conference (0), with an active call,
the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses
the Conf key twice. All the calls are
then connected.
0 = Conference
1 = Transfer
(default = 0)
15-02-24
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 289
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
15-07-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-11-21
20-13-08
20-13-10
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-14-11
2 - 290
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
2
3
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension
users’s ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically when
they hang up.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to initiate a conference or Meet Me
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
In an extension Class of Service,
enable the Barge-In Speech Mode
(0) or Monitor Mode (1) at the
initiating extension (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to barge-in on other's
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) Barge-In at
the receiving extension (i.e., BargeIn receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
In an extension Class of Service,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the BargeIn feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To establish a Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Establish intercom or trunk call.
2.
Press Conf or Conf softkey (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
3.
Dial the extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access outside call.
- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or press the Speaker key and dial 9, the Trunk Access Code
+ the trunk number (default #9). You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.
4.
When called party answers, press the Conf softkey or Conf twice.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system Conference limit.
If the call being added is busy/unanswered:
With an outside call, press the line or Call Appearance (CAP) key for a call previously added to the Conference.
The unanswered call drops and the initiator is back into the Conference call.
Adding an Intercom call to an outside Conference call: Press the Conf softkey on the Multiline Terminal display
or Conf twice to re-establish the Conference. If using a non-display telephone, press Conf twice.
With only Intercom calls in the Conference: Press Conf twice to re-establish the Conference. If the voice mail
answers, there is no way to drop that extension out. You must drop the Conference call.
5.
Repeat steps 2~4 to add more parties.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 291
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Single Line Telephone
1.
Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2.
Hookflash and dial #1.
3.
Dial extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access trunk call.
- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
4.
Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
- OR -
Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.
To Split (alternate) between the parties in Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Conf (Transfer) or Conference key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
2.
Dial Split service code (794).
Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Press the Conf softkey or
press Conf twice to set up the Conference again.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Hookflash and dial 794.
Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Hookflash twice to set up the
Conference again.
To drop an outside call from the Conference:
1.
Press Hold to place the conference call on hold.
2.
Hang up.
The lines involved in the Conference ring back separately to the telephone.
3.
Answer and disconnect the unwanted outside call.
4.
To re-establish the Conference, answer the remaining call by pressing Conf after each call is
answered. Press Conf twice when all calls have been answered.
To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Hang up.
If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear what is programmed in Program
10-04-01.
2 - 292
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Single Line Telephone
1.
Hang up.
If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.
To Barge-In to Conference Call:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).
If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a Callback to the extension.
2.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference, depending
on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the joined party. If a Conference is not possible:
the extension user hears a warning tone
the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group
- OR the Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1.
Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code, if programmed.
Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 710 can also be dialed at this point.
To Transfer a Call into a Conference:
1.
While on a call, press Hold.
2.
Dial the Transfer to Conference service code (default = 624).
If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a Callback to the extension.
The display shows the line Number, Number/Name and Extension Name/Number.
3.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a Conference call.
If an error tone is heard, Barge-In is not enabled for the extension and the call cannot go through. Retrieve the call
by pressing the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key or hang up and the call recalls the extension.
When the call is transferred into the Conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the conference,
depending on the entries in Program 20-13-17 and Program 80-01, and all display multiline terminals show the
joined party.
To cancel the transfer, press the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key to retrieve the call.
4.
Hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 293
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 294
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Description
Voice Call Conference lets extension users in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate a
Voice Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Meet-Me Conference key and tells their
co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press
the trunk line key to join the call. Line keys assigned for the trunk blink indicating that privacy has been
released, and others can join the current call.
Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person
initiating the Voice Call Conference just announces it verbally. A tone, indicating others have joined the
conference, can be provided.
The CD-CP00-AU provides 64 Conference circuits, to allow internal or external parties to be conferenced
together up to a limit of 32.
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the nonprivate mode to the private mode. If the outside call is on a line key, the user just presses the line key to
switch from non-private mode to private mode. For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option, trunks
initially have the privacy released. The remainder of the call is private. If the call is on a Call Appearance
(CAP) Key, the user presses their Meet-Me Conference function key instead. Unlike pressing the line
key, pressing the Meet-Me Conference key toggles back and forth between private and non-private mode
for the call.
Conditions
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys and Virtual Extensions do not support Voice Call Conference
Programmable Function keys.
Voice Call Conference requires a Meet-Me Conference function key and trunk line keys.
This feature is not available on single line telephones.
With Caller ID enabled, a call with Privacy Release shows the Caller ID until the call is
answered. It can be viewed again by pressing the line key, though this sets the call to
Private mode. To keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
Default Setting
Disabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 295
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Caller ID
Conference
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-01-19
15-07-01
2 - 296
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
Determine if a trunk should be able
to be toggled to a private/
non-private line (0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled). This option is not
required for Voice Call Conference.
0 = Disable Private
Line (Normal)
1 = Enable Private Line
(Private Line)
(default = 0)
3
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
2
3
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-13-09
20-13-17
31-01-04
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to initiate a Voice Call Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Internal/
External Paging – Privacy
Release Time
Set the interval users have to join a
Voice Call Conference after it is
announced. (Note that this interval
is also used for Meet Me
Conference.)
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
2
3
3
3
Operation
To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited):
1.
After Conference request, press indicated line key.
A Conf indication is displayed on both telephones.
A trunk with privacy release or Voice Call Conference blinks.
To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:
1.
Press Speaker to hang up.
To toggle between Private and Non-Private mode:
1.
Press the Meet-Me Conference key (Program 15-07-01, SC 751: 32).
- OR -
Press the Trunk Line Key. (This toggles from Non-Private to Private. To go back to
Non-Private, the Meet-Me Conference Key above must be pressed.)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 297
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 298
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Continued Dialing
Description
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer, and then dial
additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other
Common Carriers (OCCs).
Two types of Continued Dialing are available:
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on an extension Class of Service, a multiline terminal user may dial additional digits after their
Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension users
dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension users cannot
access these Voice Mail options.
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside Automated
Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the
user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system Toll
Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Programming below for additional
information.
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.
Conditions
The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.
Continued Dialing for intercom calls only applies to calls made to analog devices.
With Pulse to Tone Conversion, users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks –
and then dial DTMF digits after the service answers.
Default Setting
Enabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 299
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-03-03
20-06-01
2 - 300
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Terminal Type
Class of Service for Extensions
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mail and
Conference ports, always enter 1
(e.g., receive DTMF tones).
0 = Normal
1 = Special
(default = 0)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
3
3
Continued Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-13
21-04-01
21-05-04
21-06-03
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to use Continued
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal
sending while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Toll Restriction Class for
Extensions
Assign a Toll Restriction Class
(1~15) to an extension.
Day/Night Mode
1~9 (9 = Power Failure
Mode)
1~15
(default = 2)
3
Select the table (defined in Program
21-06-03) to be used to determine
the maximum number of digits
allowed for outgoing calls.
1~4 =Table
0 =Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3
3
Set the Maximum Number of digits
dialed for each table.
4-30
default:
Tables 1~4 = 30
3
Toll Restriction Class –
Maximum Number of Digits Table
Assignment
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment
2
3
Operation
To use Continued Dialing:
1.
Place an intercom or trunk call.
2.
Continue dialing after the call connects.
Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 301
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 302
Continued Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
Description
The Cordless DECT Terminals may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 KTS. The DTL-8R-1 TEL uses
1.9 GHz DECT 6.0 FM Technology and is connected in tandem to a multiline terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Cordless DECT Terminals
(DTL-8R-1( ))
Feature
Digital Technology
1.9 GHz 6.0
LCD
2-line, 24-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm
Yes
Dedicated Keys
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, SPEAKER, REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range
Message Waiting Indication
Headset Connection
Channels
8
50~150 feet (expandable with repeaters)
Yes (Icon)
Yes
5 channels by 12 time slots
Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices and, therefore, some interference
may take place when operating in the same environment as other wireless devices which operate within the
same frequency spectrum.
Conditions
The Cordless DECT Terminals can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE SV8100, and
DTL Digital Multiline Telephones.
Battery Capacity is 910 mAh, 2.4V with a Talk Mode of 16 hours (typical) and a Standby
Mode of seven days (typical).
The battery can be hot swapped while on a call. The battery must be replaced with another
charged battery pack within 20 seconds, otherwise the connection is lost.
The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition.
When a message is received, the message icon is displayed.
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.
A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 303
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
A spare battery is available as an Optional Available Part. A second battery is not shipped
with the product.
The battery can be charged when it is installed in the handset or in the base charging unit
and the handset is in the charger. A stand-alone battery charger is not available.
Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings are known to reduce
telephone performance.
When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office, they must operate on different
channels and be at least 20 feet apart (including the base unit and the telephones).
Dterm cordless phones are not supported with the Door Box feature.
Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call is transferred
when the Cordless Terminal is placed in idle.
Dterm Cordless telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature.
Default Setting
None
System Availability (US Only)
Terminals
DTL-8R-1( ) TEL
Required Component(s)
CD-8DLCA Blade with PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
-ORCD-16DLCA
2 - 304
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
Cordless Telephone Connection
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type
(B1).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline
Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth
Cordless Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone
Ringer)
8 = PGD
(Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
2
3
3
2 - 305
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
10-03-02
10-03-04
10-03-05
10-03-06
2 - 306
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional installed
Unit 1.
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional installed
Unit 2.
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type.
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline
Terminal (1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Paging)
(1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for Tone
Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for Door
Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for ACI)
(1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU
Module
(default = 0)
3
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU
Module
(default = 0)
3
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (ACI)
12 = APR (B2
Mode)
(default = 0)
3
3
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-07
10-03-08
10-03-09
10-03-10
10-03-11
20-07-01
20-07-03
20-07-05
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
2
0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Ext.
Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Paging/Tone
Ringer = 1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for Door Box
= 1~8) (ACI) =
(1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Multiline Telephone Type
Read only program that shows the type
of multiline terminal connected to the
port.
0 = DT3
1 = Dterm8
2 = Dterm7
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Side Option Information
Read only command that shows the
type of side module connected to the
terminal.
0 = No Option
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Bottom Option Information (Only
applies to DTL style telephones)
Shows optional adapter information.
0 = No option
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Handset Option Information
Shows optional adapter information.
0 = No option
1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth
Cordless Handset
(default = 0)
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension for
manually Switching the Night Mode
(Service Code 718). This option must be
enabled for an extension to be able to
display the Night indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
set the Time via Service Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of an
extension to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 307
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
2 - 308
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension to
use Forced Trunk Disconnect. This
allows the extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the extension
ability to use the Trunk Port Disable
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to record, erase and listen to VRS
messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turns an extension Off (0) or On (1) to
dial 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to
the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension for
dialing Service Code 612 and record,
listen to, or erase the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Use to define if Accumulated Extension
Data is included in the SMDR Printout
for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Use to define if Department Group
(STG) Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Use to define if Accumulated Account
Code Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
set or cancel Private Call Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
set or cancel Caller ID Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
set or cancel dial-in mode switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
set or cancel do not call administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turns Off or On Intercom calling for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off (0) or On (1) outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to make outbound calls using
system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to make outbound calls using
group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting Override
(Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension to
use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 309
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-08-09
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
2 - 310
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turns Off or On Ringdown Extension for
extensions with this COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension allowing it
to force Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring mode
for ICM calls, enabling this option
prevents callers from changing the call
to voice announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
use Department Group Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicators are to be allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Used to Enable or Disable Call Address
Information for each Class Of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turns Off (0) or On (1) a user Class of
Service from automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID information when a
call is placed. If block is enabled, the
system automatically inserts the Caller
ID block code 1831 (defined in Program
14-01-21) before the user dialed digits
(this requires Program 14-02-10 to be
enabled). If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was dialed by
the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E000 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
display the name and number of the
extension that dialed 000.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
override the trunk access map
programming for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Enable or Disable an extensions ability
to voice over to a busy virtual extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
20-10-01
20-10-02
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
2
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the extension
ability to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be busy
for a second DNIS caller to ring
through. If the destination
extension does not have a trunk or
CAP key available for the second
call and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet been
answered, the second caller hears
busy regardless of this program
setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether an extension displays
the Caller Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the CHECK
LIST message is displayed to indicate a
missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
enable Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for their
incoming Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the Incoming
Call Time is displayed on the multiline
terminal LCD while the telephone is
ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turns Off or On and extension ability to
display calling party information on
CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
calls ringing an extension Pickup Group
as well as ring group calls (Service
Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
calls ringing outside a group (Service
Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 311
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
2 - 312
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for a
specific group using service code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
pick up a call ringing into a Pickup
Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call Pickup for
calls ringing an extension Pickup Group
(Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension to
use Meet-Me Conference and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension to
use Universal Auto Answer (no service
code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to answer an incoming call on a
Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary Incoming
Extension (SIE)/ Virtual Extension
simply by lifting the handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turns Off or On an extensions ability to
us Call Pickup to Pick up Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) the ability of an
extension user to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) the ability of an
extension user to set Call Forwarding
when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) the ability of an
extension user to set Call Forwarding
when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) the ability of an
extension user to set Call Forwarding
with Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) an extensions ability to
set Call Forward with Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
use Transfer Without Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turns Off or On an extension incoming
Transfer pre-answer display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turns Off or On the ability of an
extension user to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to pick up a call on Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to use Automatic On-Hook
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
In an extensions Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) setting up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
have a call which recalls from hold
transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Trunk-toTrunk Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to dial Service Code 4 7 to record,
listen to or erase the Personal Greeting
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 313
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-13-01
2 - 314
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns On (1) or Off (0) a multiline
terminal user ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of an
extension user in a Department Group
to use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0) or Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension Class
of Service should allow normal or
extended Park (0 = Normal for Program
24-01-06, 1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/conference
call automatically when they hang up.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restrict
Unsupervised Conference
Allow or Deny an extension user ability
to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Tandem Trunking).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) the user ability to set
and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR or
Virtual Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put
on hold by an extension.
0 = Non Exclusive
Hold (Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turns On or off an extensions user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for single line
telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns On or Off the ability to use Call
Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to initiate a conference or Meet Me
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to initiate a Voice Call Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
In an extension Class of Service, enable
the Barge-In Speech Mode (0) or
Monitor Mode (1) at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to be monitored.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the extension
user ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending while
talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to call a Department Group Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to Barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 315
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
2 - 316
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) the Barge-In (Intrusion)
Tone. If disabled, this also turns off the
Barge-In display at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to program General function keys
using Service Code 751 (by default).
(Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service
Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when an
extension improperly enters an Account
Code or violates Toll Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns Off or On the ability to display the
detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension user
should display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer,
DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turns Off or On a user ability to press a
line key to barge into an outside call.
The Barge-In feature must be enabled if
this option is to be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on a
virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06
(Call Waiting) must be set to off for this
option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for
COS 01~15)
3
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turns Off or On the ability of an
extension COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to display paging information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
For extension Class of Service, Allow (1)
or Deny (0) an extension user from
turning Background Music on and off.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Use to define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension Class of
Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service, Allow
(1) or Deny (0) the extension user ability
to have multiple users Barge-In to their
conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the operator
to use service codes in Program 11-1310 through Program 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals manually
sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns On (1) or Off (0)
extension user ability to block callers
from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
In an extension Class of Service, turns
On (1) or Off (0) a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On an extension user ability to
use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue Status
Display for an extension Class of
Service. Any extension with this option
enabled also hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to set or cancel Do Not Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 317
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an extension on
a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use the Station Relocation feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in Call
Monitoring Mode determines if the
monitored parties receives the barge in
alert tone when Coaching Mode is
enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in
the LCD when the phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Name will be
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in
the LCD when the phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station will
light when a Normal CO call is ringing
the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent Display which Call is From
Determine if the station logged in via
AIC codes shows which queue the call
is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name Appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name and
number are listed (On) or unlisted (Off)
in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Operation
To set up and program the Cordless DECT Terminals (DTL-8R-1( )):
1.
Press and hold down
on the LCD.
2.
Press Ring/Vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key F1.
2 - 318
and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red and F1=LK01 is displayed
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
3.
Press On/Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press Ring/Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off.
TALK is selected when the F1~F8 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys. NO TALK is
selected when F1~F8 function keys are programmed for functions not requiring an off-hook state (e.g., Log On/Off
or DND.)
5.
Press On/Off MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F8).
6.
After programming F4, press On/Off MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press Ring/Vol to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing On or Off (LCD indicates ON or OFF as
appropriate).
8.
Press TALK to exit.
Function keys F1 ~ F8 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS), Feature (FNC),
or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC Multiline Terminal.
When initially installed, function keys F1~F8 default to Line keys 1~8 respectively and Off-Hook Ringing defaults
to ON.
Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any function key to operate with off-hook ringing.
Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Cordless DECT Terminals Using the
Base Unit:
When the Cordless DECT Terminals is associated with a Multiline Telephone the following is applicable:
Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are idle.
A call in progress cannot be switched between the Cordless DECT Terminals and the associated
Multiline Telephone.
Switching held calls between the Cordless DECT Terminals and the associated Multiline Telephone
is not recommended because line key LED indications are not provided.
Switching from Multiline Telephone and Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone:
1.
Press the Cordless button on the base unit.
To switch from Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone to Multiline Telephone:
1.
Press the DESK button on the base unit.
For additional Operating Procedures, refer to the Cordless DECT Terminals (DTL-8R-1( )) Owner’s Guide.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 319
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 320
Cordless DECT Terminals (US Only)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Cordless Telephone Connection
Description
Using an AP(R)-R( )/AP(A)-R( ) Unit for a DTR telephone, or an APR-L( ) for DTL telephones, an analogtype cordless telephone can be connected to a multiline terminal.
The CD-4LCA with PZ-4LCA Daughter Board, CD-8LCA with PZ-8LCE Daughter Board and the
SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP also support cordless telephones, but this feature refers to multiline terminal cordless
connection.
Conditions
A voice announced internal call to the multiline terminal does not ring the cordless telephone.
Only one cordless single line telephone can be connected to an APR-L( ), AP(R)-R( ), or
AP(A)-R( ) Unit.
When CO Prime Line is assigned to the associated multiline terminal, internal dial tone
cannot be transferred to the cordless telephone.
The cordless telephone requires a PBR circuit while dialing. When all PBR circuits are busy,
a busy tone is heard when the phone goes off-hook.
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
This feature works with analog-type cordless single line telephones.
The multiline terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each
other.
An APR-L( ), AP(A)-R( ) or AP(R)-R( ) Unit with hookflash enabled follows the same
operating procedures as a single line terminal connected to a CD-4LCA with PZ-4LCA
Daughter Board or CD-8LCA with PZ-8LCE Daughter Board.
The multiline terminal LCD displays normal information for multiline terminal when a cordless
terminal is used.
When the multiline terminal user goes off-hook before the cordless single line telephone
user, a PBR circuit is not connected for the cordless single line telephone.
The cordless telephone must be installed within 3 metres (10 feet) of the AP(R)-R( ),
AP(A)-R( ) Unit or APR-L( ) Unit.
The following features are supported by an APR-L( ) AP(R)-R( ) or AP(A)-R( ):
Initiate conference
Change station name
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 321
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Privacy release by pressing line key
Group Listen
DSS/BLF indication
Headset Ringing
The APR-L( ) AP(R)-R( ) and AP(A)-R( ) only support DTMF signaling, DP is not supported.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
Any DTH/DTR terminal with an AP(A)-R( ) or AP(R)-R( ) Unit except the DTR-2DT-1( ) TEL
Any DTL terminal with an APR-L( ) Unit except the DTL-2DT-1( ) TEL
Required Component(s)
2500-type cordless Single Line Telephone
Related Features
Ancillary Device Connection
Class of Service
2 - 322
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-02
10-03-04
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type
(B1).
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 1.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)
3
3
2 - 323
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
10-03-05
10-03-06
10-03-07
10-03-08
10-03-09
10-03-10
10-03-11
2 - 324
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
2
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)
3
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)
3
0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)
3
3
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
ETU Setup (BRIA PKG Setup) –
Dial Sending Mode
Setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for each
CD-2BRIA. Select either enblock or
overlap sending.
0 = Enblock Sending
1 = Overlap Sending
(default = 1)
ETU Setup (BRIA PKG Setup) –
Dial Information Element
Setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for each
CD-2BRIA. If Overlap Sending is
selected in Program 10-03-08,
select either Keypad Facility (0) or
Called Party Number (1) for the dial
information element.
0 = Keypad Facility
1 = Called Party
Number
(default = 0)
Shows optional adapter
information.
0 = No option
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
(default = 0)
3
0 = No option
1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup – Telephone Option
Information
System Configuration Setup –
Telephone Option Information
Shows optional adapter
information.
3
3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-07-02
20-07-03
20-07-04
20-07-05
20-07-10
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
2
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Changing the Music on Hold
Tone
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to change the Music on Hold
tone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Storing
Speed Dialing Entries
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to store System or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extensionuser to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the ability for
an extension user to program the
Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension user ability to use the
Trunk Port Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to record, erase and
listen to VRS messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 325
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
2 - 326
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turns an extension Off (0) or On (1)
to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to
listen to the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an
extension for dialing Service Code
612 and record, listen to, or erase
the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
accumulated extension data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
department group (STG) data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
accumulated account code data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel Private
Call Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel dial-in
mode switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Do-NotCall Administrator
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel do not
call administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turns Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-06
20-08-08
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off (0) or On (1) outgoing
trunk calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an
extension user ability to make
outbound calls using system speed
dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to make outbound calls
using group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension
allowing it to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enabling this
option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice announce
mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicators are to be allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for call address information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 327
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
20-09-01
20-09-05
20-09-08
20-10-01
2 - 328
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
2
Turns Off (0) or On (1) a user Class
of Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed. If
block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in Program
14-01-21) before the user dialed
digits (this requires Program 14-0210 to be enabled). If block is
disabled, the system outdials the
call just as it was dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 911 (US
Only).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to override the trunk access map
programming for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for voice over to busy virtual
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL,
or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turns Off or On and extension
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension Pickup
Group as well as ring group calls
(Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Meet-Me Conference and
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to answer an incoming
call on a Call Arrival (CAR)/
Secondary Incoming Extension
(SIE)/ Virtual Extension simply by
lifting the handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to us Call Pickup to Pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forward Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 329
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
2 - 330
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user to set Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension's Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) an extension
user ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to use Unscreened
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group
Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) user setting
up Call Forwarding Off-Premise at
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to have a call which recalls from
hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Trunk-toTrunk Transfer Restriction. If
enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is
not possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 4 7 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns Off (0) or On (1) a multiline
terminal user ability to transfer a call
to a predefined destination (such as
an operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension user in a Department
Group to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
3
3
3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-12-03
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0) or Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension
users ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically when
they hang up.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension user.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turns On or off an extensions ability
to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) – Cost
Display (TTU)
ISDN billing information
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the Warning
Tone for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 331
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-04
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-07
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
2 - 332
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns On or Off the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns On (1) or Off (0) the ability of
an extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
In an extension Class of Service,
enable the Barge-In Speech Mode
(0) or Monitor Mode (1) at the
initiating extension (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to be monitored.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off (0) or On (1) the
extension user ability to use
Continued Dialing, which allows
DTMF signal sending while talking
on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to barge-in on other's
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) Barge-In at
the receiving extension (i.e., BargeIn receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-17
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns On (1) or Off (0) the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns Off or On the ability to display
the detail state of called party.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
This only applies to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turns Off or On a user ability to
press a line key to barge into an
outside call. The Barge-In feature
must be enabled if this option is to
be used.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to use Group Listen.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be set
to off for this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turns Off or On the ability of an
extension COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to display paging
information.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal..
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 333
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-48
2 - 334
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
In an extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) an extension
user from turning Background
Music on and off.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Use to define the supplementary
feature availability for each
extension Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service,
Allow (1) or Deny (0) the extension
ability to have multiple users BargeIn to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through Program
11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns On (1) or
Off (0) extension ability to block
callers from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
which has this option enabled also
hears the queue alarm.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Station Relocation
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are listed (On) or
unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Operation
To make a call using a cordless single line telephone:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the station number or dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
To answer a call using a cordless single line telephone:
When the Multiline Terminal is ringing, the incoming call can be answered by the cordless single line
telephone user by going off-hook, when ringing line preference is assigned for the multiline terminal.
To transfer a call from a cordless single line telephone to its associated multiline terminal:
1.
The multiline terminal user goes off-hook.
2.
The single line telephone user goes on-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
multiline terminal).
To transfer a call from a multiline terminal to its associated cordless single line telephone:
1.
The single line telephone user goes off-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
single line telephone).
2.
The multiline terminal user goes on-hook.
To use Hookflash:
Refer to the operation for Single Line Telephone Access.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 335
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 336
Cordless Telephone Connection
Data Line Security
Description
Data Line Security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as Camp-On
or Override) and denies a station from barging in while busy to prevent disruption of data
transmission when using a modem or facsimile machine.
Conditions
When a multiline terminal and a single line telephone are assigned for Data Line
Security, Tone Override/Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not
heard over the handset speaker.
Data Line Security protects a station from Barge-in, even when Barge-In is
allowed in Class of Service.
D
When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data Line
Security, a constant busy tone is heard.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 337
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-35
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off or On an extension
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off or On an extension
ability to receive Off-Hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive Off-Hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns Off or On
extension ability to block callers
from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
20-09-07 must be set to 0
also for this to be effective.
2
3
3
3
3
3
Operation
None
2 - 338
Data Line Security
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Delayed Ringing
Description
Delayed Ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on incoming calls after a
programmed time. This feature applies to CO/PBX lines, Secondary Incoming Extensions, Virtual
Extensions, and Call Arrival Keys.
Conditions
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset (depending on
programming).
Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the
telephone.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals:
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Central Office Calls, Answering
Secondary Incoming Extension
Virtual Extensions
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 339
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-07-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets the access options for
trunks. Ring Group programming
overrides Access Map
programming.
3
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold).
3
3
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunks 1~200
(default = 1)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign CAR/SIE/VE function keys
(code 03 + extension number) or
CO function keys (Code 01 +
trunk port) on multiline terminals.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code)
(Service Code 752 by
default)
2 - 340
2
3
Delayed Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-09-01
15-11-01
20-04-03
22-01-04
22-02-01
22-08-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Virtual Extension Ring
Assignment
Individually program an extension
Virtual Extension key(s) to either
ring (1) or not ring (0).
Mode 1:
0 = Not Ring
1 = Ring
(default = 0)
3
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment
Use to assign the delayed ringing
options for an extension Virtual
Extension or Virtual Extension
Group Answer keys (defined in
Program 15-09).
KY01 Mode 1:
0 = (No) Immediate
Ring
1 = (Yes) Delay Ring
(default = 0)
3
System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed Ringing
(see Program 15-11) ring the
extension after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Use this option to set the feature
type for the trunk you are
programming.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
3
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
3
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
If an incoming trunk call rings
longer than the DIL No Answer
Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes
to the destination you specify in
this option. Determine if the
destination should be a Ring
Group, In-Skin/External Voice Mail,
or Central Voice Mail.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
2 - 341
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To answer Delay Ringing calls:
1.
Go off-hook.
- OR -
Press Answer.
- OR -
Press the flashing key.
Either Trunk key or CAR/SIE/VE key.
To program a CAR/SIE/VE key on a phone:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 752.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Dial 03.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6.
Press Hold once for Immediate Ring (skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring).
7.
Dial the mode number in which the key rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
8.
Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring, or Skip to step 10.
9.
Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
10.
Press Speaker.
2 - 342
Delayed Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Department Calling
Description
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension in a preprogrammed Department
Group (64 Department Groups available) by dialing the group pilot number. For example, this would let a
caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department pilot number. The caller does not
have to know any of the Sales department extension numbers.
Two types of routing are available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With
Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority extensions
ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension.
Overflow Routing
Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user directly dials a
busy extension in a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first available group
member. The system follows Program 22-15-01 ~ 22-15-07 for playing the periodic VRS message.
Department Calling also allows for each Department group to transfer calls to a predefined Speed dial bin
(Program 24-05-01) immediately or after a Delayed time (Program 24-02-08). Internal and transferred
calls are not supported for Delayed transfer.
DID and Overflow Routing
Three types of Overflow are supported for DID calls:
Immediate Transfer:
This feature can be enabled or disabled by using a (58) key programmed in Program 15-07. It can
also be done by using the service codes in Program 11-11-25 (set) and Program 11-11-26 (cancel).
When this feature is activated, any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number go immediately to
the transfer destination and do not ring anyone in the group. To set up the destination you use
Program 24-05 and Program 13-04. Once these programs are set, the access code assigned in
Program 11-11-27 can be used to change the destination as needed.
Delay:
This feature can be enabled or disabled by using a (59) key programmed in Program 15-07. It can
also be done by using service codes assigned in Program 11-11-28 (set) and Program 11-11-29
(cancel). When this feature is activated, any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot follow one of the
two patterns:
If all available members are busy or logged out, the call goes immediately to the transfer
destination.
If agents are logged in and not busy, the call comes in and hunts through the idle members until
the timer in Program 24-02-08 expires. Once this time expires, the call is routed to the transfer
destination assigned in Program 24-05 and Program 13-04. Once these programs are
assigned, the access code assigned in Program 11-11-27 can be used to change the destination
as needed.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 343
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
DND:
This feature can be enabled by using a (60) key programmed in Program 15-07 or by using service
codes assigned in Program 11-11-30 (set) and Program 11-11-31 (cancel). When this feature is
activated any DID pointed directly to the Pilot gets a busy tone and the call does not route.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user removes
their extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their extension. When
they log back in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code to log in
or log out of their Department Calling Group. A multiline terminal can optionally have a function key
programmed to login/logout.
Enhanced Hunting
Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting abilities. Hunting sets the conditions under which
calls to a Department Group pilot number will cycle through the members of the group. The hunting
choices are:
Busy
A call to the pilot number hunts past only a busy group member to the first available extension.
Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Department Group has
Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call does not hunt to the next
available extension.
Busy or Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up.
If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group pilot
number queues for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold any number of waiting
calls. If a display telephone is waiting in queue, the user sees: WAITING (group name). If a transferred
call in queue is an outside call, and the system has DSP daughter board installed with the VRS, the
queued caller hears, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes
free.”
The VRS also can transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) on page
2-1281 for information on setting up the VRS.
The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:
Busy on a call
In Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarded
Logged Out
2 - 344
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
When a DIL rings to a Department Group, the DIL may follow overflow programming
(Program 22-01-04 and Program 22-08-01).
If all agents are logged out and an intercom call to the Department Group is made you get a
busy signal.
Extensions in a Department Group which have Call Forwarding enabled are not included in
the call hunt. The extension to which the user is forwarded does not receive the hunted calls.
When you use the automatic Department Step calling (Program 16-01-03) it hunts only to
members with the same or lower priority.
Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.
A virtual extension can be programmed to receive multiple calls which can camp-on to the
extension – no analog port is required.
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Department Group Pilot number. If unanswered,
the call recalls (depending on programming) the transferring extension after the Transfer
Recall Time (Program 24-02-04).
Voice mail uses one Department Group for voice mail.
When Program 16-01-05 is set to (1) Automatic, all telephones in the Department group Ring
for ICM calls & DID calls Directed to the Department Group Pilot Number only.
The Overflow feature is only supported for DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number.
POTS lines and transferred DIDs ignore the Overflow settings.
When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Department Group in Program 45-01-01 it
will only work as priority mode no matter what Program 16-01-02 is set to for that
Department Group.
Program 16-01-05 (Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation) does not work to a
Secondary Department Group.
Default Setting
Disabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 345
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Priority Routing
IF
CALL
IF
Telephone on a
call
Priority 1
Telephone on a
call
Priority 1
CALL
Priority 2
IF
Priority 1
Telephone on a
call
Priority 2
Priority 2
CALL
Priority 3
Priority 3
Priority 3
Figure 2-1 Department Calling Priority Call Routing
2 - 346
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Circular Routing
CALL 1
CALL 2
CALL 3
CALL 4
Figure 2-2 Department Calling Circular Routing
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
VRS for Messaging
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 347
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Forwarding
Department Step Calling
Transfer
VM8000 InMail
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
– Dial
Use to assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-11-25
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Setup for Each Extension
Group
Use this option to set the service
code to activate immediate
automatic transfer for ICM and
transferred calls to Department
Groups.
MLT, SLT
(default = 602)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Use this option to set the service
code to deactivate immediate
automatic transfer for ICM and
transferred calls to Department
Groups.
MLT, SLT
(default = 603)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Destination of
Automatic Transfer Each
Extension Group
Use this option to set the service
code for setting the destination for
immediate automatic transfer for
ICM and transferred calls to
Department Groups.
MLT
(default = 604)
11-11-26
11-11-27
2 - 348
2
3
3
3
3
3
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
11-11-28
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Delayed
Transfer for Every Extension
Group
Use this service code to set the
delayed transfer destination
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 605)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Delayed
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Use this service code to cancel the
delayed transfer destination
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 606)
11-12-09
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Change to STG
(Department Group) All Ring
Use this option to set the service
code for ringing all members of a
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-16-10
Single Digit Service Code Setup –
(Department) STG All Ring Mode
Assign the Single Digit (post-dialing)
Service Code for All Member Ring.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a Department Calling key
(46) so extension users can install
or remove themselves from the
Department Calling Group.
Additional keys can also be
assigned for Department Group
features immediate calling
destination (58), delayed calling
destination (59) and DND
destination (60).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
11-11-29
3
3
3
3
16-01-01
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Name
Assign a name to the Extension
(Department) Groups.
Maximum 12 characters
(default not assigned)
3
16-01-02
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Calling Cycle
Set the routing cycle for calls into a
department (i.e., when a user dials
the department pilot number). The
system can ring the highest priority
extension available (Priority
Routing, 0) or cycle in circular order
to a new idle extension for each
new call (Circular Routing, 1).
0 = Normal Routing
(Priority)
1 = Easy – UCD Routing
(Circular)
(default = 0)
3
Set how the system routes an
Intercom call to a busy Department
Group member. The caller can hear
busy tone (0) or overflow to the first
available Department Group
member (1). This option is for
Intercom calls to an extension, not a
pilot number.
0 = Normal (Intercom
caller to busy
department member
hears busy)
1 = Circular (Intercom
callers to busy
department member
routes to idle member)
(default = 0)
3
Set if an unanswered call should
hunt once stopping at the last
member tried (0) or continually hunt
through the idle members (1).
0 = Last extension is
called and hunting is
stopped
1 = Circular
(default = 0)
3
16-01-03
16-01-04
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Routing
When Busy (Auto Step Call)
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Hunting Mode
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 349
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
16-01-05
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Extension Group All Ring
Mode Operation
Set if all members of the group
should ring automatically (1) or
through the use of the service code
(0) defined in Program 11-12-09.
Selecting automatic will override the
settings of Programs 16-01-03 and
16-01-04.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
(default = 0)
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – STG Withdraw Mode
Use to set the STG withdraw mode
for each department group.
0 = Disable (Camp On)
1 = Enable (Overflow
Mode)
(default = 0)
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Call Recall Restriction for
STG
Determine whether or not an
unanswered call transferred to a
Department Group should recall the
extension from which it was
transferred.
0 = Disable (Recall)
1 = Enable (No Recall)
(default = 0)
3
16-01-09
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Hunting No
Answer Time
Set how long a call rings a
Department Group extension before
hunting occurs.
64800 (seconds)
(default = 15 seconds)
3
16-01-10
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Enhanced Hunt Type
Set the type of hunting for each
Extension (Department) Group.
0 = No queuing
1 = Hunting When Busy
2 = Hunting When Not
Answered
3 = Hunting When Busy
or No Answer
(default = 0)
16-01-06
16-01-07
16-02-01
16-03-01
20-06-01
2 - 350
Department Group Assignment
for Extensions
Secondary Department Group
Class of Service for Extensions
3
3
Set up the Department Group called
by the pilot number and the
extension priority when a group is
called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in 2302.
Department Groups
1-64
Priority 1-512
Default = All extensions
in Department Group 1
with priority in port order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 512 priority = 512
Use this program to assign
extensions to multiple Department
Groups and set the priority
assignment. Each Secondary
Department Group can have up to
16 extensions assigned.
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Priority Order
0~999
(default not assigned)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
3
3
3
3
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-07
20-11-17
20-13-06
20-13-14
22-02-01
22-07-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability in a Department Group to use
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive Off-Hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Incoming Call Trunk Setup –
Incoming Type
If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a
Department Group, assign Service
Type 4 for each Night Service
Mode. Refer to Program 22-07-01.
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial
tone if no VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
3
For each trunk assigned Service
Type 4 in Program 22-02-01 above,
assign the DIL destination as the
Department Group pilot number (as
assigned in Program 11-07-01).
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
System Options for Transfer –
Message Wait Ring Interval Time
For Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
without message waiting lamps, this
is the time between intermittent
ringing. If this value is set to 0, the
system rings once.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
24-02-08
System Options for Transfer –
Delayed Transfer Timer for All
Department Groups
Determine the time a call should
ring a Department Group before
transferring the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
24-05-01
Department Group Transfer Target
Setup
Assign the Speed Dial bin to each
Department Group to hold the
destination for the immediate
automatic transfer of ICM and
transferred calls to the Department
Group feature.
0~1999
(default = 1999)
Used to Enable or Disable
Department Group Call when the
Automated Attendant is activated.
0 = Disabled (Off)
1 = Enabled (On)
(Default = 0)
24-02-05
40-01-10
2
DIL Assignment
Department Group Call when the
Automated Attendant is activated
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 351
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To call a department group:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial department extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the department group.
3.
Optional: To manually ring all members of the group, dial the single digit service code assigned for
All Member Ring (Program 11-16-10).
To log out of your Department Calling Group:
While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.
1.
Press Speaker
2.
Dial 650 + 1.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).
The key lights while you are logged out.
To log back in to your Department Calling Group:
When you log back in, Department Calling routes calls to your extension.
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 650 + 0.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).
The key goes out when you log back in.
To change the Department Group Overflow Destination:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 604 + Department Group (01 ~ 64).
3.
Dial 01 ~ 08 (Refer to Program 24-05).
4.
Dial the destination the calls route to.
5.
Press Hold.
2 - 352
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Department Step Calling
Description
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step
Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another
Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an extension
user to cycle through the members of a Department Group.
Conditions
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code
(default code = 2).
A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned (code 36).
In Program 20-08-12, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension ability to use Department Step
Calling.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Department Calling
Programmable Function Keys
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 353
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-07
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Step Call
If required, customize the Step Call
service code to be used by an
extension user.
MLT, SLT
(default = 708)
11-16-01
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Step Call
If required, use this option to
change the Department Step
Calling Single Digit Service Code.
(default = 2)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key Department
Step Calling (code 36).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code)
(Service Code 752 by
default)
20-06-01
20-08-12
2 - 354
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Turns Off or On an extension
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
2
3
3
3
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Department Step Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To make a Step Call:
1.
Place a call to a busy Department Group member.
- OR -
Place a call to a Department Group pilot number.
2.
Dial Department Step Code (2) to call the next available Department Group member.
3.
Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.
You step through Department Groups set in Program 16-02-01.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 355
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 356
Department Step Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Description
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press a
key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call Progress
tones.
Conditions
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or Wireless DECT (SIP)
Terminals.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode, but only for internal
calls. The tone is still heard for external dialing.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 357
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
11-11-19
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Key Touch
Tone On/Off
If required, change the service code
to Enable or Disable the Key Touch
Tone.
MLT
(default = 724)
2
3
3
Operation
To enable/disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial 724.
2 - 358
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dial Tone Detection
Description
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the Telco or PBX when
a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key or dialing
#0 and the trunk number), the system drops the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user accesses the
trunk via a Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically using a feature like Last Number
Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group. Refer to the chart
under Programming for more information.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Central Office Calls, Placing
Last Number Redial
Save Number Dialed
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 359
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
14-02-05
14-02-11
2 - 360
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
If dial tone detection is enabled, be
sure to allocate at least one circuit
for dial tone detection [ICM/Trunk
(0) or Trunk (2)].
2
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource 01~08
= 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource 09~32
= 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource 33~96
= 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available
3
3
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Dial
Tone Detection for Manually
Accessed Trunks
Use this option enable/disable dial
tone detection for directly
accessed trunks. If disabled, the
system outdials on the trunks
without monitoring for dial tone.
0 = Dial Tone Detection
Not Used
1 = Dial Tone Detection
Used
(default = 0)
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Next
Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
If enabled, the system skips over a
trunk if dial tone is not detected.
This option pertains to calls placed
using Call Appearance (CAP)
Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last
Number Redial or Save Number
Dialed. It does not pertain to line
key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
3
3
Dial Tone Detection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
21-01-04
21-01-05
21-01-06
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Tone Detection Time
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Disconnect Time When
Dial Tone Not Detected
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Pause at First Digit
If dial tone detection is enabled,
the system waits this time for the
Telco to return dial tone. When the
time expires, the system assumes
dial tone is not present. To disable
this time (and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system
skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Speed Dial,
ARS, Last Number Redial or Save
Number dialed. It does not pertain
to line key or Direct Trunk Access
calls.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3 seconds)
If Dial Tone Detection is disabled,
the system waits based on this
time before sending dialed digits.
If using Dial Tone Detection, this
time should be set longer than the
time set in Program 21-01-05,
otherwise, if this time is set shorter
than Program 21-01-05, Dial Tone
Detection is satisfied and Program
21-01-05 is disregarded (not used).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1 second)
2
3
3
3
3
Table 2-6 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction
Method
14-02-05
14-02-11
Result if dial tone
not present . . .
Press a line key
- or Dial #0+ Trunk
number
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
0
1
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk drops
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
0
1
Trunk reroutes after time-out
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk reroutes after time-out
Dial a Trunk
Group code
- or Automatically
through a feature
Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 361
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 362
Dial Tone Detection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dialing Number Preview
Description
Dialing Number Preview lets a display multiline terminal user dial and review a number before the system
dials it. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Conditions
An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.
To place an outgoing call, an extension user must have outgoing access to a line, CAP or
trunk group key.
If the system has VRS installed, you must press
to preview a number.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Voice Response System (VRS)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 363
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-08-05
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Dial
Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Turns Off or On an extension
ability to use Dial Number Preview.
2
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call (multiline terminal only):
1.
Do not lift the handset or press Speaker.
2.
To preview any number, dial the number you want to call.
With VRS installed, you must press
to preview the number.
To preview a Speed Dial – System/Group number, press Redial and dial the
Speed Dial – System/Group bin number you want to call.
The number is displayed.
3.
To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a Line/Trunk Group key.
If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 0), you can press Speaker instead.
- OR -
To dial an Intercom number, press Speaker.
- OR -
To cancel the number without dialing it out, press Hold.
2 - 364
Dialing Number Preview
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Digital Trunk Clocking
Description
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CD-CP00-AU has a built-in clock source for all digital trunk blades. Digital trunk
blades are connected via an internal PLO (Phase Locked Oscillator) to derive Primary Clock from the
network in priority order. If priority is set up incorrectly, or if two primary clocks are coming in, slips may
occur causing improper data synchronization. The Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO) equipped with the
UNIVERGE SV8100 CD-CP00-AU is the timing source for all digital trunk blades in the system. The PLO
synchronizes the system and clocks signals from another office. When the UNIVERGE SV8100 is a clock
receiver office, the PLO generates the clock signal according to the source clock signals received from
the source office in the network. The source clock signals are extracted from digital trunk blades and are
supplied to the PLO.
The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows:
1.
CD-PRTA
2.
CD-CCTA (External)
3.
CD-2BRIA
4.
CD-CP00-AU
Conditions
If multiple PRIs exist, the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier.
If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down, the system
begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI.
If multiple BRIs exist and no CD-PRTA or CD-CCTA (External) exists, the SV8100
CD-CP00-AU chooses the first BRI that synchronized with the carrier.
If there is one CD-PRTA and the one being used for the source goes down, the SV8100
CD-CP00-AU looks to see if there are any BRIs installed in the system. If there are no BRIs,
the SV8100 CD-CP00-AU becomes the new synchronization source. The reason for this is
when a CD-PRTA is installed in the system, all T1s must be assigned as (INTERNAL). T1
(INTERNAL) is not a clocking priority.
Default Setting
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 365
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
N/A
Required Component(s)
CD-CP00-AU
CD-2BRIA
- OR -
CD-PRTA, CD-CCTA
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility
K-CCIS – T1
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Digital Trunk Clocking Examples:
If multiple PRIs exist, the first one that synchronized with the carrier is chosen. In this example, the PRI in
02 was the first to synchronize with the carrier; therefore, it is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-3 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1
2 - 366
Digital Trunk Clocking
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down, the system begins to count
forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI. In this example, the PRI in 02 went down, so
the system now begins looking forward in slot numbers for the next PRI to use as the clock source.
Figure 2-4 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2
In this example, the PRI in 05 was the first to synchronize with the carrier and became the PLO
synchronization source. The PRI in 05 then went down and the system began looking forward in slot
numbers to find the next PLO source. In this case, the PRI in 02 was the next source because after it
looks through the rest of the slots in the system, it starts over with 01.
Figure 2-5 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 3
In this example, there are multiple T1 circuits in the system. There can only be one T1 circuit assigned as
EXTERNAL in the system, so the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-6 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 4
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 367
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
In this example, there are multiple T1 circuits and a BRI circuit. Since the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL has
higher priority than a BRI, the T1 EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-7 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5
In this example, there is a PRI, multiple T1s, and a BRI. The PRI was the PLO synchronization source
until it went down. The BRI then becomes the PLO synchronization source because when a PRI is in the
system, T1s cannot be assigned as EXTERNAL, which are not in the PLO Synchronization Source priority
list.
Figure 2-8 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6
If multiple BRIs exist but no PRI or T-1 EXTERNAL exists, the system chooses the first BRI that
synchronized with the carrier. In this example, the BRI in 04 synchronized with the carrier first and
became the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-9 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7
2 - 368
Digital Trunk Clocking
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
In this scenario, the PRI was the clocking source until it went down. There are no other PRIs, T1
(Externals), or BRIs in the system. The CD-CP00-AU now becomes the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-10 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8
Guide to Feature Programming
Refer to the related features for programming.
Operation
Refer to the related features for details.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 369
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 370
Digital Trunk Clocking
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers
who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local
exchange (NNX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number
9264 3111 can directly dial extension 111. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call
screening to complete the call.
Direct Inward Dialing requires DID service from Telco.
In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:
DID Dialed Number Translation
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
DID Intercept
DID Camp-On
There are 20 DID Translation tables that can be divided between 2000 entries.
DID Dialed Number Translation
DID allows different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying DID
service from Telco. If you cannot buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 301~556), use the
translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits
501~756 to extension numbers 301~556.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has 2000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the
20 DID Translation Tables. One translation is made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can put all
2000 entries in the same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 2000 entries among
the 20 tables.
In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it.
When the DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name is supplied.
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
With three-digit service, the Telco sends three digits to the system for translation. Be sure to program
your system for compatibility with the provided Telco service. For example, if the Telco sends four digits,
make sure you set up the translation tables to accept four digits.
The system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signaling. DID trunks can be either wink
start, immediate start, 2nd Dial or Delay.
DID Camp-On
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 371
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept disabled.
With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on for the DID Ring No Answer Time. It
then diverts to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without DID Camp-On,
the caller to the busy extension hears only busy tone.
DID Routing Through the VRS
DID calls can optionally route through the VRS. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Attendant
Greeting explaining their dialing options. If the caller misdials, they hear a second greeting with additional
instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be, “Thank you for calling. Please
dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator.” If the caller inadvertently dials an
extension that does not exist, they could hear, “The extension you dialed is unavailable. Please dial 0 for
assistance or dial 9 to leave a message so we can call you back.”
You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e., VRS Messages) to the numbers in each Translation
Table. This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should
play for which dialed numbers. You could, for example, set up 9264 3001 through 9264 3049 to route to
extensions 401~449, and have 9264 3000 route to the automated attendant.
If you translate a DID so that it hits a specific VRS message, you must disable Program 25-01-02. Otherwise, the outside
caller waits while hearing the DISA dial tone.
The system allows an extension to be defined as a 1-digit number that can be dialed by the outside caller
on a DID/DISA trunk using the VRS. The outside caller can access the desired extension/department
group by dialing only one digit after the system answers the call. If the same number is used as the first
digit of an extension number and the 1-digit access code for DID/DISA, the outside caller cannot access
the extension.
Example:
If 2 is defined as a 1-digit access code to department group 300, outside callers cannot access extensions
200~299 directly.
SMDR Includes Dialed Number
The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name (entered in system programming) or the number the
incoming caller dialed (i.e., the dialed DID digits). This gives you the option to analyze the SMDR report
based on the number your callers dial. (This option also applies to an ISDN trunk.)
DID Intercept
DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are three DID Intercepts:
Vacant Number Intercept
If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, Vacant Number Intercept can reroute
the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without Vacant
Number Intercept, the caller hears error tone after misdialing.
Busy Intercept
Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy Intercept is
enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice
Mail. If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On programming.
2 - 372
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Ring-No-Answer Intercept
Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the
destination extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes to the
DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time. If Ring-NoAnswer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination until the outside caller hangs
up.
Delayed DID
Delayed DID allows a user a programmed time to answer a call. If the call is not answered in this time, the
system automatically answers the call. An outside party hears a voice message, music, or dial tone
according to the following conditions:
If a VRS is installed, the system sends a prerecorded message from the VRS.
If a customer-provided audio system (example: tape recorder) is connected, an error message or
music can be played for the caller.
If equipment is not connected for an announcement, the system sends a unique dial tone to the
outside caller.
This feature is not available for the normal incoming call on ISDN trunks.
DID Intercept Destination for Each DID Number
With this feature the system allows you to program a DID Intercept destination for a DID number which
receives no answer or busy call. The system can be programmed to use a trunk ring group, the VRS or
the voice mail as the programmed destination. Each vacant number intercept for a DID number can have
two destinations. The first destination is for an invalid DID number, busy or no answer extension. The
second destination is for a no answer trunk ring group.
If the first programmed destination is a Ring Group and the second Destination is Voice Mail, the call does not forward to
VoiceMail.
For busy or no answer intercept calls, a third destination can be defined in Program 22-12. If the first and
third destinations are programmed but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third
destination after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not programmed, but the third
destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination.
This feature works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 3 in Program 22-02. Other types of trunks may
use the DID table, but the DID intercept feature is not yet supported.
With the DID Intercept for each DID number feature, when the primary destination (Program 22-11-05) is
set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is:
1. Busy Intercept = Forward Busy
2. Ring-No-Answer Intercept = Forward RNA
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 373
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
When the secondary destination (Program 22-11-06) is set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is based
on the first destination routing. When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destination by a busy
intercept, the Voice Mail protocol forwards busy calls. When the incoming call is routed to the first
destination by a ring-no-answer intercept, the protocol forwards ring-no-answer. The Voice Mail transfers
the calls to the mailbox number defined in Program 22-11-02.
Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table (Program 22-11 or Program 22-17-01). If a valid DID number is
not entered, there is no ring destination for any incoming call to that number (the calls do not ring any extension in the
system).
If the first programmed destination is a Ring Group and the second Destination is Voice Mail, the call does not forward to
VoiceMail.
Calls Can Follow Ring Group Programming for Transferring Calls
An option was added to Program 22-11 which allows you to determine if the DID routing should use the
programmed ring group entry in Program 22-12-01 when transferring calls from a busy or no answer
number.
If DID digits match the conversion table but there is no extension, no Voice Mail, or Voice Mail did not boot
up, use Program 22-11-11 to decide what to do with the incoming call. Go to (1) normal ring (default) or
(0) caller hears a Busy Tone.
DID Call by Time Schedule
DID Call by Time Schedule allows for 100 programmed DID Conversion table entries (PRG 22-17-01) that
can be routed based on Time Patterns. Each DID Conversion table has a maximum of eight
programmable Time Patterns and each Time Pattern can reference one of the 2000 different Dial-In
Conversion table entries in PRG 22-11-01.
Example 1 (Automatic Change)
00:00
09:00
12:00
13:00
00:00
18:00
Time Pattern
PRG 22-17
1
2
3
4
5
PRG 22-11-01
1
2
3
2
1
102 incoming
101 incoming
100 incoming
PRG 22-11-02
100 incoming 101 incoming
Input Data
PRG 22-11-01 and PRG 22-11-02
2 - 374
Table No.
Receive Dial
Transfer Dial
1
No setting
100
2
No setting
101
3
No setting
102
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
PRG 22-17
Table No.
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
Start Time
End Time
PRG 22-11
1~100
1111
1
00:00
09:00
1
2
09:00
12:00
2
3
12:00
13:00
3
4
13:00
18:00
2
5
18:00
00:00
1
6
00:00
00:00
0
7
00:00
00:00
0
8
00:00
00:00
0
Table 2-7 Example 2 (Manual Change)
PRG 22-17
Table No.
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
Start Time
End Time
PRG 22-11
1~100
1111
1
00:00
00:00
1
2
00:00
00:00
2
3
00:00
00:00
3
4
00:00
00:00
0
5
00:00
00:00
0
6
00:00
00:00
0
7
00:00
00:00
0
8
00:00
00:00
0
Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements (US Only)
Allowing this equipment to operate without providing proper answer supervision signaling violates Part 68
rules.
This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network when the DID
trunk is:
Answered by the called station.
Answered by the attendant.
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user.
Routed to a dial prompt.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 375
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched
Telephone Network. Permissible exceptions are when:
A call is unanswered.
A busy tone is received.
A reorder tone is received.
When ordering DID service, provide the Telco with the following information:
UNIVERGE SV8100
KF = US:NIFKF07B
MF = US:NIFMF07B
PF = US:NIFPF07B
DID Facility Interface Code
02RV2-T
DID Service Order Code
9.0F
DID Answer Supervision Code
A S.2
DID USOC Jack Type
RJ21X
Conditions
Analog DID requires the installation of a CD-4DIOPA Blade (provides four DID ports).
Depending on programming, the system may assign both trunk and extension ports (if OPX
is selected in Program 10-03-01) when this ETU is installed.
DID service must be purchased from your local telephone company.
DID Intercept for each DID number works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 3 in
Program 22-02. Other types of trunks may use the DID table, but the DID intercept feature
for each DID number is not yet supported.
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension when the call is
ringing to their telephone.
Direct Inward Lines (DILs) also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension,
virtual extension, or Department Group directly.
DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly.
The Off-Hook Signaling provide DID calls with signaling options. Refer to Off-Hook Signaling
for specific details.
DID trunks do not ring external page speakers. Only trunks defined as normal in Program
22-02-01 ring external page speakers.
To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.
SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If
enabled, DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name.
Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason a
call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).
When defining trunks as DID or DID Mode in Program 22-02-01, DID translation (Program
22-11 or Program 22-17) must be used, even if the incoming digits match the extension
number.
2 - 376
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
When using DID Call by Time Schedule and breaking out the Time Patterns, set the start
time to 00:00 and end time to 00:00 for this feature to operate correctly. Refer to DID Call by
Time Schedule on page 2-374 for more details.
DID Call by Time Schedule Priority is given to the pattern that is set manually. However,
when a time pattern changes with the time schedules set in Program 22-17, the pattern
applied by the Manual change is canceled and the Time Pattern is given priority.
When Transfer Operation Mode is set to busy, call queuing must be turned off for it to work.
Default Setting
Disabled
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Off-Hook Signaling
Paging, External
Programmable Function Keys
Station Message Detail Recording
Transfer
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 377
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-09-01
14-05-01
15-07-01
20-06-01
2 - 378
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
Trunk Group – Trunk group
Number
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for
Extensions
Use program 10-03-XX to setup and
confirm the basic configuration data
for each blade. This program
represents different data depending
on the blade installed in the slot.
Please refer the SV8100
Programming Manual for a more
detailed description of this program.
The assigned data varies
depending on the blade
installed in the slot.
Please refer to the
SV8100 Programming
Manual for a more
detailed description of
the 10-03-XX programs.
If the system has DTMF DID trunks,
be sure to reserve at least one circuit
for analog trunk DTMF reception
(type 0 or 2). There must be an
available receiver for each DTMF
DID trunk.
Use the following as a guide when
allocating DTMF receivers:
In light traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every 10 devices
that use them.
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every five devices
that use them.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource 01~08
= 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource 09~32
= 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource 33~96
= 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource 97~160
= 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available.
Put DID trunks in the same trunk
group (other than group 1). If you
have several types of DID trunks, put
each type in a separate trunk group.
Trunks 1-200
Trunk Group 1-100
Priority 1-200
Default = All trunks in
Trunk Group 1 with
priority in trunk order.
Trunk 1 priority = 1 Trunk
200 priority = 200.
3
You can assign line or Call
Appearance (CAP) Keys for DID
trunks (Trunks: 1~200).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port =
Class 1
2
3
3
3
3
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-13-23
21-01-02
22-01-06
22-02-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for
Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Intercom Interdigit
Time
Set the time-out interval for DID
callers that do not dial. After this
time, the DID call routes according to
Vacant Number Intercept
programming.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DID Ring-No-Answer
Time
Set the DID Ring No Answer (RNA)
Intercept time (0~64800 seconds).
In systems with RNA Intercept, the
DID call rings the destination
extension for this time, and then
rings Intercept Ring Group. (default:
20).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For each Night Service Mode, enter
service type 3 when the trunk should
be a DID trunk.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
2 - 379
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
22-04-01
22-09-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Extension Ring
Group Assignment
DID Basic Data Setup –
Expected Number of Digits
Assign extensions to Ring Groups.
Calls ring the extensions according
to programming in Program 22-06.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring for
incoming Ring Group 1
calls. No other
extensions ring for
incoming Ring Group 1
calls.
For each DID Translation Table
(1~20), enter the number of digits
the table expects to receive from the
CO (eight maximum). For example,
for a table used with 3-digit DID
service, enter 3.
1~8
(default = 2)
2
3
3
22-09-02
DID Basic Data Setup –
Received Vacant Number
Operation
Use this option to Enable or Disable
Vacant Number Intercept.
0 = Disconnect
1 = Transfer
(default = 0)
3
22-10-01
DID Translation Table Setup
Assign the start and end range of
DID Translation Table entries
(1~2000) to each DID Translation
Table (1~20).
Trans Table 1 = 001~200
Trans Table 2 = 201~400
Trans Table 3 = 401~600
Trans Tabgle 4 601~700
3
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the digits
received by the system.
Conv Table 001~100 =
01~99,00
Conv Table 201~300 =
01~99,00
Conv Table 301~500 =
01~99,00
Conv Table 401~600 =
01~99,00
3
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
extension the system dials after
translation.
Conv Table 001~100 =
101~199,100
Conv Table 201~300 =
101~199,100
Conv Table 301~500 =
101~199,100
Conv Table 401~600 =
101~199,100
3
DID Translation Number
Conversion – DID Name
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the name
that should show on the dialed
extension display when it rings.
Maximum 12 digits
(default not assigned)
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Transfer
Operation Mode
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the condition
required to transfer the call to the
destination defined in Program 2211-05 and Program 22-11-06.
0 = No Transfer
1 = Busy
2 = No Answer
3 = Both
(default = 0)
22-11-01
22-11-02
22-11-03
22-11-04
2 - 380
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Received
Number
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Target Number
3
3
3
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
1
22-11-05
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 1
Use to define the 1st transfer
destination for each tables received
number.
22-11-06
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 2
400 = Allows the outside party to dial
a different extension number in the
translation table (for example, ring
no answer to a dialed number, the
caller then hears a dial tone,
allowing them to enter another Valid
Extension Number).
401 = Provides the caller with DISA
dialing options (requires using the
DISA password).
Note: This applies to 22-11-05 and
22-11-06.
If the Transfer Destinations are
busy or receive no answer,
those calls are transferred to
the final transfer destination
(Program 22-10).
22-11-07
Assigned Data
0 = No Setting
1~100 = Incoming Group
101 = (Not Used)
102 = In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or In-Mail
201~264 = Extension
Group
400 = Valid Extension
Number
401 = DISA
501~548 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000~1999 = Speed
Number
(000~999)
(default = 0)
2
3
3
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Call Waiting
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify whether or
not Call Waiting should be allowed
(0 = Disable, 1 = Enable).
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)
3
22-11-08
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Maximum
Number of DID Calls
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
maximum number of DID calls.
0~200 (0 = No Limit)
(default = 0)
3
22-11-09
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Music On Hold
Source
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the source of
music to be used for DID trunks.
0 = IC/MOH Port
1 = BGM Port
2 = ACI Port
(default = 0)
3
DID Translation Number
Conversion – ACI Music
Source Port
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), if item 2 is selected
in Program 22-11-09, specify the
port to be used for the source of
music heard on DID trunks.
When a sound source
type is 2 in above :
(0~96)
(default = 0)
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Ring Group
Transfer
Enable (1) or disable (0) each
conversion table to follow the Ring
Group programming defined in
Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept
Ring Group. If Program 22-11-05 :
DID Translation Number
Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 :
DID Translation Number
Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 2 are set, the priority of
transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06
then if Program 22-11-11 is enabled,
Program 22-12-01.
1~2000
0 = Disable (Caller hears
Ringback)
1 = Enable (Go to normal
ring)
(default = 0)
22-11-10
22-11-11
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 381
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
22-12-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
For each DID Translation Table,
program the DID Intercept
destination. The destination can be a
Ring Group, In-Skin/External Voice
Mail, or Centralized Voice Mail. This
program is used when there is no
destination programmed in Program
22-11-05. It is unrelated to Program
22-11-06 and Program 22-11-07.
0 (No Setting)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)
Assign the DID trunk groups to
translation tables. If all the DID
trunks use the same type of DID
service, you may have only one DID
trunk group and one DID Translation
Table (with many entries).
0~20
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data
Setup – VRS/DISA Dial-In
Mode
Determine whether the system
should use option 0 (Extension
number/Service code specify) or
option 1 (Use dial conversion table)
for calls.
0 = Extension Number
Service Code Specify
(Intercom)
1 = Use Dial Conversion
Table
(default = 0)
3
25-01-03
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data
Setup – VRS/DISA Transfer
Alarm
Determine whether the system
should use option 0 (Normal) or
option 1 (Alarm) for calls.
0 = Normal
1 = Alarm
(default = 0)
3
25-02-01
VRS/DISA VRS Message
For each trunk port and each night
mode, select the message source (0
= No Message, 1 = VRS, 2 = ACI, 3
=S LT), assign the VRS message
number to be used as the
Automated Attendant Message for
each trunk, which is assigned as
VRS/DISA [with VRS = 01~48 (VRS
message number), with ACI = 1~4 or
01~16 (ACI group number), with SLT
= 1~8 or 01~64 (Department Group
number)].
0 = No Message
1 = 01~100 (VRS
Messages)
2 = 01~4 (ACI Group
Number)
3 = 01~64 (Extension
Group Number)
(default = 0)
For each trunk port, set what
happens to a call when the DISA or
Automated Attendant caller dials
incorrectly or waits too long to dial.
The call can either disconnect (0) or
Transfer to an alternate destination
(a ring group, In-Skin/External,
Centralized). When setting the DISA
and DID Operating Mode, you make
an entry for each Night Service
mode.
(Mode 1~8) All Trunks =
Ring Group 1
22-13-01
25-01-01
25-03-01
2 - 382
DID Intercept Ring Group
2
DID Trunk Group to
Translation Table Assignment
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With Incorrect Dialing
3
3
3
3
3
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
25-04-01
25-05-01
25-06-02
25-07-01
25-07-02
25-07-04
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With No Answer/Busy
For each trunk port (001~200), set
the operating mode of each DISA
trunk. This sets what happens to the
call when the DISA or Automated
Attendant caller calls a busy or
unanswered extension. The call can
either disconnect (0) or Transfer to
an alternate destination (a ring
group, In-Skin/External,
Centralized). When setting the DISA
and DID Operating Mode, you make
an entry for each Night Service
mode.
Ring Groups:
1~100
Trunk Ports:
001~200
Day/Night Mode:
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 0)
For each trunk that is answered by
the VRS, enter the VRS message
(1~48) the outside caller hears if
they dial incorrectly after answer. If
you enter 0, the call reroutes
according to Program 25-03 and
Program 25-04. Make one entry for
each Night Service mode.
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
Set up single digit dialing for
Automated Attendant callers. For
each VRS Message programmed to
answer outside calls, specify:
The digit the Automated
Attendant caller dials (1~12,
where 10 = 0, 11 = and 12 = #).
(Keep in mind that if you assign
destinations to digits three and
four, outside callers cannot dial
system extensions that begin with
that digit.)
The destination reached (four
digits maximum) when the caller
dials the single digit code.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time
After answering a VRS/DISA trunk,
the system waits this time for the
caller to dial the first digit of the DISA
password. If the caller fails to dial in
this time, the system drops the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring No
Answer routing (set in Program 2503 and Program 25-04).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Set the answering waiting time of the
automatic answering extension
when an incoming DID trunk call is
received.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
VRS/DISA Error Message
Assignment
VRS/DISA One-Digit Code
Attendant Setup – Destination
Number
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Calling Time to Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 383
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
25-07-05
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the announcement time of the
automatic answering extension
before an incoming DID trunk caller
is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
25-07-06
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the
ACI before an incoming DID trunk
caller is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
25-07-11
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time
Set the time the system waits after
receiving an incoming VRS/DISA
call before the system automatically
answers the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy
extension (and Program 25-04-01 =
0), the system plays busy tone for
this time before disconnecting.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Delayed VRS Answer Time
Assign the delay time from switching
from a normal incoming status to
DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the
call switches to DID mode
immediately.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
E&M Tie Line Basic Setup –
DID/E&M Start Signaling
Set the start signaling mode for DID
and tie trunks. DID and tie trunks can
use either immediate start or wink
start signaling.
0 = 2nd Dial Tone
1 = Wink (default)
2 = Immediate
3 = Delay
(default = 2)
3
E&M Tie Line Basic Setup –
Receive Dial Type for E&M Tie
Line
For DID and tie trunks, use this
option to set the trunks signaling
type (Dial Pulse or DTMF).
Related Programming
10-09
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
(default = 1)
3
25-07-13
25-07-14
34-01-01
34-01-02
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Direct Call by Time Schedule
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-10-35
Service Code Setup (for
Administrator) – Dial-In Mode
Switching
Assign the service code Dial-In
Mode Switching.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for one-touch
access to the Dial-In Mode
Switching setup code (Code 88).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
Enable (1) or Disable (0) an
extension ability to manually change
Dial-In Modes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
20-07-26
2 - 384
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
2
3
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
22-02-01
22-11-02
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Target Number
For each Night Service Mode, enter
service type 8 when the trunk
should be a DID (DDI) Mode
Switching trunk.
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
extension the system dials after
translation.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
2
3
3
Maximum 24 digits
(default not assigned)
3
Do not assign Received Digits
in PRG 22-11-01 when using
DID Call by Time Schedule.
22-17-01
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – Received
Dial
Use to define the received numbers
for each Dial-In Conversion Table
(Program 22-17-02, 22-17-03 and
22-17-04).
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
22-17-02
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – Start of
Time
Use to define the Starting Time for
each DID Translation table in
Program 22-17-01.
0000~2359
(Time)
(default = 0000)
3
22-17-03
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – End of
Time
Use to define the Ending Time for
each DID Translation table in
Program 22-17-01.
0000~2359
(Time)
(default = 0000)
3
22-17-04
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – Dial-In
Conversion Table
Number
Used to assign each time pattern to
a DID Translation Table Entry in
Program 22-11.
0~2000
(default = 0)
3
3
Operation
DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.
To Activate DID Call by Time Schedule:
1.
At any display multiline terminal, press Speaker.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 385
Issue 1.0
2.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Dial the Dial-In Mode Switching Service Code (Default = Not assigned).
- OR -
Press the Dial-In Mode Switching Programmable Function key (Program 15-07-01, 88, or SC 751
Key Code 88).
3.
Dial 1~100 (table number).
4.
Dial the Time Pattern 1~8.
Table 2-8 LED Flash Patterns
2 - 386
Time Pattern
LED Appearance
Pattern 1
Off
Pattern 2
On
Pattern 3
Slow Flash
Pattern 4
Fast Flash
Patterns 5~8
Off
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Description
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department Group
directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees always know
which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International
Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL telephone number, the call rings the operator on the
International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.
There are 200 available trunks, 64 Department Groups, 256 extensions and 256 virtual extensions.
DIL Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension DIL. If the DIL is not
answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a Technical
Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside Sales department. If the Inside Sales
calls are not answered, they ring into the Technical Service department.
Conditions
If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs
up.
If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as
follows:
1. The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in Program 22-08.
2. If there is no 22-08 assignment, the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments
in Program 22-04 and Program 22-05.
3.
If none of the destinations in steps 1~2 above are available, the call continues to ring
until a destination becomes free.
The DIL follows call forwarding programming, even to voice mail.
When a call is transferred by Call Forwarding – No Answer, Call Forwarding – Busy, or DND,
the Reason for Transfer can display at the transferred extension.
You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier.
If a DIL destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group
programming (Program 22-08 then Program 22-05).
If a user puts the telephone in Do Not Disturb, calls routed to the telephone in DND do
not follow call forwarding.
A user can activate Group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension.
Program a name for a DIL in Program 14-01-01. This makes it easier to identify the incoming
call.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 387
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
If a Multiline Terminal is busy, a second incoming DIL call provides Call Alert Notification,
depending on chassis programming. The second DIL call waits in line for the user to answer
the call. The outside caller hears ringback tone while this occurs.
If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call rings the key. If not, the call rings an available
line appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates busy.
A DIL rings its assigned extension without Ring Group programming. A DIL only rings its
assigned extension. It does not ring other extensions in a Ring Group.
Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason a
call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Department Calling
Do Not Disturb
Group Call Pickup
Name Storing
Off-Hook Signaling
Paging, External
2 - 388
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Programmable Function Keys
Ring Groups
Transfer
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
20-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
To have the DIL ring a key, program
a line key for the DIL trunk.
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
3
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
2 - 389
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-23
22-01-04
22-02-01
22-04-01
22-07-01
22-08-01
2 - 390
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this time
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign each DIL Service Type 4.
Make an entry for each Night Service
mode.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
DIL Assignment
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Assign the extensions that should
receive the overflow to the ring group
programmed in Program 22-08. Set
the ringing in Program 22-06.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
Set the destination extension
number for each DIL – for each Night
Service mode. The destination can
be an extension port, virtual
extension number, or Department
Group pilot number (as assigned in
Program 11-07-01).
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
For each DIL with delayed ringing,
enter the DIL No Answer Ring
Group. An unanswered DIL rings this
group after the DIL No Answer Time.
Make an entry for each Night Service
mode.
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Press the flashing line key for DIL on the multiline terminal.
Pressing the flashing Answer Key puts the first call on hold and answers the second incoming call. This
can be repeated until all incoming calls are answered.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lift the handset to answer the call.
If you do not answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., the DIL No Answer Ring Group).
To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
At the multiline terminal, press the line key for DIL.
- OR -
Dial # 9 and the DIL trunk number (e.g., 005).
- OR -
Dial 704 and the DIL trunk group number (e.g., 05).
- OR -
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access.
3.
Dial the number.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 391
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 392
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could
help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the company trunks
for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee:
Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk
Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)
Waits for a second unique dial tone
Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension
DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the DISA
trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the extension must have a Call
Appearance (CAP) key to answer the call.
You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a normal
trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA trunks when the
caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.
DISA allows 15 users, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 200 trunks.
DISA Class of Service
DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you to
control the ability of the DISA callers dialing into your system. When a DISA caller first accesses the
system, they can be prompted to enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates the
password entered with a specific user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class of
Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the DISA Class
of Service does not allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of Service options are:
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls. Any toll
charges are incurred by the system. The call follows the system Trunk Group Access or Automatic
Route Selection – whichever is enabled.
Trunk Group Access
DISA callers may be able to access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system. To
access a Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 704 followed by the Trunk Group number (Trunk
Groups 1~100). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group. Trunk
Group Access bypasses the system Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 0
access, any toll charges are incurred by the system.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 393
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
The System Speed Dial dialing bins may be available to DISA callers. This could save the DISA
caller time when dialing. To access the System Speed Dialing bins, the caller dials Service Code #2
and the System Speed Dial Bin number.
Operator Calling
A DISA caller may be able to dial 0 for the system operator.
Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent
facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.
Direct Trunk Access
DISA callers may be able to select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To directly
access a trunk, the user dials Service Code #0 followed by the trunk number (e.g., 001). This allows
the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct Trunk Access bypasses the
system Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 0 access, any toll charges are
incurred by the system.
Call Forward
DISA callers may be able to set Call Forwarding to redirect extension calls to another extension. Call
Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area.
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
The DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In option allows a DISA/Tie Line caller to break into another extension
user’s established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding party and the
two parties on the initial call.
DISA Toll Restriction
The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the system Toll Restriction. For
example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing a 1300 service. When an incoming DISA caller
tries to use system trunks to dial 1300, Toll Restriction denies the call.
DISA Operating Modes
The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or
unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring
Group (called the DISA Transfer Destination).
Department Calling with Overflow Message
If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice prompt,
“Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free.” while the caller
waits. The interval between the voice prompts is the VRS Waiting Message Interval Time. When an
extension in the Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes through. If the
Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time, the DISA call routes to the
overflow destination or disconnects. (What happens to the unanswered call is set by the DISA Operating
Mode). The Overflow Message requires a VRS.
2 - 394
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls
You can set up the system to provide a warning tone to DISA callers that have been on a call too long.
The warning tone can be just a reminder (which the caller can ignore) or can be followed by a forced
disconnect of the call. When the DISA caller hears the warning tone, they have the option of dialing a
code to continue the conversation or disconnect.
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes
Users can use the option to use a Continue or Disconnect service code. The Continue service code
extends the conversation for a programmed time. If the user enters the Disconnect service code, the call
is immediately disconnected.
Example:
The following example indicates how a call will be handled with the system programmed as follows:
Program 14-01-25: 1
Program 20-28-01: #
Program 20-28-02: No Setting
Program 20-28-03: 180
Program 24-02-07: 600 (Used only with manually transferred Tandem Trunk calls)
Program 24-02-10: 30 (Used only with manually transferred Tandem Trunk calls)
Program 25-07-07: 600 (Used only with automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls or DISA calls)
Program 25-07-08: 30 (Used only with automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls or DISA calls)
1. An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA
caller).
2. After 10 minutes (Tandem Trunking = Program 24-02-07 or DISA = Program 25-07-07), a warning tone is
heard and the user dials # (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3. After three minutes (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After 30 seconds (Tandem
Trunking = Program 24-02-10 or DISA = Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected.
Conditions
The DISA caller must use an analog (DTMF) telephone. DISA is compatible with calling
devices that meet the DTMF signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA
trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start.
The Continue/Disconnect code must be DTMF.
With an analog trunk, the Continue/Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from the
opposite side trunk. With an ISDN trunk, Program 14-01-25 must be enabled to detect the
Continue/Disconnect code.
The Continue/Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk.
Continue/Disconnect codes do not work if all DTMF receivers are busy.
When used with the Networking feature, both systems must be programmed the same.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 395
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
In a system with ARS enabled:
When a DISA caller dials 0 for an outside call (if allowed), the system routes the call via ARS.
In a system with ARS disabled:
When a DISA caller dials 0 for an outside call (if allowed), the system uses the routes
programmed for Trunk Group Routing.
Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason a
call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer or DND).
Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for manually transferred Tandem Trunk
calls, automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls, and DISA calls.
Tandem Trunking also uses the Continue/Disconnect codes DISA uses.
Department Calling with Overflow Message requires a DSP daughter board for VRS.
DISA can only be set to call forward to another extension. Call Forward Off-Premise is not
supported.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Remote Analog DTMF telephones
Required Component(s)
CPU Daughter Board PZ-VM21 and VM8000 InMail (for Announcements)
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Long Conversation Cutoff
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
2 - 396
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Transfer
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
2
Reserve at least one circuit for DTMF
reception (entry 0 or 2).
Use the following as a guide when
allocating DTMF receivers:
In light traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every 10
devices that use them.
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every five
devices that use them.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available
3
3
11-01-01
System Numbering
Used to define the system numbering
plan.
Refer to UNIVERGE
SV8100 System
Program Manual
11-09-02
Trunk Access Code – 2nd Trunk
Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in
Program 11-01 for 2nd (Alternate)
Trunk Route Access.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default not assigned)
14-01-02
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Level
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Level
Customize the transmit and receive
levels of the CODEC Gain Types for
each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
3
14-01-03
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 397
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
14-01-13
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
If DISA caller can place outgoing
calls through the system (refer to
Program 20-14 in the UNIVERGE
SV8100 Programming Manual),
enable loop supervision (1) for the
DISA trunk. If DISA caller cannot use
the system trunks for outgoing calls,
enter 0 to disable loop supervision.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
System Options – DTMF Receive
Active Time
After answering the call, the system
attaches a DTMF receiver to the
DISA trunk for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-13-23
20-14-01
20-14-02
2 - 398
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the destination
extension does not have a trunk
or CAP key available for the
second call and a previous call
is ringing the extension but has
not yet been answered, the
second caller hears busy
regardless of this program
setting.
3
3
20-01-05
20-09-01
2
3
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – First Digit
Absorption (Delete First Digit
Dialed)
For tie lines, Enable or Disable the
ability to absorb (ignore) the first
incoming digit. Use this to make the
tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit tie line service. This
option does not apply to DISA.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Routing/ARS Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9
for Trunk Group Routing or
Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-14-03
20-14-04
20-14-05
20-14-06
20-14-07
20-14-08
20-14-09
20-14-10
20-14-11
21-15-01
22-01-11
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
access trunk groups for outside calls
(Service Code 704).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Outgoing System
Speed Dialing
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use System Speed Dialing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Operator Calling
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 0
for the telephone system operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Internal Paging
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use
the telephone system Internal
Paging.
0 =Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – External Paging
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use
the telephone system External
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Direct Trunk Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use
Direct Trunk Access (Service Code
#9).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Forced Trunk
Disconnect <Not for ISDN
T-point>
This option Enables or Disables a tie
trunk caller ability to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 3).
This option is not available to DISA
callers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Call Forward Setting
by Remote via DISA
Enable or Disable a DISA caller
ability to use the Call Forward service
codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-1105).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
In an extension Class of Service,
enable (1) or disable (0) a DISA or tie
trunk user from using the Barge-In
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Individual Trunk Group Routing
for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed
when a user dials the Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code. Refer to Trunk
Group Routing to set up outbound
routing.
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – VRS Waiting Message
Interval Time
Setup the duration time between
announcing the VRS Waiting
Message for Auto – Attendant &
Queuing. The message is repeatedly
sent out in the specified time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
2 - 399
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
22-02-01
22-04-01
25-01-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode
For DISA operation, set the trunk
service type to 2. You can have a
different service type for each Night
Service mode.
Assign the extensions that should
receive the overflow. Set the ringing
in Program 22-06.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
3
Select whether the DISA trunk uses
Extension number/Service code
specify (0) or Dial Conversion Table
(1).
0 = Extension Number
Service Code Specify
(Intercom)
1 = Use Dial
Conversion Table
(default = 0)
3
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– DISA User ID
Select whether or not the DISA User
IDshould be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
3
25-01-03
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm
Select whether the DISA transfer
alarm should be used.
0 = Normal
1 = Alarm
(default = 0)
3
25-02-01
VRS/DISA VRS Message
Assign the source and VRS message
number to be used as the Automated
Attendant Message for each trunk
(001~200) which is assigned as a
VRS/DISA.
0 = No Message
1 = 01~100 (VRS
Messages)
2 = 01~4 (ACI Group
Number)
3 = 01~64 (Extension
Group Number)
(default = 0)
3
Set the operating mode of each DISA
trunk. This sets what happens to the
call when the DISA caller dials
incorrectly. The call can either
disconnect (0), transfer to an
alternate ring group destination, or
transfer to In-Skin/External Voice
Mail, or Centralized Voice Mail.
(Mode 1~8) All Trunks
= Ring Group 1
2 - 400
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With Incorrect Dialing
3
3
25-01-02
25-03-01
2
3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
25-04-01
25-05-01
25-06-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With No Answer/Busy
VRS/DISA Error Message
Assignment
VRS/DISA One-Digit Code
Attendant Setup – Next
Attendant Message Number
Set the operating mode of each DISA
trunk. This sets what happens to the
call when the DISA caller calls a busy
or unanswered extension. The call
can either disconnect (0), or transfer
to an alternate ring group destination,
In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or
Centralized Voice Mail.
Ring Groups:
1~100
Trunk Ports:
001~200
Day/Night Mode:
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 0)
Assign the VRS message number to
be used as the Automated Attendant
error message. For each VRS/DISA
trunk that the VRS answers, enter the
VRS message (1~48) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If
you enter 0 (i.e., no error message),
the call reroutes according to
Program 25-03 and Program 25-04.
For each trunk, you make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
Set up single digit dialing through the
VRS. This gives VRS callers singlekey access to extensions, the
company operator, Department
Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For
each VRS message set to answer
outside calls (see Program 25-02 and
Program 25-05), you specify:
The digit the VRS caller dials
(0~9, , #). (Keep in mind that if
you assign destinations to digits,
outside callers cannot dial system
extensions, starting with that digit.
The destination reached (eight
digits maximum) when the caller
dials the specified digit.
The destination can be an extension,
a Department Calling pilot number or
the Voice Mail master number. A
one-digit code can be assigned for
each Automated Attendant message.
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
101 = Voice MAil
Answers
104 = Refer to 25-04:
VRS/DISA Transfer
Ring Group with No
Answer/ Busy
105 = Dial the other
extension
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
2 - 401
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
25-06-02
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Set up single digit dialing for
Automated Attendant callers. For
each VRS Message programmed to
answer outside calls, specify:
The digit the Automated Attendant
caller dials (1~12, where 10 = 0,
11 = and 12 = #). (Keep in mind
that if you assign destinations to
digits three and four, outside
callers cannot dial system
extensions that begin with that
digit.)
The destination reached (four
digits maximum) when the caller
dials the single digit code.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
After answering the DISA trunk, the
system waits this time for the caller to
dial the first digit of the DISA
password. If the caller fails to dial
during this time, the system drops the
call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
A DISA caller can ring an extension
for this time before the system sets
the call as a Ring No Answer. After
this time expires, the call follows the
programmed Ring No Answer
routing. (Set to Program 25-03 and
25-04.)
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Disconnect after VRS/DISA
retransfer to IRG
From DISA trunk, when the call may
go to Incoming Ring Group of PRG
25-03/25-04. This setting determines
how long the call is ringing in the IRG.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Calling Time to Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the answering waiting time of the
automatic answering extension when
an incoming DID trunk call is
received.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the announcement time of the
automatic answering extension
before an incoming DID trunk caller is
disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
25-07-06
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the
ACI after which an incoming DID
trunk caller is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
3
25-07-07
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller or
any automatically transferred trunkto-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation can talk before the
Long Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
3
25-07-01
25-07-02
25-07-03
25-07-04
25-07-05
2 - 402
VRS/DISA One-Digit Code
Attendant Setup – Destination
Number
2
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
25-07-08
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting a
a DISA or any automatically
transferred trunk-to-trunk (such as
Tandem Trunking) call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an
Internal Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system terminates
the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length an
External Page is placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system terminates
the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time
Set the time the system waits after
receiving an incoming VRS/DISA call
before the system automatically
answers the call (0~64800 seconds).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy
extension (and Program 25-04 = 0),
the system plays busy tone for this
time before disconnecting.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
25-07-14
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Delayed VRS Answer Time
Assign the delay time from switching
from a normal incoming status to DID
Mode. If this time is set to 0, the call
switches to DID immediately.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
25-08-01
DISA User ID Setup – Password
For each DISA user, set the 6-digit
password.
ID 01 = 000001
ID 02 = 000002
:
ID 15 = 000015
Assign a DISA Class of Service for
each user. Assign the DISA Class of
Service options in Program 20-14.
The DISA Class of Service cannot be
0. Program 20-06 cannot be used to
assign Class of Servise to DISA
trunks.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Function Class = 1~15
(default = 1)
Use this program to assign the Trunk
Group Route chosen when a user
places a DISA call into the system
and dials 0. Set Trunk Group Routing
in Program 14-06. Enable or Disable
DISA caller ability to dial 9 in
Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to
each DISA Class of Service (1~15).
The system assigns a DISA Class of
Service to a call based on the
password the DISA caller dials.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Route Table Number =
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
25-07-09
25-07-10
25-07-11
25-07-13
25-09-01
25-10-01
Class of Service for DISA Users
Trunk Group Routing for DISA
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 403
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
25-11-01
25-12-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DISA Toll Restriction Class
Alternate Trunk Group Routing
for DISA
If the system uses Toll Restriction,
enter a Toll Restriction Class (1~15)
for each DISA user (1~15). The
system uses the Toll Restriction
Class you enter in Program 21-05
and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class
assigned to a DISA call is based on
the DISA Class of Service and user,
which is determined by the password
the caller dials. You cannot use
Program 21-04 cannot be used to
assign Toll Restriction to DISA
trunks.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Toll Restriction Class =
1~15
(default = 2)
Assign the trunk route that DISA
Callers access if they dial the
Alternate Trunk Route Access Code.
Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing
on page 2-229 for more information
on setting up Alternate Trunk Route
Access.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Route Table Number =
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
2
3
3
3
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes
Program
Number
14-01-25
22-07-01
20-28-01
2 - 404
Level
Program Name
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Continued/Discontinued
Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation
When Program 24-02-10 is set to
disconnect a trunk after the defined
time, determine whether or not a
user should have the ability to use
the continue/disconnect code.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)
DIL Assignment
Assign the master/pilot number of
the voice mail group from Program
11-07-01 as the DIL destination. If all
Voice Mail ports are in the same
unique Extension (Department)
Group (see Program 16-02 above),
the DIL rings another Voice Mail port
if its assigned port is busy.
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
When Program 14-01-25 is enabled,
determine the 1-digit code the user
should dial (0~9, , #) to extend the
conversation for the time defined in
Program 20-28-03. If the Continue
and Disconnect codes are
programmed the same (e.g., #), the
system follows the "Continue"
operation. Using the Continue code
before the warning tone is heard has
no action.
0~9, #,
(default not assigned)
Trunk to Trunk Conversation –
Conversation Continue Code
2
3
3
3
3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk to Trunk Conversation –
Conversation Disconnect Code
When Program 14-01-25 is enabled,
determine the 1-digit code the user
should dial (0~9, , #) to
immediately disconnect their call.
Using the Disconnect code before
the warning tone is heard
disconnects the call.
0~9, #,
(default not assigned)
Trunk to Trunk Conversation –
Conversation Continue Time
When Program 14-01-25 is enabled,
determine the time a call is extended
when the user dials the Continue
code (defined in Program 20-28-01).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
System Options for Transfer –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release
Warning Tone
This timer starts when a trunk begins
talking with another trunk (for
example: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer/
Tandem Trunking). When this time
expires, a warning tone is heard. If
Program 24-02-10 is set, the
conversation disconnects after that
time expires. This timer is set again
when the external digit time expires.
One of the trunks used must be an
analog trunk (or leased line).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
2
3
3
3
3
This applies to manually
transferred Tandem Trunk and
DISA calls.
24-02-10
System Options for Transfer –
Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk
Determine how long a conversation
continues after the time in Program
24-02-07 expires. If this option is set
to 0, the conversation is
disconnected immediately. This
program has no affect if Program 2402-07 is set to 0. One of the trunks
used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
3
This applies to manually
transferred Tandem Trunk and
DISA calls
25-07-07
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting a
DISA or any automatically
transferred trunk-to-trunk (such as
Tandem Trunking) call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard. If
Program 25-07-08 is set to 0, the call
is disconnected after the time
expires. This timer is set again when
the external digit time expires.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
3
This applies to automatically
transferred Tandem Trunk and
DISA calls.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 405
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
25-07-08
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
This timer determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting a
DISA call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard. This
program has no affect if Program
25-07-07 is set to 0.
2
3
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
3
This applies to automatically
transferred Tandem Trunk and
DISA calls.
Operation
To place a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2.
Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3.
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4.
Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5.
Dial an extension.
- OR -
Dial 0 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.
- OR -
Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).
- OR -
Dial 704 + a trunk group number (1~100) for an outside call.
- OR -
Dial #0 + a trunk number (1~200) for an outside call.
- OR -
Dial #2 + System Speed Dialing bin number.
- OR -
Dial 9 for the operator.
- OR -
Dial 701 + an Internal Paging Zone number (0, 1~9, 00, 01~64).
- OR -
Dial 703 + an External Paging Zone number (1~8 or 0 for All Call).
- OR -
Dial 710 + a busy extension number to barge in to a call.
2 - 406
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
To forward extension calls using a DISA call into the system (from any analog-type telephone):
1.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2.
Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3.
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4.
Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5.
Dial the Call Forward service code (as defined in Program 11-11-01 through Program 11-11-05).
6.
Dial the number of the extension to be forwarded.
7.
Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding or 0 to cancel Call Forwarding.
8.
Dial the extension number to which the calls will be forwarded.
To use the Continue code to extend a DISA call:
1.
An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by
DISA caller).
2.
After the programmed time (Program 25-07-07), a warning tone is heard and the user dials the
Continue code (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3.
After the programmed time (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After the
programmed time (Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected if the Continue code is not dialed
again.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 407
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 408
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Description
The DSS Console gives a multiline terminal user a Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks, and
system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call
processing (e.g., attendants, operators, or dispatchers). The
DSS Console simplifies:
Calling extensions and door boxes
Placing, answering and transferring outside calls
Making an External or Internal Page
Switching the Night Service mode
Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer
The DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate Answer. This lets a multiline terminal user with a
DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker. Transferred and dial 9 calls ring both DSS
Consoles and, if the VRS is installed, the main operator hears the message, “Your calls have been
forwarded”. Central office calls ring both consoles and no message is heard by the operator.
You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes (up to 29 digits long). This provides
the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One-Touch and Programmable Feature
Keys. The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code. For
example, storing 70401 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console user
presses the key.
The maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 32.
DSS Lamp Table Changed to Apply to DSS/Hotline Keys for Multiline Terminals
Using Programs 30-05-02~30-05-21 DSS Console Lamp Table, you can assign LED flash patterns for DSS
and Hotline keys on multiline terminals and DSS Consoles.
ACD/Non-ACD Agent DSS Lamping Available
With the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, Programs 30-05-02~30-05-21 allow a non-ACD DSS console to
light indicating the status of both non-ACD agents and ACD agents, but ACD agents do not show ACD status
(Logged In/Out, etc.), only idle, busy, etc.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 409
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
Changing flash patterns for DSS Consoles also changes them for Hotline keys.
When installing a DSS, the system must auto-detect the console for the LEDs to function
correctly. When connecting the DSS to an extension previously defined with another circuit
type, undefine the circuit type (enter 00 in Program 10-03-01 for the extension number), then
connect the DSS Console.
Programmable Function Keys for ACD codes ( 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19)
cannot be programmed on a DSS Console.
Programmable Function keys for Trunk Group ( 02), Virtual Extension ( 03), and Call
Appearance (CAP) Key ( 08) cannot be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does
not allow entry of the additional data required for these keys.
A user can use the One-Touch Programmable Function Key (code 01) to have DSS Console
keys for Personal Speed Dial and common and group Speed Dial.
Lighting status for ACD agents and non-ACD agents does not appear on the same console
type. For ACD agent’s lighting status, a DSS Console must be programmed as an ACD
console in Program 30-01-01. For non-ACD agents, the console must be programmed as a
business console.
A DSS key indicates only a Call Forwarding indication for extensions forwarded with
Immediate Call Forwarding.
A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls.
The DSS Console provides one-touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes. Refer
to Door Box on page 2-439 when programming Door Boxes.
The DSS Console provides one-touch Night Service switching. Refer to Night Service on
page 2-775 when programming Night Service options.
Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection,
Trunk Calling, Personal Speed Dial, Speed Dialing, and Service Code access.
The DSS Console provides one-touch External and Internal Page zone access. Refer to
Paging, External on page 2-807 and Paging, Internal on page 2-813.
You can program the DSS Console keys with service codes to provide the functions of many
of the Programmable Function keys. The stored service code can have up to three digits, but
it can have additional option codes added (e.g. to set Immediate Call Forward for all calls.
Trunk Group ( 02), Virtual Extension ( 03), and Call Appearance (CAP) Key ( 08) codes
can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.
The capacity of a console can be expanded by assigning a Page key (shift key). The Page
key (shift key) must be assigned on keys 55~60.
The expanded capacity for DSS Consoles (two pages), is not supported for DSS Consoles in
the ACD Monitor Mode.
2 - 410
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they can transfer to another station by pressing a
DSS key for that station. It is not necessary to press Transfer to transfer to another station
using a DSS key.
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they must press Transfer to transfer a call off site with a DSS
key.
Pauses can be entered in the dial string of a DSS/One Touch button. The pause is entered
as P in the dial string and causes the system to wait three seconds before sending the rest of
the digits that follow the P (pause). Multiple pauses can be entered.
The @ can be entered in the dial string of a DSS/One Touch button. The @ only applies to
ISDN and Intercom calls. When using the @, the system waits for the destination to answer
(answer supervision), and then sends the rest of the digits.
Entering a P (pause) in a DSS/One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls, Intercom
calls, or after the @ for ISDN calls.
Default Setting
No DSS Consoles assigned (in Program 30-02-01).
All DSS Console key ranges are ports 1~200.
Once a DSS Console is enabled, the console keys are DSS keys (Program 30-03-01).
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Call Forwarding
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Door Box
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 411
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Night Service
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External
Paging, Internal
Programmable Function Keys
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-01
15-02-08
2 - 412
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type
(B1).
Set to 1 for a DSS Console to have
one-touch operation. If set to 0, the
user must lift the handset before
pressing a DSS key for the call to
complete.
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic
Handsfree)
(default = 1)
2
3
3
3
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-13-06
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
20-17-01
Operator Extension – Operator’s
Extension Number
Define the extension numbers which
are to be used by operators.
Up to eight digits
(default = 101)
3
30-01-01
DSS Console Operating Mode
Set the mode of the system DSS
Consoles. The available options are
Regular (Business) Mode (0), Hotel
Mode (1), ACD Monitor Mode (2) or
Business/ACD Mode (3).
0 = Business Mode
1 = Hotel Mode
2 = ACD Monitor Mode
3 = Business/ACD
Mode
(default = 0)
3
20-13-49
30-02-01
DSS Console Extension
Assignment – Extension Number
The extension number for the
multiline terminal connected with the
DSS console (up to eight digits).
Up to eight digits.
(default not assigned)
30-03-01
DSS Console Key Assignment
Customize DSS Console keys to
function as DSS keys, Service Code
keys, Programmable Function Keys,
and One-Touch Calling keys. The
key [when defined as a DSS/OneTouch key (code 01)] can have any
function up to four digits (e.g.,
extension number or Service Code).
The function information (such as
extension number or Service Code)
would then be entered as the
additional data.
Key Number
001~500
0~99 (General
Functional Level)
97 = Door Box Access
key (additional data:
1~8 Door Box No.)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance
Functional Level)
Used to define the DSS Console
Alternate answer number.
Alternate DSS No.
01~32
0 = No Setting
(Default = 0)
30-04-01
DSS Console Alternate Answer
3
3
3
30-05-02
DSS Console Lamp Table – Busy
Extension
Use to define the LED patterns for
busy extensions on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 7 (On)]
3
30-05-03
DSS Console Lamp Table – DND
Extension
Use to define the LED patterns for
busy DND extensions on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 413
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
30-05-04
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Busy
Use to define the LED patterns for
busy ACD agents on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 7 (On)]
3
30-05-05
DSS Console Lamp Table – Out
of Schedule (ACD DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
out of schedule (ACD/DSS) on the
DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 0 (Off)]
3
30-05-06
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log Out (ACD DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
ACD agents that are logged out on
the DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 5 (IL)]
3
30-05-07
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log In (ACD DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
ACD agents that are logged in on the
DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]
3
30-05-08
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Emergency (ACD DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
ACD agent using emergency on the
DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 6 (IW)]
3
30-05-09
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 1 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 7 (On)]
3
30-05-10
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 2 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 1 (FL)]
3
30-05-11
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 3 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 2 (WK)]
3
30-05-12
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 4 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]
3
30-05-13
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 5 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7[(default = 5 (IL)]
30-05-14
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 6 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]
30-05-15
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 7 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7[(default = 6 (IW)]
30-05-16
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 8 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]
3
30-05-17
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 9 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]
3
30-05-18
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code 0 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 0 (Off)]
3
30-05-19
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]
3
2 - 414
3
3
3
3
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
30-05-20
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code # (Hotel DSS)
Use to define the LED patterns for
hotel status code # on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 5 (IL)]
3
30-05-21
DSS Console Lamp Table – VM
Message Indication
Use to define the LED patterns for
VM message indications on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]
3
30-10-01
DSS Console IP Terminal Setup –
MAC Address
Read Only program that displays the
MAC address of the IP terminal a
DSS console is associated with.
00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
(Default =
00-00-00-00-00-00)
3
3
Operation
Calling an extension from your DSS Console:
1.
Press the DSS Console key.
If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1.
If you do not have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Extension Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The assigned extension is...
On
Busy on a call
Off
Idle
Flashing Fast
In Do Not Disturb
Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console:
1.
Press the flashing DSS Console key assigned to the trunk.
If you do not have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Transferring a call using your DSS Console:
1.
Place or answer the call.
2.
Press Transfer to transfer the call.
3.
Press the DSS key for the extension to receive the transfer.
4.
(Optional) Announce the call.
If called party does not want the call, press the flashing line key to retrieve it.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 415
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Making an External Page using your DSS Console:
1.
Press the DSS Console External Page zone key (1~8).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you do not have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
External Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The External Page zone is...
On
Busy
Off
Idle
Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console:
1.
Press the DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Group key 1~64).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you do not have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
Internal Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The Internal Page zone is...
On
Busy
Off
Idle
Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console:
1.
Press the Night Service key.
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
When this key is ON...
The system is in the...
DAY
Day 1 Mode
NIGHT
Night 1 Mode
BREAK
Break 1 Mode
NIGHT 2
Night 2 Mode
Using a DSS Console key as a One-Touch or Programmable Function Key:
A user can have DSS Console keys programmed as One-Touch Keys. These keys can be used for Direct Station Selection,
Trunk Calling, Personal Speed Dial, Speed Dialing, and Service Code access. The stored service code cannot be longer
than three digits.
1.
Press the DSS Console key for function.
For example, you can forward your calls by pressing DSS key + 1 + destination. Your DSS key must have been
previously programmed for Call Forward.
2 - 416
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Directed Call Pickup
Description
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows a
user to conveniently answer a call for a co-worker from their own telephone. With Directed Call Pickup, an
extension user can pick up:
Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)
Direct Inward Lines
Transferred trunk calls
Transferred Intercom calls
Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls
Conditions
Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using
Directed Call Pickup.
Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call ringing at an ACD agent.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 417
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Department Calling
Group Call Pickup
Hold
Hotline
Park
Secretary Call Pickup
Secondary Incoming Extension
Transfer
Virtual Extensions
VM8000 InMail
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-25
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Call Pickup Own Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for direct call pickup – own
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 756)
3
11-12-26
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup for specified
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 768)
3
11-12-27
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup.
MLT, SLT
(default = #)
3
2 - 418
3
Directed Call Pickup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-28
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Another Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup for another
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 769)
11-12-29
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Extension Call
Pickup
Use to customize the Service
Codes for direct extension call
pickup.
MLT, SLT
(default =
11-12-30
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Specified Trunk
Answer
Use to customize the Service
Codes for specified trunk answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 672)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service to
extensions (1~15).
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-10-05
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-worker’s extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial
3.
Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.
.
If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it answers first.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 419
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 420
Directed Call Pickup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Directory Dialing
Description
Directory Dialing allows a Multiline Terminal user to select a co-worker or outside caller from a list of
names, rather than dialing the telephone number. Four types of Directory Dialing are available:
SPD
–
Speed Dials
EXT
–
co-worker’s Extensions
STA
–
Personal Speed Dials
TELBK
–
Telephone Book
Conditions
Directory Dialing sorts and searches directory names in alphabetical order (based on all
characters entered of the name) when the system starts up or reboots. The system resorts
extension names when:
You change Program 15-01-01 (Extension Numbers and Names).
Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name.
Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed Dial - System/
Group/Station, Intercom Calling and One-Touch Calling.
Extension Directory only shows a telephones/VEs that are connected and have a name
assigned in Program 15-01-01.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Display Multiline Terminals with Softkeys
Required Component(s)
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 421
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Name Storing
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Softkeys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
20-13-51
21-01-02
2 - 422
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name Appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name
and number should be listed (On)
or unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Intercom Interdigit Time
If a user waits longer than this time
between Directory Dialing steps,
Directory Dialing automatically
cancels.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
2
3
3
3
Directory Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To use Directory Dialing from a multiline terminal with an LCD:
1.
Press the Dir softkey.
2.
Press the softkey for the Directory Dialing type:
SPD
–
Speed Dials
EXT
–
co-worker’s Extensions
STA
–
Personal Speed Dials
TELBK –
Telephone Book
Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled. For example, if your
extension cannot normally use Speed Dial – System/Group/Station, Directory Dialing can not access it either.
3.
Dial letter/number range for the party you want to call (e.g., dial 2 for A, B, C or 2).
You can enter several letters to help narrow the search.
Press # to enter additional letters on the same key (ex: TOM = 8666#6).
4.
Press the Down Arrow softkey to jump to that section.
5.
Press the Volume
or
key to scroll through the list.
If you wait too long between your selections, Directory Dialing automatically cancels.
6.
Lift the handset or press the DIAL softkey, or press Speaker to place the selected call.
If you selected an outside call, it routes according to your system Trunk Group Routing/ARS setup.
To cancel Directory Dialing:
Press the Exit key.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 423
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 424
Directory Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Description
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status
signals. This lets users tell the type of calls by listening to the ringing/tones and watching the keys. It also
helps users monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets multiline terminal users
customize their Intercom and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users that work together closely. For
example, if several co-workers set their multiline terminals to ring at different pitches, each co-worker can
always tell which calls are for them. You can also customize the tones the system uses for splash tone,
confirmation tone, trunk ring tone, Intercom ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the chart below and
the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for more details.
Table 2-9 Distinctive Ringing: Tones and Flash Patterns
Program
Description
80-01-01~04 Service Tone Setup
Set the frequency of the system splash tone. This is the tone the
system uses, for example, to alert the user of an incoming
voice-announced Intercom call.
30-05-02~21 DSS Console Lamp Table
Set the DSS and Hotline key flash rates for busy, idle, DND, ACD Agent
status, and hotel options.
Conditions
Single line telephone users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of the telephone incoming ring.
If Program 22-03-01 is set to 0~3 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls follow the
ring pattern in Program 22-03-01 and the pitch in Program 15-02-02.
If Program 22-03-01 is set to 4~8 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls follow the
ring pattern in Program 22-03-01.
If Program 22-03-01 is set to 0~8 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 4~8, trunk calls follow the
ring pattern in Program 15-02-02.
If Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup is set to Incoming Ring Tone
Extension, then Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup must
have one of the priorities set to Incoming Ring Tone Extension.
The following voice mail features require system tones be changed in Program 80-01-02 to
work. Refer to the Programming section of the VM8000 InMail feature for details.
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Call Screening
Await Answer Transfer
When a ring group call rings a Single Line Station, the BLF indication shows busy.
The priority of the Large LED is as follows:
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 425
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
1. CO Call Ringing
2. Message Waiting Received
3. VM Message Waiting
4. Message Waiting Set
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Single Line Telephones
2 - 426
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-02-02
15-02-03
15-02-35
15-02-36
15-02-37
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Trunk Ring Tone
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Extension Ring Tone
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Message Waiting Lamp
Cycle for Calling Extension
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Message Waiting Lamp
Cycle for Called Extension
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Voice Mail Message Wait
Lamp Color
2
From the range specified in
Program 22-03-01, select the
multiline terminal extension trunk
ring tone.
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
(default = 2)
3
Select the extension intercom ring
tone.
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
(default = 8)
3
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has set Message
Waiting.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
(default = 7)
3
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has Message Waiting set
to the extension.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
(default = 3)
3
Use to set up various
message wait lamp cycle options
for lamp color.
0 = Green
1 = Red
(default = 1)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 427
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
15-02-38
15-08
15-10-01
20-13-49
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Voice Mail Message Wait
Lamp Cycle
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Setup
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Order Setup
2
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has a VM Message
Waiting set to the extension.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
(default = 3)
Use to assign a ring tone range
(0~4) to incoming virtual extensions
assigned to a Virtual Extension key
(Program 15-07).
ICM Tone Pattern,
0 = Pattern 1
1 = Pattern 2
2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
(default = 0)
3
When two or more virtual
extensions are set on a function key
on the telephone, and the tone
pattern by which the sound of each
extension differs, the priority of ring
sound is set up.
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension
Ring Tone
Order 1 Pattern 0 =
Pattern 1 (default)
Order 2 Pattern 1 =
Pattern 2 (default)
Order 3 Pattern 2 =
Pattern 3 (default)
Order 4 Pattern 3 =
Pattern 4 (default)
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station will
light when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
20-15-01
Ring Cycle Setup – Normal
Incoming Call on Trunk
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Normal Incoming Trunk calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 3)
3
20-15-02
Ring Cycle Setup – PBX, CES
Incoming Call
Used to define the ringing cycle for
PBX, CES incoming calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)
3
20-15-03
Ring Cycle Setup – Incoming
Internal Call
Used to define the ringing cycle for
incoming Internal Calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 3)
3
20-15-04
Ring Cycle Setup – DID/DISA/
VRS
Used to define the ringing cycle for
DID/DISA/VRS Calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)
3
20-15-05
Ring Cycle Setup – DID/DDI
Used to define the ringing cycle for
DID/DDI calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)
3
20-15-06
Ring Cycle Setup – Dial-In in the
E&M Tie Line
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Dial-In and E&M Tie Line calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 12)
3
20-15-07
Ring Cycle Setup – Door Box
Ringing for SLT
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Door Box ringing for SLT.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)
3
20-15-08
Ring Cycle Setup – Virtual
Extension Ring
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Virtual Extension Ringing.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)
3
2 - 428
3
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
20-15-09
Ring Cycle Setup – Callback
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Callback.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 11)
3
20-15-10
Ring Cycle Setup – Alarm for
SLT
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Alarm for SLT.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 5)
3
20-15-11
Ring Cycle Setup – VRS Waiting
Used to define the ringing cycle for
Incoming VRS Waiting Message.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)
3
Set the ring tone range (1~9) for
each trunk.
0~8
(Ring Tone Pattern
1~4)
(Melody 1~ Melody 5)
(default = 0)
Service Tone Setup – Repeat
Count
Customize the system basic tones
and system service tones. You
need to reset for the changes to
take affect.
0~255
(default 0 = until
On-Hook)
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the chassis
must be reset for the changes to
take effect.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Await Answer Transfer
1~33
(0 = No Tone)
(33 = Default Time
Slot)
Refer to Table 2-10
Basic Tone Table –
Tone 06 on page 2-430
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the chassis
must be reset for the changes to
take effect.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Await Answer Transfer
Refer to Table 2-11
Basic Tone Table –
Tone 14 on page 2-430
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the chassis
must be reset for the changes to
take effect.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Await Answer Transfer
Refer to Table 2-12
Basic Tone Table –
Tone 39 on page 2-430
Message Incoming
3
Call
22-03-01
80-01-01
80-01-02
80-01-02
(14)
80-01-02
(39)
Trunk Ring Tone Range
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 429
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-10 Basic Tone Table – Tone 06
Tone 06
Unit
Basic Tone
Duration
Gain Level
1
11 ~ 480/620Hz -13/-13dB
300ms
32
2
0 - No Tone
300ms
32
3
0 - No Tone
0ms
4
0 - No Tone
0ms
5
0 - No Tone
0ms
6
0 - No Tone
0ms
7
0 - No Tone
0ms
8
0 - No Tone
0ms
Table 2-11 Basic Tone Table – Tone 14
Tone 14
Unit
Basic Tone
Duration
Gain Level
1
10 ~ 440/480Hz -13/-13dB
1000ms
32
2
0 - No Tone
2100ms
32
3
0 - No Tone
0ms
4
0 - No Tone
0ms
5
0 - No Tone
0ms
6
0 - No Tone
0ms
7
0 - No Tone
0ms
8
0 - No Tone
0ms
Table 2-12 Basic Tone Table – Tone 39
Tone 39
2 - 430
Unit
Basic Tone
Duration
Gain Level
1
12 ~ 440/620Hz -16dB
500ms
32
2
0 - No Tone
500ms
32
3
0 - No Tone
0ms
4
0 - No Tone
0ms
5
0 - No Tone
0ms
6
0 - No Tone
0ms
7
0 - No Tone
0ms
8
0 - No Tone
0ms
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To listen to the incoming ring choices:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 711.
3.
Dial 1 to check ringing for intercom calls.
- OR -
Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls.
4.
For Intercom calls, select the pitch you want to check (1~8).
- OR -
For trunk calls, select the pitch (1~8) and the tone (1~4) you want to check.
5.
Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
To change the pitch of your incoming ring (multiline terminal only):
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 720.
3.
Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls.
- OR -
Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls.
4.
Select the pitch (1~8).
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 431
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 432
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Do Not Disturb
Description
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to
work by the telephone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND
while their telephone is idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys.
The user may use the telephone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
Five Do Not Disturb options are available at each extension. These options can be accessed via Multiline
Terminal Softkeys, DND feature key or DND system access code.
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked.
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked.
3 = All calls blocked.
4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked.
0 = Do Not Disturb canceled.
Multiline Line Terminals display the following to indicate the type of DND that is set.
1 = DND EXTERNAL
2 = DND INTERCOM
3 = DND ALL
4 = DND TRANSFER
Conditions
Do Not Disturb access code is programmable via Program 11-11-08.
If there is no Call Forwarding key (Program 15-07: 10~17), the DND key blinks when the
extension is forwarded.
Call Arrival (CAR) Key/ Virtual Extension (VE) do not support DND Programmable Function
keys.
Multiline Terminal users can activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while on a call. This
option is not available for single line telephones.
When DND and Call Forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If Busy
and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the Busy forwarding.
If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the
forwarded extension hear DND tone.
If an extension activates DND option 4, other extensions can still forward calls to it, but the
callers hear DND tone.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 433
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension using
any of the following methods:
1. Program 11-12-01 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) – Bypass Call
(default: 707)
2. Program 11-16-06 Single Digit Service Code Setup – DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
(default: No Setting)
3. OVRD Softkey
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension while the call is
ringing to the user telephone.
DND modes 1~3 causes calls to follow Program 22-08 programming, then Program 22-05
programming even if the extension is forwarded.
When Selectable Display Messaging is set as DND All, all other DND modes are canceled
when Selectable Display Messaging is canceled.
When DND and any Call Forwarding is set, the call forwards immediately.
Default Settings
Enabled for all extensions.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
2 - 434
Do Not Disturb
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Selectable Display Messaging
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-08
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Do Not
Disturb
Assign Service Code for DND.
MLT, SLT
(default = 747)
3
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Assign Service Code for DND.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
3
11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
If a single digit service code is to be
used, assign an available code
number.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys (DND = 3).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-13-04
20-13-40
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
3
3
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to use Call Forwarding/DND
Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 435
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle:
Multiline Terminal Using Softkeys
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press Program softkey.
3.
Press DND softkey.
4.
Press Set softkey.
5.
Choose the following softkey
Ext ICM ALL Cfwto
6.
Ext=Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
ICM=Incoming Intercom, Paging, call forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked.
ALL=All Calls Blocked
Cftwto=Call Forwards Blocked
7.
To Cancel DND
8.
Do not lift handset
9.
Press Program softkey
10.
Press DND softkey.
11.
Press Cncl softkey.
Multiline Terminal Using Feature Key or Access Code
1.
Do not lift the handset.
2.
Press the DND feature key programmed in (Program15-07-01 or SC:751:03).
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial 747.
3.
Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked
3 = All Calls Blocked
4 = Call Forwards Blocked
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 747.
2 - 436
Do Not Disturb
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 1.0
Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
2 = Paging, Incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked
3 = All Calls Blocked
4 = Call Forwards Blocked
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 437
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 438
Do Not Disturb
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Door Box
Description
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the
door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all
extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the
handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to
have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the
delivery entrance; they answer the Door Box chimes instead. Any number of system extensions can
receive Door Box chime tones.
Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike. Use
these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Door Box chimes, a multiline
terminal user can press the Recall key to activate the Door Box contacts. This in turn releases the electric
strike on the entrance door. The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact
ratings shown in the following table:
Door Box Specifications
Contact Configuration
Normally Open
Maximum Load
60mA @30 VDC
10mA @90 VDC
Maximum Initial Contact Resistance
50m Ohms
The system can have up to eight Door Boxes. Six chime tones are available.
Conditions
The Door Box Feature Requires a PGD(2)-U( ) ADP. A maximum of 56 PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
units can be installed in an UNIVERGE SV8100 system. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100
System Hardware Manual for more information.
If a PGD(2)-U( ) ADP circuit has a Door Box (doorphone) connected, you cannot use that
circuit for External Paging.
Door Boxes can ring multiline, single line, and wireless telephones.
External Call forward by Doorphone can forward Doorphone calls Off-Premise while a user is
away. This feature only works for ISDN lines.
Off-hook signaling is available for Door Boxes. If an extension user is on the telephone, the
Large LED flashes indicating the Door Box ringing, and the display shows a call from the
door box.
Each channel in the PGD(2)-U( ) ADP has a jumper which must be set for Door Box
operation. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for additional details.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 439
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
A Single Line Telephone (SLT), connected to an APR does not ring when the Door Phone
rings the multiline telephone.
Dterm cordless telephones are not supported with the Door Box feature.
The door strike relay can only be activated from the recall key on a multiline phone.
The door strike cannot be activated when a door box is forwarded off-premise.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility
Paging, External
Single Line Telephones
Wireless DECT (SIP)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
2 - 440
Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-01
(1)
10-03-06
10-05-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
General Purpose Relay Setup –
Slot No. Physical Port of DLC
Sensor Circuit No.
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type
(B1).
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0))
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type.
For DLC package support, set the
terminal type to 8 [PGD (for Door
Box)]. First set 10-03-01 to 0 with
no device plugged into that port,
then plug the device in and the
system should recognize it as a
door box and then set Program
10-03-06.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)
Define which Relay circuits (5~8) on
a PGD(2)-U( ) ADP Adapter are
used for General Purpose Relay.
Slot No: 0~24
DCLA Port: 0~16
Relay No: 0, 5~8
After each entry,
pressing the
Transfer Key
advances to the
next entry.
(default = 0 - 0 - 0)
2
3
3
3
11-12-36
Service Code Access (for
Service Access) – Door Box
Access
If the service code for Doorphone
Access is not acceptable, change it
here.
MLT, SLT
(default = 702)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for External
Call Forward by Doorphone (Code
54).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
3
32-01-01
Door Box Timers – Door Box
Answer Time
Set the time a user has to answer
the Door Box chimes.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
32-01-02
Door Box Timers – Door Lock
Cancel Time
Set the time the Door Box strike
stays open when the single line
telephone user hookflashes or a
multiline terminal user presses
Recall.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 441
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
32-01-03
32-02-01
32-03-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Door Box Timers – Off-Premise
Call Forward by Door Box
Disconnect Timer
Define the conversation period for
an Off-Premise Call Forward by
Door Box call. When this timer
expires, the caller hears busy tone
for 3 seconds (fixed time), and the
call is then disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
Door Box Ring Assignments
Determine which Door Boxes
should ring which extensions by
entering the extension number.
Each Door Box can be programmed
to ring up to 32 extensions and an
extension can be programmed to
ring for multiple Door Boxes.
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
Set the chime pattern (0~6) for
each Door Box.
0 = None
1 = Door Box Ring 1
2 = Door Box Ring 2
3 = Door Box Ring 3
4 = Door Box Ring 4
5 = Door Box Ring 5
6 = Door Box Ring 6
default:
Door Box 1 = 1
Door Box 2 = 2
Door Box 3 = 3
Door Box 4 = 4
Door Box 5 = 5
Door Box 6 = 6
Door Box 7 = 1
Door Box 8 = 1
Door Box Basic Setup – Chime
Pattern
2
3
3
3
3
32-03-02
Door Box Basic Setup – CODEC
Transmit Gain Setup
Set the Transmit Gain for each
Door Box.
1~63 (-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB)
(default = 32)
3
32-03-03
Door Box Basic Setup – CODEC
Receive Gain Setup
Set the Receive Gain for each Door
Box.
1~63 (-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB)
(default = 32)
3
32-04-01
Doorphone Name Setup
This command defines the name of
each Doorphone
Up to 12 characters
(default not assigned)
3
Operation
To call a Door Box:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Speaker
2.
Dial 702.
3.
Dial Door Box Number (1~8).
2 - 442
Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 702.
3.
Dial Door Box Number (1~8).
To activate the Door Box strike:
Multiline Terminal
1.
While talking to the Door Box, press the Recall key.
Single Line 500/2500 Telephone
1.
While talking to the Door Box, hookflash.
To answer a Door Box chime:
1.
Lift the handset or press Speaker.
To Answer a Door Box call while busy on another call:
Multiline Terminal
If you are busy on a call, the display shows the incoming Door Box call and the large LED flashes.
1.
Press Hold to place your active call on hold.
2.
When you hear dial tone, dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus the door box number
(1~8) to answer the Door Box call.
To retrieve the original call, hang up with the door box and press Conf.
Single Line Telephone
If you are busy on a call, an off-hook signal is heard indicating the incoming Door Box call.
1.
Press the Flash key or hookflash to place your active call on hold.
2.
Dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus the door box number (1~8) to answer the Door
Box call.
To retrieve the original call, hang up. The original call rings the single line telephone.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 443
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the External Forward by Doorphone key (Program 15-07-01 or
SC 751, code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3.
Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4.
Press Speaker (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press External Forward by Doorphone key (Program 15-07-01 or SC
751, code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial 0 for Cancel.
2 - 444
Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Drop Key
Description
The Drop Key abandons a call while retaining the PBX/Centrex line to originate another call. The Drop
Key is provided by programming a Function Key. This feature allows Recall to be used to provide a
hookflash to the PBX or Central Office. A single line telephone user can use the Drop Key function with
an access code.
Conditions
The Drop key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO/PBX lines.
The Drop key cannot be used for internal, DID, or Tie line calls.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Flash
PBX Compatibility
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 445
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-42
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Flash on Trunk lines
Use to customize the flash on trunk
lines Service Codes.
SLT
(default = #3)
11-12-59
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Drop Operation
for SLT
Use to customize the trunk drop
operation for SLT Service Codes.
SLT
(default not assigned)
3
14-02-03
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Flash
Type
Use this option to select the flash
type.
0 = Open Loop Flash
1 = Ground
Always set this option
for Open Loop Flash
(0)
(default = 0)
3
14-02-04
3
This option lets you use Flash for
Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or
Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A
user implements Flash by pressing
the FLASH key while on a trunk
call.)
0 = Timed Flash
(Hooking)
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
(default = 0)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Transfer Key Operation
Mode
If the Conf key should access
Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0 or
1.
0 = Transfer
1 = Call back
2 = Hook
(default = 0)
3
15-03-04
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Flashing
Enables/disables Flash for single
line (500/2500 type) telephones.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 1)
3
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for Drop Key
(code 84) if required.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
15-02-05
2 - 446
Analog Trunk Data Setup –
Hooking Type
3
3
3
Drop Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-06-01
81-10-07
81-10-08
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
COI Initial Data Setup –
Hookflash Time Selection 1
COI Initial Data Setup –
Hookflash Time Selection 2
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Set the Flash duration (20 mS~5.0
sec) for analog trunk [COI( )-U( )
ETU] circuits.
Set the open loop disconnect
duration (20 mS~5.0 sec) for
analog trunk [COI( )-U( ) ETU]
circuits.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3
3
0 = 20 ms
1 = 40 ms
2 = 60 ms
3 = 80 ms
4 = 100 ms
5 = 140 ms
6 = 160 ms
7 = 200 ms
8 = 400 ms
9 = 600 ms
10 = 800 ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
[default = 4 (100ms)
All Trunks]
3
0 = 20 ms
1 = 40 ms
2 = 60 ms
3 = 80 ms
4 = 100 ms
5 = 140 ms
6 = 160 ms
7 = 200 ms
8 = 400 ms
9 = 600 ms
10 = 800 ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
[default = 14 (3.0
seconds)]
3
2 - 447
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To use the Drop key from a Multiline Terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press the Function key programmed as a Drop key.
2.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
3.
Dial the desired number.
To use Feature plus Recall from a Multiline Terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Press Recall.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
3.
Dial the desired number.
To use the Drop key feature from a single line telephone with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Hookflash.
2.
Receive internal dial tone.
3.
Dial the Service Code (Program 11-12-59, Default Not Assigned).
4.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
5.
Dial the desired number.
2 - 448
Drop Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Description
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Terminal may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 KTS. The DTR-4R-1( )
TEL uses 900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum (DSS) Technology and must be connected in tandem to a
multiline terminal.
The Dterm Cordless II cannot be used as standalone.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Dterm Cordless II (DTR-4R-1( ))
Feature
Digital Technology
900 MHz Spread Spectrum
LCD
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm
Yes
Dedicated Keys
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN,
REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Programmable Line Keys
4
50~350 feet
Operational Range
Message Waiting Indication
Icon
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
10
Determined by environmental conditions
Conditions
When a message is received the
icon is displayed.
When the RING OFF/ON switch on the right side is down the
When the battery is low, the
LOW
OFF icon is displayed.
icon is displayed.
When there is no transmission between the Base Unit and the handset for about five
minutes, there are no LCD or LED indications on the cordless terminal handset. Ringing
off-hook or pressing keys resumes LCD and LED indications.
The ring pattern for the cordless terminal can be selected by system programming and
multiline terminals.
When a cordless terminal is ringing, press the flashing function key programmed for DSS to
answer the call.
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.
A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 449
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
Multiple Base Units and handset units should not be closer than 20 feet anytime.
Radio interference causes interruptions in conversation. When this happens, your unit is not
defective. When noise continues, move to a different location while you talk. (You might even
need to move the base unit.) When the situation persists, contact NEC Unified Solutions,
Inc., National Technical Assistance Center (NTAC).
Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings have been found to
reduce telephone performance.
Dterm cordless phones are not supported with the Door Box feature.
The Dterm Cordless Lite II can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE SV8100 and
Series i Digital Multiline Telephones.
Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call will be
transferred when the Cordless Terminal is placed into an idle condition.
Dterm Cordless telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature.
Under certain conditions, the Hold Key and the Transfer Key behave the same way. To
prevent an unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, press the
Line Key for the call on hold to retrieve it from hold. Otherwise, the call is transferred when
the Cordless Terminal is returned to idle.
Default Setting
None
System Availability (US Only)
Terminals
DTR-4R-1( ) TEL
Required Component(s)
CD-8DLCA
-ORCD-8DLCA with PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
-ORCD-16DLCA
2 - 450
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-02
10-03-04
10-03-05
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 1.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 451
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
10-03-06
10-03-07
15-07-01
20-07-01
20-07-03
20-07-05
20-07-11
2 - 452
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Programmable Function Keys
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type.
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
2
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)
3
0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
12 = APR (for B2 Mode)
(193~512)
(default = 0)
3
Assign a Department Calling key (46)
so extension users can install or
remove themselves from the
Department Calling Group. Additional
keys can also be assigned for
Department Group features
immediate calling destination (58),
delayed calling destination (59) and
DND destination (60).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turns Off or On an extension for
manually Switching the Night Mode
(Service Code 718). This option must
be enabled for an extension to display
the Night indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability user ability to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the extension
to disconnect an Unsupervised
Conference in progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
3
3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-23
20-07-24
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk Port
Disable
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port Disable
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to record, erase or listen to VRS
messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turns an extension Off (0) or On (1)
an extension user ability to dial 4 or
Service Code 611 to listen to the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to dial Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
accumulated extension data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group (STG)
Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
department group (STG) data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
accumulated account code data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension ability
to receive CO Message Waiting
Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 453
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
2 - 454
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel dial-in mode
switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turns Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off or On outgoing trunk calling
for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls using
group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hotline/
Extension Ringdown
Turns Off or On Ringdown Extension
for extensions with this COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension allowing
force Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring mode
for ICM calls, enabling this option
prevents callers from changing the
call to voice announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group Step
Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicators should be allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for call address information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turns Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID information when a
call is placed. If block is enabled, the
system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code 1831 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the user
dialed digits (this requires Program
14-02-10 to be enabled). If block is
disabled, the system outdials the call
just as it was dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
display the name and number of the
extension that dialed 911 (US Only).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
override the trunk access map
programming for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for voice over to busy virtual
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 455
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
20-10-01
20-10-02
2 - 456
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Second
Call for DID/DISA/DIL/E&M
Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy in order for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a line or Call Appearance
(CAP) Keys available for the
second call and a previous call is
ringing the extension but has not
yet been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
2
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller ID
Display
Turns Off or On the Caller ID display
at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether an extension displays
the Caller Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call List
Existence
Determine whether or not the CHECK
LIST message is displayed to indicate
a missed call
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the Incoming
Call Time is displayed on the multiline
terminal LCD while the telephone is
ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
have calls queued if a call rings the
extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turns Off or On and extension ability
to display calling party information on
CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Group Call Pickup
(Within Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
calls ringing an extension Pickup
Group and ring group calls (Service
Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Group Call Pickup
(Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
calls ringing outside a group (Service
Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Group Call Pickup for
Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
a specific group using service code
768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Telephone Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Directed Call Pickup
for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension Pickup
Group (Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Meet-Me Conference
and Paging
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Meet-Me Conference
and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Automatic Off-Hook
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Universal Auto Answer
(no service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Virtual Extension
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to answer an incoming call on a
Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Call Pickup Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Pickup to Pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability user to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability user to set Call Forwarding
when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability user to set Call Forwarding
when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability user to set Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with Follow
Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 457
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
2 - 458
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Transfer Without
Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turns Off or On an extension
0 = Off
incoming Transfer pre-answer display. 1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Turns Off or On an extension user
Transfer Service) – Automatic On- ability to use Automatic On-Hook
Hook Transfer
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise (External
Call Forwarding)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On user ability to set up
Call Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to have a call which recalls from
hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk- toTrunk Transfer Restriction
Turns Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS Personal
Greeting (Message Greeting)
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
dial Service Code 4 7 to record,
listen to or erase the Personal
Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns Off or On a multiline terminal
user ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability in a Department Group to use
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0) or Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow normal
or extended Park (0 = Normal for
Program 24-01-06, 1 = Extended for
Program 24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turns Off or On ability of an extension
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction for
Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension
user ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically when
they hang up.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restrict
Unsupervised Conference
Allow or Deny an extension user
ability to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer (Tandem Trunking).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On the user ability to set
and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR
or Virtual Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call is
put on hold by an extension.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold (On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turns On or off an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turns Off or On the Warning Tone for
Long Conversation (not for single line
telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns Off or On extension ability to
use Long Conversation Cutoff for
incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns Off or On extension ability to
use Long Conversation Cutoff for
outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns Off or On the ability to use Call
Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 459
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
2 - 460
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
initiate a conference or Meet Me
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
initiate a Voice Call Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BargeIn Monitor
In an extension Class of Service,
enable the Barge-In Speech Mode (0)
or Monitor Mode (1) at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
be monitored.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to use Continued Dialing, which
allows DTMF signal sending while
talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BargeIn, Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BargeIn, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BargeIn Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this also
turns off the Barge-In display at the
called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to program General function
keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10
for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns Off or On the user ability to
display the detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing Line
Key
Turns Off or On a user ability to press
a line key to barge into an outside call.
The Barge-In feature must be enabled
if this option is to be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Group
Listen
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on a
virtual extension key. Program 20-1306 (Call Waiting) must be set to off for
this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability COS to be changed via Service
Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Paging
Display
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
For extension Class of Service, allow
(1) or deny (0) an extension user from
turning Background Music on and off.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Use to define the supplementary
feature availability for each extension
Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 461
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
2 - 462
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service,
allow (1) or deny (0) the extension
user ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through Program
11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns Off or On
extension user ability to block callers
from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension Class
of Service. Any extension which has
this option enabled also hears the
queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do Not
Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not Disturb.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turns Off or On the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an extension
on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Station Relocation
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in Call
Monitoring Mode determines if the
monitored parties receives the barge
in alert tone when Coaching Mode is
enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Station
Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off)
in the LCD when the phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Station
Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off)
in the LCD when the phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station lights
when a Normal CO call is ringing the
phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in via
AIC codes shows which queue the
call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name and
number are listed (1) or unlisted (0) in
the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Operation
To program the Dterm Cordless II:
1.
Press and hold down
2.
Press R/VOL repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key F1.
3.
Press MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line Key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press R/VOL to toggle between /TALK for ON or /NO TALK for OFF.
5.
Press MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F4).
6.
After programming F4, press MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press R/VOL to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing ON/OFF (LCD indicates ON or OFF).
8.
Press TALK to exit.
and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red.
Function keys F1 ~ F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS), Feature (FNC),
or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC Multiline Terminal.
When initially installed, function keys F1~F4 default to Line Keys 1~4 respectively and Off-Hook Ringing defaults
to ON.
Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any Function key to work with Off-Hook Ringing.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 463
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To place an internal call:
1.
Press TALK.
icon is displayed.
2.
Dial the Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4), programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
3.
Announce the call after tone burst or wait for call to be answered.
To place an outside call:
1.
Press TALK. X icon is displayed.
2.
Dial trunk access code and number
- OR -
Select trunk appearance and dial number.
Wait for call to be answered.
To answer an Incoming Ringing Call:
1.
When the handset is in the charger, lift it.
icon is displayed.
2.
When the handset is out of the Base Unit, press TALK if ringing line preference is assigned.
icon is displayed.
3.
Talk.
To place a call on Hold (internal or outside):
With a call in process, press HOLD.
To retrieve a held call, press flashing F1~F4.
After a programmed time, the held call recalls to the originating terminal.
To redial a number:
1.
Press REDIAL.
2.
The previously dialed number is called.
To transfer a call:
1.
With a call in process, press TRANSFER.
2.
Dial Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4) programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
3.
Announce call (optional).
4.
Press TALK to complete transfer.
2 - 464
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
To place a conference call:
1.
With a call in progress, press CONF.
2.
Place second internal or external call.
3.
Announce conference.
4.
Press CONF again. A 3-party conference is established. When any party hangs up, the conference
still includes the remaining parties.
To adjust ring volume:
While the telephone is not being used, press R/VOL (upper key on left side) repeatedly to select desired
setting display:
Ring Type A High
Ring Type A Low
Ring Type B High
Ring Type B Low
Ring Type C High
Ring Type C Low
Ring Off (Vibration)
To adjust receive volume level:
1.
With a call in progress, press R/VOL to decrease volume.
2.
Press R/VOL to restore normal volume.
To Mute the microphone:
1.
Press the MUTE key (lower key on left side).
Microphone is muted.
2.
Press the MUTE key again to activate microphone.
To use the Charging Unit:
1.
Place handset and/or spare battery in the charging slots.
2.
The Charge 1 LED is on red during and after charging the handset.
3.
The Charge 2 LED is on red while charging the spare battery and turns off after charging is
complete.
If the handset is placed in the charger without an installed battery, the Charge 1 LED flashes.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 465
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To Switch from Cordless to Desk Using Base Unit:
1.
When Cordless II is associated with a terminal, use the Base Unit to switch between Cordless II and
the Multiline Terminal. Refer to Cordless II Base Unit Controls illustration on the next page.
2.
Press Cordless to select Dterm Cordless II.
-OR-
3.
Press Desk to select multiline terminal.
Switching must be accomplished while both terminals are idle.
A call in progress cannot be switched. When tried, it is dropped.
Switching held calls is not recommended because LED indications are not provided.
The Power LED and the applicable position LED are on to indicate selection.
Cordless II Base Unit Controls
To switch from Desk to Cordless using the Redial Key:
1.
Verify that the Base Unit is in Desk mode.
2.
Remove the battery.
3.
Press and hold
4.
Install the battery while holding these keys.
5.
After the handset beeps one time, release the keys.
6.
The handset is in Setup mode.
7.
Press HOLD to display the current mode (Digital/Redial).
8.
Press F2 and then HOLD.
9.
The handset displays Digital (F8), and changes REDIAL program to Desk/Cordless Softkey
Switching mode.
10.
Press TALK to restore standby mode.
11.
Press REDIAL to test this feature.
2 - 466
and # on the handset.
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
12.
Issue 1.0
The Base Unit automatically changes from Desk to Cordless.
This is a one time operation, but one of the F1~F4 keys can be programmed for the redial function.
13.
To restore the normal redial function, enter setup mode, and press F3 and HOLD to display Digital
(Redial).
14.
Press TALK to restore standby mode.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 467
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 468
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Description
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Lite Terminal may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 KTS. The
DTH-4R-1( ) TEL uses 900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital) Technology and is connected in tandem to a
multiline terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Feature
Digital Technology
LCD
Silent Alarm
Dedicated Keys
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range
Message Waiting Indication
Dterm Cordless Lite II
(DTH-4R-1)
900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital)
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Yes
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN,
REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
4
50~150 feet
Yes (Icon)
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
30
Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices and, therefore,
some interference may take place when operating in the same environment as other
wireless devices which operate within the same frequency spectrum.
Condition
The Dterm Cordless Lite II can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE SV8100, and
Series i Digital Multiline Telephones.
Battery Capacity is 700 mAh, 3.6V with a Talk Mode of six hours (typical) and a Standby
Mode of five days (typical).
The battery can be hot swapped while on a call. The battery must be replaced with another
charged battery pack within 20 seconds, otherwise the connection is lost.
The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition.
When a message is received, the message icon is displayed.
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.
A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.
A spare battery is available as an Optional Available Part. A second battery is not shipped
with the product.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 469
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The battery can be charged only when it is installed in the handset and the handset is in the
charger. A stand-alone battery charger is not available.
Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings are known to reduce
telephone performance.
When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office, they must operate on different
channels and be at least 20 feet apart (including the base unit and the telephones).
Dterm cordless phones are not supported with the Door Box feature.
Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call is transferred
when the Cordless Terminal is placed in idle.
Dterm Cordless telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature.
Default Setting
None
System Availability (US Only)
Terminals
DTH-4R-1( ) TEL
Required Component(s)
CD-8DLCA
-ORCD-8DLCA with PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
-ORCD-16DLCA
Related Features
Cordless Telephone Connection
2 - 470
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-02
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type
(B1).
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline
Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth
Cordless Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone
Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline
Terminal (1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Paging)
(1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for Tone
Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for Door Box)
(1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for ACI)
(1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
3
2 - 471
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
10-03-04
10-03-05
10-03-06
10-03-07
10-03-08
10-03-09
2 - 472
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional installed
Unit 1.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU
Module
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional installed
Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU
Module
(default = 0)
3
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (ACI)
12 = APR (B2
Mode)
(default = 0)
3
0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Ext.
Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (Paging/Tone
Ringer = 1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP (for Door Box
= 1~8) (ACI) =
(1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U( )
ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Multiline Telephone Type
Read only program that shows the type
of multiline terminal connected to the
port.
0 = DT3
1 = Dterm8
2 = Dterm7
(default = 0)
3
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Side Option Information
Read only command that shows the
type of side module connected to the
terminal.
0 = No Option
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM
(default = 0)
3
3
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-10
10-03-11
20-07-01
20-07-03
20-07-05
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Bottom Option Information (Only
applies to DTL style telephones)
Shows optional adapter information.
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Handset Option Information
Shows optional adapter information.
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turns Off or On an extension for
manually Switching the Night Mode
(Service Code 718). This option must
be enabled for an extension to display
the Night indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to set the Time via Service Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability user ability to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Forced Trunk Disconnect. This
allows the extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turns Off or On the extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port Disable
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to record, erase or listen to VRS
messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to
the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
0 = No option
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
(default = 0)
3
0 = No option
1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth
Cordless Handset
(default = 0)
3
3
2 - 473
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
2 - 474
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability for dialing Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Use to define if Accumulated Extension
Data is included in the SMDR Printout
for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Use to define if Department Group
(STG) Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Use to define if Accumulated Account
Code Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
set or cancel dial-in mode switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turns Off or On Intercom calling for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off or On outgoing trunk calling
for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to make outbound calls using group
speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting Override
(Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turns Off or On an extension user to
use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turns Off or On Ringdown Extension for
extensions with this COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension to force
Handsfree Answerback or Forced
Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring mode
for ICM calls, enabling this option
prevents callers from changing the call
to voice announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Department Group Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicators should be allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Used to Enable or Disable Call Address
Information for each Class Of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 475
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
2 - 476
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
2
Turns Off or On a user Class of Service
from automatically blocking outgoing
Caller ID information when a call is
placed. If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID block
code 1831 (defined in Program 14-0121) before the user dialed digits (this
requires Program 14-02-10 to be
enabled). If block is disabled, the
system outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
display the name and number of the
extension that dialed 911 (US Only).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to override the trunk access map
programming for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Enable or Disable an extension user
ability to voice over to a busy virtual
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability to
receive a second call from a DID, DISA,
DIL, or tie line caller.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller to
ring through. If the destination
extension does not have a trunk or
CAP key available for the second
call and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet been
answered, the second caller hears
busy regardless of this program
setting.
3
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turns Off or On the Caller ID display at
an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether an extension displays
the Caller Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the CHECK
LIST message is displayed to indicate a
missed call
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to enable Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for their
incoming Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the Incoming
Call Time is displayed on the multiline
terminal LCD while the telephone is
ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to have calls queued if a call rings the
extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turns Off or On and extension ability to
display calling party information on
CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
calls ringing an extension Pickup Group
and ring group calls (Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for
calls ringing outside a group (Service
Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup for a
specific group using service code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup
Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call Pickup for
calls ringing an extension Pickup Group
(Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Meet-Me Conference and
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to answer an incoming call on a Call
Arrival (CAR)/Secondary Incoming
Extension (SIE)/ Virtual Extension
simply by lifting the handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to us Call Pickup to Pick up Callback
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
2 - 477
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
2 - 478
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
2
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On an extension user ability user
to set Call Forwarding when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On an extension user ability to set
Call Forwarding when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On an extension user ability to set
Call Forwarding with Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension's Class of Service, turns
Off or On an extension user ability to set
Call Forward with Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
use Transfer Without Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turns Off or On an extension incoming
Transfer pre-answer display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
user ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to pick up a call on Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Automatic On-Hook Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On setting up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise at the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Off or On an extension user ability to set
Call Forward Immediate.
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to have a call which recalls from hold
transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turns Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
dial Service Code 4 7 to record, listen
to or erase the Personal Greeting
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns Off or On a multiline terminal
user ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability user in a Department Group to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0) or Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension Class
of Service should allow normal or
extended Park (0 = Normal for Program
24-01-06, 1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/conference
call automatically when they hang up.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restrict
Unsupervised Conference
Allow or Deny an extension user ability
to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Tandem Trunking).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On the ability to set and cancel
Call Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 479
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
2 - 480
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put
on hold by an extension.
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
2
3
0 = Non Exclusive
Hold (Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Turns On or off an extension user ability
to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turns Off or On the Warning Tone for
Long Conversation (not for single line
telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
use Long Conversation Cutoff for
outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Call Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to initiate a conference or Meet Me
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to initiate a Voice Call Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
In an extension Class of Service, enable
the Barge-In Speech Mode (0) or
Monitor Mode (1) at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to Room Monitor other extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turns Off or On an extension ability to
be monitored.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off or On the extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing, which
allows DTMF signal sending while
talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to call a Department Group Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On Barge-In at the receiving
extension (i.e., Barge-In receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On the Barge-In (Intrusion) Tone.
If disabled, this also turns off the BargeIn display at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to program General function keys using
Service Code 751 (by default). (Refer to
Program 20-07-10 for Service Code
752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Selectable Display Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when an
extension improperly enters an Account
Code or violates Toll Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to display the detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer,
DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turns Off or On a user ability to press a
line key to barge into an outside call.
The Barge-In feature must be enabled if
this option is to be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 481
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
2 - 482
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on a
virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06
(Call Waiting) must be off for this option
to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for
COS 01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
user ability to changeCOS via Service
Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to display paging information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
For extension Class of Service, allow
(1) or deny (0) an extension user to turn
Background Music on and off.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Use to define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension Class of
Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service, allow
(1) or deny (0) an extension user ability
to have multiple users Barge-In to their
conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the operator
to use service codes in Program 11-1310 through Program 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to block off-hook signals manually sent
from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns Off or On an
extension user ability to block callers
from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On a Call Timer for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing
In an extension Class of Service, turns
Off or On an extension user ability to
use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue Status
Display for an extension Class of
Service. Any extension with this option
enabled also hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to set or cancel Do Not Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turns Off or On the Voice Mail Message
Indication for an extension on a DSS
console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use the Station Relocation feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user ability
to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in Call
Monitoring Mode determines if the
monitored parties receives the barge in
alert tone when Coaching Mode is
enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in
the LCD when the phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Name will be
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in
the LCD when the phone is in an idle
state.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station lights
when a Normal CO call is ringing the
phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent Display which Call is From
Determine if the station logged in via
AIC codes shows which queue the call
is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name Appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name and
number are listed (On) or unlisted (Off)
in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 483
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To set up and program the Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1):
and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red and F1=LK01 is displayed
1.
Press and hold down
on the LCD.
2.
Press Ring/Vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key F1.
3.
Press On/Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press Ring/Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off.
TALK is selected when the F1~F4 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys. NO TALK is
selected when F1~F4 function keys are programmed for functions not requiring an off-hook state (e.g., Log On/Off
or DND.)
5.
Press On/Off MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F4).
6.
After programming F4, press On/Off MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press Ring/Vol to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing On or Off (LCD indicates ON or OFF as
appropriate).
8.
Press TALK to exit.
Function keys F1 ~ F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS), Feature (FNC),
or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC Multiline Terminal.
When initially installed, function keys F1~F4 default to Line keys 1~4 respectively and Off-Hook Ringing defaults
to ON.
Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any function key to operate with off-hook ringing.
Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone Using
the Base Unit:
When the Dterm Cordless Lite II is associated with a Multiline Telephone the following is applicable:
Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are idle.
A call in progress cannot be switched between the Dterm Cordless Lite II and the associated Multiline
Telephone.
Switching held calls between the Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone and the associated Multiline
Telephone is not recommended because line key LED indications are not provided.
2 - 484
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Switching from Multiline Telephone and Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone:
1.
Press the Cordless button on the base unit.
- OR -
Press REDIAL from the Dterm Cordless Lite II handset.
This applies only if REDIAL is programmed to perform desk to cordless switching.
To switch from Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone to Multiline Telephone:
1.
Press the DESK button on the base unit.
For additional Operating Procedures, refer to the Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1) Owner’s Guide.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 485
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 486
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
Description
The Dterm series i Multiline Terminals provide ergonomic form and user-friendly functions. With advanced
digital circuitry, These terminals consist of distinct models to meet diverse user telephone terminal needs.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system allows a maximum of 240 IPK terminals to be attached to the system.
Conditions
The Dterm series i Multiline Terminals, with an adjustable display, offer softkey operation. The
LCD panel has three lines of display, each with 24 characters. Standard features include
headset jacks, wall mount units, and adjustable-base units.
The Dterm series i Multiline Terminals support dedicated function keys to provide easy
one-touch access to the most common telephone operations. These keys include: Feature,
Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer, Speaker, Microphone, Directory, and
Message.
The dial pad is detachable to allow for easy customization, or for Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) applications.
With the DTR-16LD-1( ) TEL, the 16-Line Keys are labeled by the LCD by assignment in
system data. The LCD also supports the LED status for trunks, Call Appearance (CAP)
Keys , DSS/BLF keys, and select Feature keys/Feature Access keys. Program 15-02-01
does not support language conversion entered in Program 15-20.
Use Program 15-20 (LCD Line Key Name Assignment) to assign a name to each LCD Line
Key of the DTR-16LD-1( ) Telephone. Up to eight characters can be assigned.
The LCD of the Dterm series i Multiline Terminals provides a volume bar indication, while
adjusting the following volume levels or controls:
Speaker Volume
Handset/Headset Volume
BGM Volume
Ring Volume/Off-Hook Ring Volume
LCD Contrast
Only English displays are provided (SPEAKER, HANDSET, RING, LCD).
MIC controls the built-in microphone during speakerphone mode and controls the handset
mute feature during handset/headset operation.
The MSG Key acts as a VM access key to call the VM pilot number (Feature selection
Program 15-02-26).
The distance from the chassis for Dterm series i Multiline Terminals can be extended when
local AC power is provided. When the terminal is powered by a local ACA-U( ) Unit (AC
Adapter), a built-in Long Line Adapter allows these telephones to be connected up to a
distance of 600 metres (2000 feet) by Twisted 1-Pair Cable at 24 AWG.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 487
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
For compatibility of Adapter Units and Terminals, refer to the following table:
Terminal
Adapter Unit
DTR-16LD-1( )
DTR-32D-1( )
DTR-16D-1( )
DTR-8D-1( )
AD(A)-R( )
X
X
X
X
AP(A)-R( )
X
X
X
X
AP(R)-R( )
X
X
X
X
HF-R( )
X
X
X
X
WM-R( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
ACA-U( ) UNIT
X
X
X
X
Other
X = Compatible
– = Not comparable
With non-IP Dterm series i Multiline Terminals, up to two adapters can be installed in a
telephone. For compatibility of multiple adapter units, refer to the following table:
AD(A)-R( )
AD(A)-R( )
AP(A)-R( )
X
AP(A)-R( )
X
AP(R)-R( )
X
–
HF-R( )
X
X
X
–
AP(R)-R( )
HF-R( )
X
X
–
X
X
X
= Compatible
= Not compatible
An ACA-U( ) AC Adapter is required when any of the following adapters is installed in an IPK
Terminal:
AP(R)-R( ) Unit
HF-R( ) Unit
DCR-60-1( ) Console
The WM-R( ) Unit (Wall Mount Unit) is required when any adapter is installed in Dterm series i
Multiline Terminals and the terminal is to be wall mounted.
Default Settings
None
2 - 488
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
System Availability
Terminals
DTH-16LD-1( ) TEL
DTH-32D-1( ) TEL
DTH-16D-1( ) TEL
DTH-8D-1( ) TEL
DCR-60-1( ) CONSOLE
Required Component(s)
CD-8DLCA Blade
PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
CD-16DLCA Blade
PVA( )-U( ) or IAD( )-U( ) (for IP Terminals)
Optional Component(s)
AD(A)-R( ) UNIT (Adapter for Call Recording)
AP(A)-R( ) UNIT (Analog Port Adapter [without Ringer])
AP(R)-R( ) UNIT (Analog Port Adapter [with Ringer])
HF-R( ) UNIT (Adapter for Full Duplex Handsfree)
WM-R( ) UNIT (Wall Mount Unit)
ACA-U( ) (AC Adapter)
Related Features
Ancillary Device Connection
Station Name – User Programmable
Off-Hook Signaling
Softkeys
User Programming Ability
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 489
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-02
10-03-04
2 - 490
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type
(B1).
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 1.
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
3
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)
3
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-05
10-03-06
10-03-07
15-07-01
20-07-01
20-07-02
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLC PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Programmable Function Keys
2
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)
3
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal type.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)
3
0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U( ) ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)
3
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
3
Use to setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
Use to assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turns Off or On an extension for
manual Night Service. Switching
(Service Code 718). This option
must be enabled for an extension to
display the Night indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Changing the Music on Hold
Tone
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to change the Music on Hold
tone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 491
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-07-03
20-07-04
20-07-05
20-07-10
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
2 - 492
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Storing
Speed Dialing Entries
Turns Off or On an extension to
store System or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to program the Appearance
function keys using Service Code
752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port Disable
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to record, erase or listen to VRS
messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to dial 4 or Service Code 611
to listen to the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turns Off or On an extension user
abilityto dial Service Code 612 and
record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-21
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
accumulated extension data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
department group (STG) data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for the SMDR printout of
accumulated account code data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Register/
Delete DECT
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to register or unregister an
Wireless DECT (SIP) handset using
the service codes defined in
Program 11-10-30 and Program 1110-31.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel Private
Call Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel dial-in
mode switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel do not
call administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turns Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 493
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-05
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
2 - 494
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls using
system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls using
group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Dial
Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Number Preview.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turns Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turns Off or On an extension user
abulity to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turns Off or On Ringdown
Extension for extensions with this
COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability allowing it to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enabling this
option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice announce
mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicatorsshould be allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default =1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-19
20-08-20
20-08-21
20-08-22
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for call address information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turns Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID information when
a call is placed. If block is enabled,
the system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code 1831 (defined
in Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If
block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as dialed by the
user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 911 (US
Only).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to override the trunk access map
programming for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hotline
for SPK
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to activate hotline or
ringdown when pressing the
Speaker key.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hot
Key Pad
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to make a call by dialing the
number without first going off hook.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Automatic Trunk Seizing by
Pressing Speaker Key
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for automatic trunk seizing
by pressing speaker key.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for voice over to busy virtual
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 495
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
20-10-01
2 - 496
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turns Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.
2
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turns Off or On the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether an extension
displays the Caller Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is displayed
to indicate a missed call
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminal LCD while the
telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turns Off or On and extension
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension Pickup
Group as well as ring group calls
(Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-10-10
20-11-01
20-11-02
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Meet-Me Conference
and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Universal Auto
Answer (no service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to answer an incoming call on
a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to us Call Pickup to Pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Answer
Preset
Use to define the Class of Service
(COS) for answer preset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 497
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
2 - 498
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability user to set Call Forwarding
when Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability user to set Call Forwarding
with Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension's Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Transfer Without
Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turns Off or On an extension
incoming Transfer preanswer
display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group
Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Automatic On-Hook
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On setting up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to have a call which recalls
from hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turns Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
20-11-24
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 4 7 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turns Off or On a multiline terminal
user ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability in a Department Group to use
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
No Recall set to allow does not stop
Transferred calls from recalling
from a virtual extension
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine if an extension Class of
Service should allow normal or
extended Park.
0 = Normal
1 = Extended
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang
Up
Allow or Deny an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically when
they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restrict
Unsupervised Conference
Allow or Deny an extension ability
to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Tandem Trunking).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension user.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
2 - 499
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-11-25
20-12-02
20-12-03
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
2 - 500
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) –
Advice of Charge
ISDN-AOC
This option Turns Off or On a DISA
or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for
Trunk Group Routing or Automatic
Route Selection.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) – Cost
Display (TTU)
ISDN billing information
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turns Off or On the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Forwarding/DND
Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to receive Off-Hook Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
Manually or Automatically receive
Off-Hook signals.
0 = Manually
1 = Automatically
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
In an extension Class of Service,
enable the Barge-In Speech Mode
or Monitor Mode at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to be monitored.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turns Off or On the extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to program General function
keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program 20-0710 for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turns Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
2 - 501
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
2 - 502
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to program its name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns Off or On the ability to display
the detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to the extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. The Barge-In
feature must be enabled if this
option is to be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be off
this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
For extension Class of Service,
allow (1) or deny (0) an extension
user to turn Background Music on
and off.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Use to define the supplementary
feature availability for each
extension Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
In an extension Class of Service,
allow (1) or deny (0) the extension
user ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
3
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through Program
11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Use this option to Turns Off or On
extension user ability to block
callers from dialing # to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
In an extension Class of Service,
turns Off or On a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turns Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
with this option enabled also hears
the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turns Off or On the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Station Relocation
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines if
the monitored party receives the
barge in alert tone when Coaching
Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 503
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
20-14-01
20-14-02
20-14-03
20-14-04
20-14-05
20-14-06
2 - 504
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Unlisted
1 = Listed
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are listed (On) or
unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – First Digit
Absorption (Delete First Digit
Dialed)
For Tie Lines, Enable or Disable the
ability to absorb (ignore) the first
incoming digit. Use this to make the
tie trunk compatible with 3- and 4digit Tie Line service. This option
does not apply to DISA.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Routing/ARS Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial
9 for Trunk Group Routing or
Automatic Route Selection.
0 = Off1
= On
(default = 1 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
access trunk groups for outside
calls (Service Code 704).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Outgoing System
Speed Dialing
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use
System Speed Dialing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Operator Calling
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial
0 for the telephone system
operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Internal Paging
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to
use the telephone system Internal
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
3
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-14-07
20-14-08
20-14-09
20-14-10
20-14-11
20-14-12
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – External Paging
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use the telephone system External
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Direct Trunk Access
This option Enables or Disables a
DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use
Direct Trunk Access (Service Code
715).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Forced Trunk
Disconnect <Not for ISDN Tpoint>
This option Enables or Disables a
tie trunk caller ability to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect (Service Code
26). This option is not available to
DISA callers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Call Forward Setting
by Remote via DISA
Enable or Disable a DISA caller
ability to use the Call Forward
service codes (Program 11-11-01
through Program 11-11-05).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
In an extension Class of Service,
Enable (1) or Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using Barge-In.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Retrieve Park Hold
Turns Off or On the ability for a
DISA caller to retrieve parked or
held calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 505
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
Refer to individual features for details.
Table 2-13 IPK Telephone Specifications
DTR-16LD-( )
DTR-32D-1( )
DTR-16D-1( )
DTR-8D-1( )
Dedicated Function Keys
11
11
11
11
Line/Feature Access/Programmable Feature
Access Key
16
32
16
8
LCD (3x24)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Call/Message Indicator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable Base
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Built-in Wall Mount
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Headset Jack (Built-in)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DESI Label by LCD
Yes
No
No
No
Handset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Speakerphone
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Headset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ring Volume Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCD Contrast Control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Receiver Volume Control for:
Housing Color
Softkeys
White or Black White or Black White or Black White or Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A maximum of 32 keys may be programmed as Function Keys.
2 - 506
Dterm series i Multiline Terminals
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Description
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system provides branch connection of locally provided facsimile
machines to CO/PBX lines. Additional dedicated CO/PBX lines are not required for a facsimile
to operate. The facsimile shares any CO/PBX line on the COI Package and Power Failure
(PF) circuit.
Conditions
This function requires a CD-4COTC Blade to connect a facsimile in branch to a
direct CO/PBX line.
A PF circuit is required. The CD-4COTC has PF circuits on the first two ports.
F
PF and FAX branch connection do not work together at the same port. Select
either way in Program 14-02-21.
For the FAX Branch Line, Incoming Group or DIL should be programmed.
The systems cannot distinguish between an incoming facsimile call and a CO/
PBX call. Incoming call may be automatically answered by FAX Machine.
Ringing assignments should be turned off for fax lines.
When the facsimile is used, the associated CO line key indicates Busy LED on a
multiline terminal.
When the facsimile is not used, the Fax Branch CO/PBX line can be used as an
outside line.
Code restriction does no apply to outgoing calls from the Fax machine.
Connection of the facsimile machine does not require extra system ports.
The PZ-4COTG blade does not contain any Power Fail or Fax Branch Exchange
circuits.
Power Fail and Fax CO Branch Connection cannot be used on the same CO port
at the same time.
Program 14-02-21 must be used to set a CO port to use this feature.
Default Settings
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 507
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
CD-4COTC
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-02-14
14-02-21
14-05-01
2 - 508
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Start/Ground Start
Select loop start or ground start for
the trunk.
0 = Loop Start (Loop)
1 = Ground Start
(Ground)
(default = 0)
FAX Branch Connection
Sets CO for Fax Branch
Connection.
If FAX Branch is selected,
Program 14-10 Power Failure
Telephone Setting is NOT
valid.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)
Assign trunks to trunk groups
(1~100).
Trunk Group Number:
0~100
Priority Number:
1~200
(Default trunks 1~200 =
Priority 1~200)
Trunk Group
2
3
3
3
3
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
22-01-04
22-04-01
22-05-01
22-08-01
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
Assign extensions to ring groups.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No other
extensions ring for
incoming Ring Group 1
calls.
3
To have the trunks ring extensions,
assign trunks to a Ring Group. The
incoming ring group assignment
programmed in Program 41-03-01
overrides the setting in this
program.
Incoming Group
Number for Day/Night
Mode (1~8):
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Group)
102 (In-Skin/ External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)
3
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
3
Incoming Trunk Ring Group
Assignment
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
3
3
Operation
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 509
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 510
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Flash
Description
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting the trunk loop
current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected Telco or PBX
offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected Telco or PBX.
Conditions
The system does not provide a ground flash.
A single line telephone connected to an APR adapter cannot place a call on hold by pressing
the Flash key.
When the Flash/Recall key is pressed while talking on an ISDN trunk, the call will be
disconnected and new dial tone provided. On a PSTN trunk, behavior will depend on system
programming and network settings.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Drop Key
PBX Compatibility
VM8000 InMail
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 511
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-42
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Flash on Trunk Lines
Use to customize the Service
Codes for flash on trunk lines.
SLT
(default = #3)
14-02-03
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Flash
Type
Make sure this item is set for open
loop Flash (0).
0 = Open Loop Flash
1 = Ground
(default = 0)
14-02-04
Analog Trunk Data Setup –
Hooking Type
For each trunk, select Timed Flash
or open loop Disconnect.
0 = Timed Flash
(Hooking)
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
(default = 0)
3
Behind PBX Setup
For each trunk, indicate if the trunk
is installed behind a PBX.
0 = Stand Alone
(Trunk)
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
2 = Not Used
3 = CTX assume 9
(default = 0)
3
14-04-01
15-02-05
15-03-04
2 - 512
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Transfer Key Operation
Mode (US Only)
For the Cordless Lite/Cordless Lite
II telephone user to use the flash
function, this option must be set to
2. This changes the Transfer key
to a Flash key.
0 = Transfer
1 = Call back
2 = Hook
(default = 0)
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Flashing
Enables/disables Flash for single
line (500/2500 type) telephones.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 1)
3
3
3
3
3
Flash
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
81-10-07
81-10-08
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
COT Initial Data Setup –
Hookflash Time Selection 1
COT Initial Data Setup –
Hookflash Time Selection 2
Set the Flash duration (16~4080
ms) for analog trunk CD-4COTC
circuits in Program 81-10-07.
Set the open loop disconnect
duration (16~4080 ms) for analog
trunk CD-4COTC circuits Program
81-10-08.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
0 = 20 ms
1 = 40 ms
2 = 60 ms
3 = 80 ms
4 = 100 ms
5 = 140 ms
6 = 160 ms
7 = 200 ms
8 = 400 ms
9 = 600 ms
10 = 800 ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
[default = 4 (100ms)
All Trunks]
3
0 = 20 ms
1 = 40 ms
2 = 60 ms
3 = 80 ms
4 = 100 ms
5 = 140 ms
6 = 160 ms
7 = 200 ms
8 = 400 ms
9 = 600 ms
10 = 800 ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
[default = 14 (3.0
seconds)]
3
2 - 513
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To flash the trunk you are on:
From a Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Recall.
From a Single Line Telephone
1.
Hookflash.
2.
Dial #3.
2 - 514
Flash
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Flexible System Numbering
Description
Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the system port-to-extension assignments. This allows an
employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. In addition, factory technicians
can make comprehensive changes to your system number plan. You can have factory technicians:
Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension numbers can have
up to eight digits.
Change your system Service Code numbers.
Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes.
Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.
You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the system Trunk Group Routing code. Although
the default code of 0 is suitable for most applications, you can alter the code if needed.
The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan. Refer to the chart below and the
UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for more details.
Flexible System Numbering
Program
Description
11-01-01 System Numbering
Set the system internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The
numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial
to access features and other extensions.
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code
Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 0). This is
the code users dial to access Automatic Route Selection or
Trunk Group Routing.
11-20-01 Dial Extension Analyze Table
Use tables 01 ~ 128 to assign the digits to be dialed using the
Dial Extension Analyze Tables. These tables are used when
Program 11-01-01 is set to option 9 = Dial Extension Analyze.
(Up to eight digits can be assigned and the valid entries are:
0, 1 ~ 9, #, , )
11-20-02 Dial Extension Analyze Table
Assign the Type of Dial for the Dial Extension Analyze Table
from Program 11-20-01.
(Svc Code, Intercom, Operator, or F-Route)
11-10 Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-11 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14 Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 Service Code Setup, Administrative (for
Special Access)
Customize the Service Codes.
11-16 Single Digit Service Code Setup
Assign the Single Digit Service Codes. these are the postdialing codes a user can dial after placing an Intercom call to a
co-worker.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 515
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
Programming follows a telephone extension number, not the port number in most cases. If
you relocate a telephone, you may need to change additional programming. For example, if
you change the extension assigned to a port in Program 11-02, the line key programming
does not follow. However, if you move the extension using the Station Relocation Feature,
the line key programming does follow.
Since making changes in Program 11-01 does not automatically make any other changes in
any other program, changing the number plan after the system is in operation may cause
problems in the following programs:
PRG 11-01 Type 2
(Extension Number)
PRG 11-01 Type 1
(Service Codes)
11-02
11-08
15-12
22-11
11-10
11-14
21-11
11-04
11-17
16-01-01
25-06
11-11
11-15
30-03
11-06
15-01-01
15-14
30-03
11-12
15-07
11-07
15-07
21-11
11-13
15-14
0507, 0515, 0516, 0920, 1207, 2402,
2902, 2905, 2908
2402
Any feature which requires dialing a code or extension number can be affected.
When the system searches the Dial Extension Analyze Table (PRG 11-20-01), the system
uses prefix searching, giving the lower table number the higher priority. For example, the
user programs 211 in table 1 and 2113 in table 2, then dials 2113, the system selects table 1.
Example for 310X
Example for 3100X
10s Group
(4-digit)
100s Group
(5-digit)
11-01-01 = Dial 3
31 Digit 4 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table
11-01-01 = Dial 3
31 Digit 7 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table
11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 310
11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 3100
11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom
11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom
Example for 31000X
Example for 310000X
1000s Group
(6-digit)
10,000s Group
(7-digit)
11-01-01 = Dial 3
31 Digit 4 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table
11-01-01 = Dial 3
31 Digit 7 = (9)Dial Extension Analyze Table
11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 31000
11-20-01 Table 1 = Dial 310000
11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom
11-20-02 Table 1 = Intercom
2 - 516
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default Setting
Extensions and Virtuals are numbered in the following order:
Program 11-02-01 and Program 11-04-01
Physical Extensions:
Extn Port 1 = 101 ~ Extn Port 99 = 199
Extn Port 100 = 3101 ~ Extn Port 256 = 3257
Virtual Extensions/CAR Keys:
VE Port 1 = 201 ~ VE Port 99 = 299
VE Port 100 = 3301 ~ VE Port 256 = 3457
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 517
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-01-01
System Numbering – Service
Code
Customize the system internal
(Intercom) numbering plan.
Refer to Univerge
SV8100 System
Program Manual
11-02-01
Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to
extension ports. The telephone
programming identity follows the
port number – not the extension
number.
Up to eight digits
1 101
2 102
3 103
~
~
2
3
3
3
99 199
100 3101
~
~
512 3513
11-04-01
Virtual Extension Numbering
Assign virtual extension numbers.
Up to eight digits
1 201
2 202
3 203
~
~
3
99 299
100 3601
~
~
256 3757
11-06-01
ACI Extension Numbering
Use to define the virtual extension
number to be used for the ACI
extension numbering.
ACI Ports: 1~96
(default not assigned)
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
– Dial
Use to assign pilot numbers to
each Department Group set up
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-08-01
ACI Group Pilot Number
Use to assign the pilot number to
the ACI Groups set in Program
33-02.
ACI Groups: 1~16
(default not assigned)
11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit
Trunk Access Code (normally 0). If
you change this code, you must
also review the settings in Program
11-01-01 for the new code
selected.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default = 0)
3
3
3
3
11-09-02
Trunk Access Code – 2nd Trunk
Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in
Program 11-01-01 for Alternate
Trunk Route Access.
Dial (up to four digits)
[default not assigned)]
3
11-10-01
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Night Mode
Switching
Use to customize the night mode
switching Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT,SLT
(default = 718)
3
11-10-03
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
System Time
Use to customize the system time
Service Codes for the System
Administrator.
MLT
(default = 728)
3
11-10-04
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Storing
Common Speed Dialing Numbers
Use to store common speed
dialing Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT
(default = 753)
3
2 - 518
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-10-05
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Storing Group
Speed Dialing Numbers
Use for storing group speed dialing
numbers for the System
Administrator.
MLT
(default = 754)
11-10-06
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Set the service code for setting
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 733)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Canceling the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Set the service code for canceling
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 734)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Destination for Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Set the service code for setting the
destination for automatic trunk
transfer.
MLT
(default = 735)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Night Mode
Switching for Other Group
Use to customize the night mode
switching for other group Service
Codes for the System
Administrator.
MLT
(default = 618)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Leaving
Message Waiting (Requires CPU
to be licensed for Hotel/Motel)
Use to customize the leave
message waiting Service Codes
for the System Administrator
(requires CPU to be licensed for
Hotel/Motel).
MLT
(default = 626)
11-10-17
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Dial Block by
Supervisor
Use to customize the supervisor
dial block Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT
(default = 601)
3
11-10-18
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door Box
Use to customize the night mode
switching Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT
(default = 722)
3
11-10-20
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – VRS - Record/
Erase Message
Use to customize the night mode
switching Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default = 616)
3
11-10-21
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – VRS - General
Message Playback
Use to customize the VRS general
message playback for the System
Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default = 611)
3
11-10-22
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – VRS - Record or
Erase General Message
Use to customize the VRS record
or erase general message for the
System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default = 612)
3
11-10-23
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – SMDR Extension Accumulated Printout
Code
Use to customize the SMDR
extension accumulated printout
codes for the System
Administrator.
MLT
(default = 621)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – SMDR - Group
Accumulated Printout Code
Use to customize the SMDR group
accumulated printouts for the
System Administrator.
MLT
(default = 622)
11-10-07
11-10-08
11-10-12
11-10-16
11-10-24
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 519
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
11-10-25
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Account Code
Accumulated Printout Code
Use to customize the account code
accumulated printout Service
Codes for the System
Administrator.
MLT
(default = 623)
11-10-26
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Forced Trunk
Disconnect
Use to customize the forced trunk
disconnect Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-10-27
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Trunk Port
Disable for Outgoing Calls
Define the service code which
should be used by an extension
user to block a trunk from being
used for outgoing calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 645)
11-10-30
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Register
DECTPP
Use to customize the register
DECTPP Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-10-31
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Delete DECTPP
Use to customize the delete
DECTPP Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-10-32
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Set Private Call
Refuse
Use to customize the set private
call refuse Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-10-33
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Entry Caller ID
Refuse
Use to customize the entry caller
ID Service Codes for the System
Administrator.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-10-34
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Set Caller ID
Refuse
Use to customize the set caller ID
refuse Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-10-35
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Dial-In Mode
Switching
Use to customize the forced trunk
disconnect Service Codes for the
System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-10-36
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Change the
Guidance Message Number on
Voice Mail Auto Attendant
Use to change the guidance
message number on voice mail
auto attendant Service Codes for
the System Administrator.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-01
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward –
All
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding all calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 741)
3
11-11-02
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward –
Busy
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 742)
3
11-11-03
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward –
No Answer
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 743)
3
11-11-04
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward –
Busy/No Answer
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy or no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 744)
3
2 - 520
3
3
3
3
3
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-05
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward –
Both Ring
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy or no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 745)
3
11-11-07
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call
Forwarding – Follow Me
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for follow me.
MLT, SLT
(default = 746)
3
11-11-08
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Do Not
Disturb
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for Do Not Disturb.
MLT, SLT
(default = 747)
3
11-11-09
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Answer
Message Waiting
Use to customize the answer
message waiting used for
registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 0)
3
11-11-10
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Cancel All
Messages Waiting
Use to cancel all messages waiting
used for registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 773)
3
11-11-11
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Cancel
Message Waiting
Use to cancel message waiting
used for registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 771)
3
11-11-12
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Alarm Clock
Use to customize the alarm clock
used for registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 727)
3
11-11-13
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for multiline
terminal
Use to customize the display
language for multiline terminal
used for registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 678)
11-11-14
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Text Message
Setting
Use to customize the text message
setting used for registration and
setup.
MLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-15
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Enable
Handsfree Incoming Intercom
Calls
Use to customize the enable
handsfree incoming intercom calls
used for registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 721)
11-11-16
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Force Ringing
of Incoming Intercom Calls
Use to customize the force ringing
of incoming intercom calls used for
registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 723)
11-11-17
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (2-Digit Service
Codes)
Use this option to set the service
code (default 751) to assign 2-digit
function codes to the Function
keys.
MLT
(default = 751)
11-11-18
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – BGM On/Off
Use to customize the BGM On/Off
used for registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 725)
3
11-11-19
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Key Touch
Tone On/Off
Use to customize the key touch
tone Off/On used for registration
and setup.
MLT
(default = 724)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 521
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
11-11-20
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Change
Incoming CO and ICM Ring
Tones
Use to customize the change
incoming CO and ICM ring tones
used for registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 720)
11-11-21
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Check
Incoming Ring Tones
Use to check incoming ring tones
used for registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 711)
3
11-11-22
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Extension
Name Programming
Use to customize the Extension
name programming used for
registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 700)
3
11-11-23
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Second Call
for DID/DISA/DIL
Use to customize the second call
of DID/DISA/DIL used for
registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 679)
3
11-11-24
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Change
Station Class of Service
Allows an extension user to
change the COS of another
extension. Must be allowed in
Program 20-13-28.
MLT
(default = 677)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Setup for Each
Extension
Group
Customize the service code to be
used to set the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 602)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to cancel the Automatic
Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 603)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Destination of
Automatic Transfer Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to set the destination for the
Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature for a Department Group.
MLT
(default = 604)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Delayed
Transfer for Every Extension
Group
Use to customize the delayed
transfer for every extension group
used for registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 605)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Delayed
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Use to customize the delayed
transfer cancellation for each
extension group used for
registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 606)
11-11-30
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – DND Setup for
Each Extension Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for
registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 607)
11-11-31
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – DND
Cancellation for Each Extension
Group
Use to customize the DND
cancellation for each extension
group used for registration and
setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 608)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Dial Block
Use to customize the dial block
used for registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 600)
11-11-25
11-11-26
11-11-27
11-11-28
11-11-29
11-11-33
2 - 522
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-34
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Temporary
Toll Restriction Override
Use to customize the temporary
toll restriction override used for
registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 775)
3
11-11-35
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Pilot Group
Withdrawing
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for
registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 650)
3
11-11-36
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Toll
Restriction Override
Use to customize the toll restriction
override used for registration and
setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 663)
3
11-11-37
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Ring Volume
Set
Use to customize the ring volume
set used for registration and setup.
MLT
(default = 729)
3
11-11-38
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (3-Digit Service
Codes)
Use this option to set the service
code (default 752) to assign 3-digit
function codes to the Function
keys.
MLT
(default = 752)
11-11-39
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Station Speed
Dial Number Entry
Use to customize the station speed
dial entry used for registration and
setup.
ML, SLT
(default = 755)
3
11-11-41
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Tandem
Ringing
Use to customize the tandem
ringing used for registration and
setup.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-42
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – SV8100
Wireless Transferring When Out
of Range
Customize the service code to be
used when setting a Wireless
DECT (SIP) telephone to transfer
calls when out of range.
SV8100 Wireless
(default = 689)
11-11-43
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Headset Mode
Switching
Use to customize the headset
mode switching used for
registration and setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 688)
3
11-11-44
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Auto
Attendant
Use to customize the auto
attendant used for registration and
setup.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward All
Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy No Answer
(Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy No Answer Split Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
2 - 523
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-49
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Both Ring Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-11-50
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set Message
Waiting Indication
Use to customize the set message
waiting indication used for
registration and setup.
SLT
Up to eight digits
3
11-11-51
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Cancel
Message Waiting Indication
Use to customize the cancel
message waiting indication used
for registration and setup.
SLT
Up to eight digits
3
11-11-52
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All Destination (No
Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward All
for any Extension Service Code.
(default = 790)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy Destination
(No Split)
Use to assign the Call Forward
Busy for any Extension Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 791)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Used to assign the Call Forward
No Answer for any Extension
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 792)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
Busy No Answer Destination (No
Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward busy
or no answer destination with no
split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 793)
11-11-57
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set Do Not
Call Table
Use to customize the set do not
call table used for registration and
setup.
(default not assigned)
11-11-58
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
with Personal Greeting
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding with Personal Greeting.
MLT, SLT
(default = 713)
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Set the service code for Activating
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Override. This code is available
only if you disable the voice mail
Single Digit dialing code in
Program 11-16-09.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
11-11-53
11-11-54
11-11-55
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
11-12-02
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Conference
Use to customize the conference
Service Codes used for service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default = #1)
3
11-12-03
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Override (Off-Hook
Signaling)
Use to customize the override
(off-hook signaling) used for
service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 709)
3
11-12-04
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Set Camp-On
Customize the Service Code,
which is to be used for setting
Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 750)
3
2 - 524
3
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Cancel Camp-On
Customize the Service Code,
which is to be used for cancelling
Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 770)
3
11-12-06
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Switching of Voice Call
and Signal Call
Use to customize the switching of
voice call and signal call used for
service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 712)
3
11-12-07
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Step Call
Use to customize the step call
used for service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 708)
3
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)
3
11-12-09
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Change to STG
(Department Group) All Ring
Use this option to set the service
code for ringing all members of a
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-12-10
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Station Speed Dialing
Assign Service code for accessing
System Speed Dial bins.
MLT, SLT
(default = #2)
3
11-12-11
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Group Speed Dialing
Use to customize the group speed
dialing Service Codes used for
service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = #4)
3
11-12-12
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Last Number Dial
Assign a service code to use Last
Number Dial.
MLT, SLT
(default = #5)
3
11-12-13
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Saved Number Dial
Customize the service code to be
used for dialing a saved number.
MLT, SLT
(default = 715)
3
11-12-14
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Group Access
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 704)
3
11-12-15
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Specified Trunk
Access
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for specified
trunk access.
MLT, SLT
(default = #0)
3
11-12-16
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Access Via
Networking
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for trunk
access via networking.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-12-17
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Clear Last Number
Dialing Data
Assign a service code to clear the
Last Number Dial.
MLT, SLT
(default = 776)
3
11-12-18
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Clear Saved Number
Dialing Data
Define the service code for Clear
Save Number Dialing List if it is not
acceptable.
MLT, SLT
(default = 785)
3
11-12-19
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Internal Group Paging
Define the service code for
accessing an internal paging
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 701)
3
11-12-20
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – External Paging
External paging access code.
Service code setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 703)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
2 - 525
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
11-12-21
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Meet-Me Answer to
Specified Internal Paging Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes used for meet-me answer to
specified internal paging group
service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 764)
11-12-22
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Meet-Me Answer to
External Paging
Use to customize the Service
Codes used for meet-me answer to
external paging service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 765)
11-12-23
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Meet-Me Answer in
Same Paging Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes used for meet-me answer in
same paging group service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 763)
11-12-24
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Combined Paging
Combined paging, internal/external
access code. Service code setup.
MLT, SLT
(default = 1)
11-12-25
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Call Pickup Own Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for direct call pickup – own
group which are used for service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 756)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup for specified
group which are used for service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 768)
11-12-27
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup which are
used for service access.
MLT, SLT
(default = #)
11-12-28
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Another Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup for another
group which are used for service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 769)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Extension Call
Pickup
Use to customize the Service
Codes for direct extension call
pickup which are used for service
access.
MLT, SLT
(default =
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Specified Trunk
Answer
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 672)
11-12-31
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Park Hold
Set the service code which should
be used for placing a call in Park.
MLT, SLT
(default: #6)
3
11-12-32
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer for Park Hold
Set the service code which should
be used for answering a call in
Park.
MLT, SLT
(default: 6)
3
11-12-33
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Group Hold
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 732)
11-12-26
11-12-29
11-12-30
2 - 526
)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
11-12-34
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer for Group Hold
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 762)
11-12-35
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Station Park Hold
Set the service code to be used for
placing a call in a Personal Park.
MLT, SLT
(default = 757)
3
11-12-36
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Door Box Access
If the service code for Doorphone
Access is not acceptable, change it
here.
MLT, SLT
(default = 702)
3
11-12-37
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Common Canceling
Service Code
Use to customize the Service
Codes used for common canceling
service code access.
MLT, SLT
(default = 620)
3
11-12-38
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – General Purpose
Indication
Use to customize the Service
Codes used for general purpose
indication access.
MLT
(default = 783)
3
11-12-39
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Voice Mail Center
Access
Use to customize the Service Code
for Voice Mail Center Access.
(default = 784)
11-12-40
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Station Speed Dialing
Use to customize the station speed
access Service Codes.
MLT, SLT
(default = #7)
3
11-12-41
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Voice Over
The service code used for the
Voice Over feature.
MLT
(default = 690)
3
11-12-42
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Flash on Trunk lines
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for flash on
trunk lines.
SLT
(default = #3)
3
11-12-43
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer No-Ring Line
(Universal Answer)
Customize the service code to be
used to manually answer a
Universal Night Answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = #9)
3
11-12-44
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Callback Test for SLT
If required, redefine the service
code used for SLT Callback Test.
SLT
(default = 799)
3
11-12-45
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Enabled On Hook
When Holding (SLT)
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for the
enabled on hook when holding
(SLT).
SLT
(default = 749)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer On Hook
When Holding (SLT)
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for the
answer on hook when holding
(SLT).
SLT
(default = 759)
11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Waiting Answer/
Split Answer
If required, use this program to
change the code users dial to Split
while on a call.
SLT
(default = 794)
3
11-12-48
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Account Code
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for the
account code.
SLT
(default = # #)
3
11-12-50
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – General Purpose Relay
Define the service code to be used
for turning the general purpose
relay on and off.
MLT, SLT
(default = 780)
3
11-12-46
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
2 - 527
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-51
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – VM Access (In-Mail
and VMS)
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for the VM
access (In-Mail and VMS).
MLT, SLT
(default = 8)
3
11-12-52
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Live Monitoring
(In-Mail)
Define access code used for
In-Mail Live Monitoring (VRS). At
default this program is not set.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-12-53
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Live Recording at SLT
Use to customize the Service
Codes which are used for live
recording at SLT.
MLT, SLT
(default = 654)
3
11-12-54
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – VRS Routing for ANI/
DNIS
Define the service code to use
when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing
to the VRS Automated Attendant.
Using the Transfer feature, this
also allows a call to be transferred
to the VRS.
(default = 782)
11-12-56
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – E911 Alarm Shut Off
Select the Service Code that an
extension user can dial to shut off
the E911 Alarm Ring (US Only).
MLT
(default = 786)
3
11-12-57
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Tandem Trunking
With two trunks in Conference
press the Hold key and dial and the
Conference/Tandem happens.
MLT, SLT
(default = #8)
3
11-12-58
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Transfer Into
Conference
If required, change the service
code used to transfer a call into a
Conference call.
MLT, SLT
(default = 624)
3
11-12-59
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Drop Operation
for SLT
Use to customize the trunk drop
operation for SLT Service Codes
which are used for service access.
SLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-13-01
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD LogIn/Log Out (for KTS)
Assign for multiline terminals and
single line telephones.
MLT, SLT
(default =
5)
3
11-13-02
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Log Out (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 655)
3
11-13-03
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 656)
3
11-13-04
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Cancel ACD
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 657)
3
11-13-05
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 658)
3
11-13-06
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 659)
3
11-13-08
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Agent ID Code Login
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log
into a group.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-13-09
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Agent ID Code Logout
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to log
out of a group.
MLT
(default not assigned)
3
11-13-10
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Login by Supervisor
Assign to allow an ACD Supervisor
to log into a group.
MLT
(default = 667)
3
2 - 528
3
3
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-13-11
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor
Assign to allow an ACD Supervisor
to log out of a group.
MLT
(default = 668)
11-13-12
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Change Agent ACD Group by
Supervisor
When using service code 669 to
change an agent ACD group, the
supervisor must enter a 2-digit
number for the group. For
example, to change to ACD group
4, the entry would be 669 04.
MLT
(default = 669)
11-13-13
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Changing Own ACD
Group
When this service code is used, an
ACD Agent can reassign
themselves to another ACD Group.
MLT
(default = 670)
3
11-14-01
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Set DND for Own Extension
Use to customize the set DND for
own extension used with the Hotel/
Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 627)
3
11-14-02
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Cancel DND for Own Extension
Use to customize the cancel DND
for own extension used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 628)
3
11-14-03
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Set DND for Other Extension
Use to customize the set DND for
other extension used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 629)
3
11-14-04
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Cancel DND for Other Extension
Use to customize the cancel DND
for other extension used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 630)
3
11-14-05
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Set Wake Up Call for Own
Extension
Use to customize the set wake up
call for own extension used with
the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 631)
3
11-14-06
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Cancel Wake Up Call for Own
Extension
Use to customize the cancel wake
up call for own extension used with
the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 632)
3
11-14-07
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Set Wake Up Call for Other
Extension
Use to customize the set wake up
call for other extension used with
the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 633)
3
11-14-08
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Cancel Wake Up Call for Other
Extension
Use to customize the cancel wake
up call for other extension used
with the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 634)
3
11-14-09
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Set Room to Room Call
Restriction
Use to customize the set room to
room call extension used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 635)
3
11-14-10
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Cancel Room to Room Call
Restriction (Hotel)
Use to customize the cancel room
to room call restriction (hotel) used
with the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 636)
3
11-14-11
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Change Toll Restriction Class for
Other Extension
Use to customize the change toll
restriction class for other extension
used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 637)
3
11-14-12
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Check-In
Use to customize the check-in
Service Codes which are used with
the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 638)
3
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
2 - 529
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-14-13
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Check-Out
Use to customize the check-out
Service Codes which are used with
the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 639)
11-14-14
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Room Status Change for Own
Extension
Use to customize the room status
change for own extension Service
Codes which are used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 640)
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Room Status Change for Other
Extension
Use to customize the room status
change for other extension Service
Codes which are used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 641)
11-14-16
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Room Status Output
Use to customize the room status
output Service Codes which are
used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT
(default = 642)
3
11-14-17
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Hotel Room Monitor
Use to customize the hotel room
monitor Service Codes which are
used with the Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 675)
3
11-14-18
Service Code Setup (for Hotel) –
Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction
Use to customize the set hotel
PMS code restriction Service
Codes which are used with the
Hotel/Motel feature.
MLT
(default = 666)
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Remote Maintenance
Use to customize the remote
maintenance Service Codes which
are used by the administrator in
the Hotel/Motel feature.
(default = 730)
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – ACD Access in Dial-In
Conversion Table
Use to customize the ACD access
in dial-in conversion table Service
Codes which are used by the
administrator in the Hotel/Motel
feature.
(default = 760)
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Backup Data Save
This service code is used for back
up the programmed data on the
SRAM and Call History to the
Flash ROM. While saving the
database, it may cause system
lock up.
MLT
(default = #
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – System Programming
Mode, Log-On
Use to customize the system
programming mode, log-on
Service Codes which are used by
the administrator in the Hotel/Motel
feature.
MLT
(default = #
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Wake on LAN to APSU
Unit
Use to customize the wake on LAN
to APSU unit Service Codes.
MLT
(default not assigned
11-14-15
11-15-01
11-15-02
11-15-03
11-15-05
11-15-06
2 - 530
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
# 9)
3
# )
3
3
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
11-15-09
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Transfer to Incoming
Ring Group
When a call is transferred using
this service code, it is transferred
to the ring group destination for
that incoming trunk. For example,
trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4. When
the call is transferred using this
service code, the trunk rings all
extensions programmed for Ring
Group 4 or ring the External
Paging Group for Ring Group 4,
depending on how the system is
programmed.
(default not assigned)
2
3
11-15-11
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Ethernet Port Reset
Use to customize the ethernet port
reset Service Codes.
(default not assigned)
11-15-12
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Extension Data Swap
Ext. Data Swap = xxx (service
code in accordance with Program
11-01).
MLT
(default not assigned)
11-15-13
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Remote Access from
DISA
Use to customize the service code
for Remote Access for DISA.
(default not assigned)
11-15-14
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Modem Access
Assign the service code to be used
to access the internal modem on
the CD-CP00-AU.
(default = 740)
11-16-01
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Step Call
Assign the Single Digit
(post-dialing) Service Codes.
(default = 2)
11-16-02
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Use this option to set up Item 02
for single digit Barge-In. For
example, you can assign Item 02
to use digit 5 for Barge-In. This
would allow you to program a
function key with an extension
number plus the Barge-In code
(i.e., 5). This allows one-touch
access to the Barge-In feature for
extension.
(default not assigned)
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Switching of Voice/Signal Call
Use to customize the switching of
Voice/Signal call Service Codes
used when a busy or ring back
signal is heard.
(default = 1)
11-16-04
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Assign a one-digit service code to
be used for Off-Hook Signaling.
(default = )
3
11-16-05
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Camp-On
Customize the 1-digit Service
Code used for setting Camp-On.
(default = #)
3
11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
Customize the 1-digit Service
Code used for DND/Call Forward
Override.
(default not assigned)
11-16-03
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 531
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-16-07
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Message Waiting
Use to customize the message
waiting Service Codes used when
a busy or ring back signal is heard.
(default = 0)
11-16-08
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Voice Over
Service code used for the Voice
Over feature.
(default = 6)
11-16-09
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Access to Voice Mail
Use to customize the access to
voice mail Service Codes used
when a busy or ring back signal is
heard.
(default = 8)
11-16-10
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– (Department) STG All Ring
Mode
Assign the Single Digit
(post-dialing) Service Code for All
Member Ring.
(default not assigned)
11-16-11
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Station Park Hold
Customize the one-digit service
code to be used when placing a
call in Personal Park.
(default not assigned)
11-20-01
Dial Extension Analyze Table –
Dial Digits
Use tables 01 ~ 128 to assign the
digits to be dialed using the Dial
Extension Analyze Tables. These
tables are used when Program
11-01-01 is set to option 9 = Dial
Extension Analyze. Up to eight
digits can be assigned
Dial (Up to eight digits:
0, 1~9, #, , @)
Assign the Type of Dial for the
Extension Analyze Table from
Program 11-20-01.
Type of Dials:
0 = Not used
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access
(default not assigned)
11-20-02
Dial Extension Analyze Table –
Type of Dials
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Operation
None
2 - 532
Flexible System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Flexible Timeouts
Description
The Flexible Timeouts feature provides a variety of timers in the Resident System Program to allow the
system to operate without initial programming. The system timers can be changed to meet customer
needs according to the system application requirements.
A Timer Class is used to allow terminals and trunks to have different timers for the same feature. There
are 16 timer Classes (0~15). The following table shows the Programs that are used depending on the
Timer Class used:
Timer
Class 0
Timer
Class 1~15
20-01-08
20-31-01
Trunk Queuing Callback
Time
Trunk Queuing callback rings an extension for this
time. Station Timer Class is referred by the station
that sets trunk queuing.
20-01-09
20-31-02
Callback / Trunk Queuing
Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk
Queuing request after this time. Station Timer Class
is referred by the station that sets an extension
Callback or Trunk Queuing.
20-04-03
20-31-03
CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension
Delay Interval
If CAR/VE is set for Delayed Ringing (Program
15-11-01), ring the covering extension after this
time. Station Timer Class is referred by the station
assigned to CAR/VE.
21-01-02
20-31-04
Intercom Interdigits Time
When placing Intercom calls, users must dial each
digit in this time. Station Timer Class is referred by
stations. Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID/
Automatic Answer Trunk/E&M trunks.
21-01-03
20-31-05
Trunk Interdigits Time
When placing CO calls, users must dial each digit in
this time. Station Timer Class is referred by
stations. Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID/
Automatic Answer Trunk/E&M trunks.
21-01-09
20-31-06
Hotline Time Start Time
A Ringdown extension automatically calls its
programmed destination after this time. Station
Timer Class is referred by the stations which sets
Hotline.
22-01-03
20-31-07
Ring No Answer Alarm
Time
If a trunk rings a key telephone longer than this time,
the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates
to the user that the call was ringing too long. Trunk
Timer Class is referred by the trunk.
22-01-04
20-31-08
DIL No Answer Recall Time
A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer
than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (Program 22-08-01). Trunk Timer Class is
referred by the trunk.
Title
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
Comment
2 - 533
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Timer
Class 0
Timer
Class 1~15
22-01-06
20-31-09
DID Ring-No-Answer Time
In systems with DID Ring No Answer Intercept, this
time sets the Ring No Answer time. This time is how
long a DID call rings the destination extension
before rerouting to the intercept ring group. Trunk
Timer Class is referred by DID trunk.
24-01-01
20-31-10
Hold Recall Time (Non
Exclusive Hold)
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on
Hold after this time. Station Timer Class is referred
by held call.
24-01-02
20-31-11
Hold Recall Callback Time
(Non Exclusive Hold)
A Hold recall rings an extension for this time.
Station Timer Class is referred by held call.
24-01-03
20-31-12
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on
Hold after this time. Station Timer Class is referred
by held call.
24-01-04
20-31-13
Exclusive Hold Recall
Callback Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this
time. If not picked up, the call goes back on Non
exclusive Hold. Station Timer Class is referred by
held call.
24-01-06
20-31-14
Park Hold Time – Normal
A call left parked longer than this time recalls the
extension that initially parked it. Trunk or Station
Timer Class is referred by held call.
24-02-03
20-31-15
Delayed Call Forwarding
Time
If activated at an extension, No Answer Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. Station Timer
Class is referred by the station sets No Answer Call
Forward.
24-02-04
20-31-16
Transfer Recall Time
A transferred call recalls to the extension that initially
transferred it after this time. Station Timer Class is
referred by transferred call.
25-07-02
20-31-17
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
After this time expires, the call follows the
programmed Ring No Answer routing (Program 2503 and 25-04-01). Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-03
20-31-18
Disconnect after VRS/DISA
Re-transfer to IRG
Disconnect after re-transfer to Incoming Ring Group.
Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-07
20-31-19
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
Determine the time trunk-to-trunk conversation can
talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard.
Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-08
20-31-20
Long Conversation
Disconnect Time
This timer determines how long the system waits
before disconnecting a trunk-to-trunk conversation
call after the Long Conversation tone is heard.
Trunk Timer Class is referred.
25-07-09
20-31-21
DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call. Trunk Timer Class is referred.
2 - 534
Title
Comment
Flexible Timeouts
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Timer
Class 0
Timer
Class 1~15
Title
25-07-10
20-31-22
DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an External Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call. Trunk Timer Class is referred.
31-01-02
20-31-23
Page Announcement
Duration
This timer sets the maximum length of External
Page announcements. Station or Trunk Timer Class
is referred by the caller makes announcement.
Comment
Conditions
Timer Classes are used for CAR/VE also.
When Timer Class is set to 0 it uses the system-wide timers.
All stations and trunks are assigned to Timer Class 0 at default.
Both system-wide timers (Timer Class 0) and Timer Class timers (Timer Class 1~15) can be
used in the same system.
Default Setting
Timer Class set to 0 for all trunks and extensions.
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 535
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
20-01-08
System Options – Trunk Queuing
Callback Time
Set the Trunk Queuing callback
time. A Trunk Queuing Callback
rings an extension for this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 15 seconds)
3
20-01-09
System Options – Callback/
Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queueing
request after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 64800
seconds)
3
20-04-03
System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed Ringing
(see Program 15-11) ring the
extension after this interval.
0~64800
(default = 10 seconds)
Timer Class for Extensions
Assign the timer class (0~15) to
each extension for each Night
mode. This entry includes virtual
extension number.
0~15
0 = Not assigned
(default = 0)
20-29-01
Timer Class for Trunks
Assign the timer class (0~15) to
each trunk for each Night mode.
0~15, #,
0 = Not assigned
(default = 0)
20-31-01
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Trunk Queuing Callback
Duration Time
Trunk Queuing Callback rings an
extension for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 15 seconds)
20-31-02
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel
Time
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queueing
request after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 64800
seconds)
20-31-03
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay
Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed Ringing
(refer to 15-11: Virtual Extension
Delayed Ring Assignment) ring the
extension after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Intercom Interdigits Time
(Intercom I/D Timer)
When placing Intercom calls,
extension users must dial each digit
within time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
2 - 536
3
3
20-30-01
20-31-04
3
3
3
3
3
3
Flexible Timeouts
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-31-05
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Trunk Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D
Timer)
The system waits for this time to
expire before placing the call in a
talk state (Call Timer starts after
time expires, Voice Over and
Barge-In are not allowed until after
time expires).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
20-31-06
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline
Start)
A Ringdown extension
automatically calls its programmed
destination after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
20-31-07
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Ring No Answer Alarm Time
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone
longer than this interval, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call
has been ringing too long.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
DIL/Incoming Ring Group No
Answer Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this time
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
DID Ring-No-Answer Time
In systems with DID
Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this
interval sets the Ring-No-Answer
time. This interval is how long a DID
call rings the destination extension
before rerouting to the intercept ring
group.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive
Hold)
A call on Hold recalls the extension
that placed it on Hold after this time.
This time works with the Hold
Recall Callback Time (Program 2401- 02).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non
Exclusive Hold)
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park
rings an extension for this time.
This time works with Hold Recall
Time or Park Hold Time. After this
time, the system invokes the Hold
Recall Time again. Cycling between
time Program 24-01-01 and 24-0102 and Program 24-01-06 and 2401-07 continues until a user
answers the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
20-31-08
20-31-09
20-31-10
20-31-11
3
3
3
3
3
3
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold
after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
20-31-13
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback
Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked
up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Park Hold Time – Normal
A call left parked longer than this
time, recalls the extention that
initially parked it.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
20-31-12
20-31-14
2
3
3
3
2 - 537
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
20-31-15
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
(Call Forward No Answer)
If activated at an extension,
Delayed Call Forwarding occurs
after this time. This also sets how
long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail
before routing to the called
extension mailbox.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
20-31-16
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Transfer Recall Time
An unanswered transferred call
recalls after this time to the
extension that initially transferred it.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
20-31-17
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
DID/DISA No Answer Time
(Disconnect or IRG or VM)
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring
No Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and 25-04).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
20-31-18
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Disconnect after Re-transfer to
IRG
Use to assign Disconnect after Retransfer to IRG time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
20-31-19
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time (Trunk to Trunk)
Determine the time a DISA caller or
any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can last
before the Long Conversation tone
is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 180 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Long Conversation Disconnect
(Trunk to Trunk)
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting
a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an
Internal Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an
External Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
20-31-23
Timer Class Timer Assignment –
Page Announcement Duration
This timer sets the maximum length
of Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1200
seconds)
21-01-02
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the time-out interval for DID
callers that do not dial. After this
interval, the DID call routes
according to Vacant Number
Intercept programming.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10 seconds)
20-31-20
20-31-21
20-31-22
2 - 538
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Flexible Timeouts
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
21-01-03
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
Program how long an extension
must wait before using the Barge-In
feature can be used on a call (this
timer waits until it expires before
putting a call in a talk state). This
timer also affects Voice Over.
0~64800 seconds
(default = 5 seconds)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Ringdown Extension
Timer (Hotline Start)
After the user lifts the handset, the
extension automatically calls the
ringdown destination after this
interval. A setting of 0 immediately
rings the programmed extension.
Any other setting delays the
ringdown the number of seconds
programmed.
0~64800 seconds
(default = 0 seconds)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Ring No Answer Alarm
Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm
interval. If a trunk rings a multiline
terminal longer than this interval,
the system changes the ring
cadence.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DID Ring-No-Answer
Time
Set the DID Ring No Answer (RNA)
Intercept time (0~64800 seconds).
In systems with RNA Intercept, the
DID call rings the destination
extension for this time, and then
rings Intercept Ring Group.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20 seconds)
24-01-01
System Options for Hold – Hold
Recall Time
Set the Hold Recall Time. A call on
Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
3
24-01-02
System Options for Hold – Hold
Recall Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Callback Time.
A trunk recalling from Hold rings an
extension for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
3
24-01-03
System Options for Hold –
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time.
A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold
after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
System Options for Hold –
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback
Time
Set the Hold Recall Time. A trunk
recalling from Hold rings an
extension for this time. If still
unanswered, the call changes to
System Hold.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
21-01-09
22-01-03
22-01-04
22-01-06
24-01-04
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 539
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
24-01-06
24-02-03
24-02-04
25-07-02
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Hold – Park
Hold Time - Normal
Set the Park Hold Time (0~64800
seconds). A call that is parked
longer than the programmed
interval recalls the extension where
it was initially parked.
Refer to Flexible System
Numbering on page 2-515 for
setting Flexible Timeouts for Class
of Service.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90 seconds)
System Options for Transfer –
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding
interval. For an unanswered call,
Call Forward No Answer occurs
after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Options for Transfer –
Transfer Recall Time
Set the Transfer Recall Time. An
unanswered transferred call recalls
to the extension that initially
transferred it after this interval. This
time also sets how long a
transferred call camps-on to a busy
extension.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring
No Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and Program 25-04).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
2
3
3
3
3
25-07-03
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Disconnect after VRS/DISA
retransfer to IRG
Define the system timers which
affect DID and DISA after VRS/
DISA retransfer to IRG.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60 seconds)
3
25-07-07
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller or
any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can talk
before the Long Conversation tone
is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800
seconds)
3
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting
a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an
Internal Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
25-07-08
25-07-09
2 - 540
3
3
3
Flexible Timeouts
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
25-07-10
31-01-02
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an
External Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30 seconds)
System Options for Internal/
External Paging – Page
Announcement Duration
Set the maximum allowable
duration for a Paging
announcement.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1200
seconds)
2
3
3
3
Operation
Please refer to the feature for the operation.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 541
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 542
Flexible Timeouts
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Description
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension active
outside call. The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user
access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no other trunks are available. Maintenance technicians can
also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen
if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use
this feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available.
Conditions
This feature only works on an analog trunk. ISDN and IP trunks do not have the Forced Trunk
Disconnect available.
Default Setting
COS 15 = Enabled
COS 1~14 = Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
Analog Trunks
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 543
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-10-26
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Forced Trunk
Disconnect
Assign the Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
3
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (COS)
to an extension. There are 15
Classes of Service that can be
assigned. Assign eight entries,
one for each Night Service Mode.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns Off or On an extension to
use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
This allows the extension to
disconnect an Unsupervised
Conference in progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)
3
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Reset Dial After Failure of
Trunk Access
Enable or Disable an extension
user ability to continue to dial
codes or extensions after
receiving Trunk Busy. This must
be Enabled for this feature to
work.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
20-07-11
21-01-18
2 - 544
2
3
3
Forced Trunk Disconnect
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Operation
To disconnect a busy trunk:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press line key for trunk.
- OR -
Dial trunk access code (#0 + trunk number).
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001~200.
2.
Dial the Service Code (not set at default).
You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk.
You can now place a call on the free trunk.
3.
Press the line key for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.0
Dial the trunk access code (#0 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number).
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001~200.
2.
Dial Service Code (not set at default).
You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line.
3.
Hookflash.
You can now place a call on the free line.
4.
Dial the trunk access code (#0 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 545
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 546
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Group Call Pickup
Description
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing another extension in a
Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each other’s
calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed
Group Call Pickup key. If several extensions in the group are ringing at the same time, Group
Call Pickup intercepts the call based on the extension priority within the Pickup Group.
With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following calls:
A call ringing the user’s own pickup group
A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number
A call ringing another pickup group when the user does not know the group number
G
There are 64 Call Pickup Groups available.
Conditions
A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name.
Group Call Pickup cannot be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park.
Group Call Pickup cannot be used to answer calls ringing Call Arrival Keys or
Virtual Extensions.
Virtual Extensions can use Group Call Pickup to answer calls ringing a multiline
terminal or single line telephone.
Users can pickup calls regardless of their access map programming.
Directed Call Pickup provides another way of answering a co-worker’s call.
Function keys simplify Group Call Pickup operation.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 547
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Directed Call Pickup
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-25
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Call Pickup Own Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for direct call pickup – own
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 756)
3
11-12-26
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup for specified
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 768)
3
11-12-27
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup.
MLT, SLT
(default = #)
3
11-12-28
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Another Group
Use to customize the Service
Codes for call pickup for another
group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 769)
3
2 - 548
2
3
Group Call Pickup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
23-02-01
Issue 1.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Group Call Pickup keys:
Code 24 for an extension Pickup
Group and ring group calls (Service
Code #)
Code 25 for a telephone ringing in
another Pickup Group when the
caller does not know the group
number (Service Code 769)
Code 26 (+ group) for a telephone
ringing in another specific Pickup
Group (Service Code 768)
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
3
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
In an extension Class of Service,
enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension user ability to pick up
calls ringing their pickup group
(Service Code 756).
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turns Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turns Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
Call Pickup Groups
Assign extensions to Pickup
Groups. Also, use this option to
assign an extension priority in a
Pickup Group (Priority Number
1~999).
Call Pickup Groups:
1~9 or 01~64
(default = 1 – xxx)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
2 - 549
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To answer a call ringing another telephone in your Pickup Group:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
At multiline terminal only, press the Group Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 24).
- OR -
Dial 756 or #.
Service Code # can pick up any call in the group, plus any Ring Group calls. Service Code 756 cannot pick up
Ring Group calls.
To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you do not know the group
number:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
At multiline terminal only, press the Group Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 25).
- OR -
Dial 769.
To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
At multiline terminal only, press the Group Call Pickup key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 26 + group).
- OR -
Dial 768 and the group number (1~9 or 01~64).
2 - 550
Group Call Pickup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Group Listen
Description
Group Listen permits a multiline terminal user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice
broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the multiline terminal user’s co-workers listen to the
conversation. Group Listen turns off the multiline terminal handsfree microphone so the caller does not
pick the co-worker’s voices during a Group Listen.
Conditions
An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen.
Group Listen is not available to single line telephones.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Digital Multiline Terminal
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Handset Operation
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 551
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-13-26
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Turns Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
2
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
3
Operation
To initiate Group Listen:
1.
Place or answer call using the handset.
2.
Press Speaker twice (but do not hang up).
Speaker flashes slowly.
You can talk to the caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your caller’s voice over your telephone
speaker after pressing Speaker twice. Press Speaker a third time to turn off Group Listening.
To talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen:
1.
Hang up the handset.
To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call):
1.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press the flashing Speaker.
You can talk to the caller over the handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear the caller’s voice.
2 - 552
Group Listen
Handset Mute
Description
Handset Mute is provided to most terminals connected to the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
While talking on the Multiline Terminal handset, a station user can dial a feature code or press
the MIC button to mute the transmit speech path. The station user can still hear the outside (or
intercom) voice.
Conditions
The MIC Key and/or Handset Transmission Cut Off key flashes when active.
Two service set tones are heard when Handset Mute is activated or deactivated.
The called party must have answered using handset or speakerphone for the
mute feature to work.
H
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 553
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
80-01-01
80-01-02
2 - 554
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Service Tone Setup – Repeat
Count
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
Assign a function key for Handset
Transmission Cut Off (code 40).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Customize the system basic tones
and system service tones. You
need to reset for the changes to
take affect.
0~255 (default = 0 until
On-Hook)
Refer to Table 2-14
Service Tone Setup,
Program 80-01-01 on
page 2-555
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the must
be reset for the changes to take
effect.
Call Screening
Call Holding
Busy Greeting
Await Answer Transfer
1~33
(0 = No Tone)
(33=Default Time Slot)
Refer to Table 2-15
Service Tone Setup,
Program 80-01-02 on
page 2-558
2
3
3
3
3
Handset Mute
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-14 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-01
Service
Tone No.
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
1
No Tone
0
Basic 1
0
10
32 (0dB)
2
Intercom Dial Tone
0
Basic 1
9
10
32 (0dB)
3
Stutter Dial Tone
0
Basic 6
0
9
0
9
0
9
2
1
1
1
1
77
32 (0dB)
4
Internal Recall Dial Tone
2
Basic 2
9
0
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
5
Trunk Dial Tone
0
Basic 1
9
10
32 (0dB)
6
Internal Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
0
11
5
5
20 (-6dB)
20 (-6dB)
7
DND Busy Tone and Selectable
Display Message Tone
0
Basic 2
0
1
2
2
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
8
Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
0
11
5
5
20 (-6dB)
20 (-6dB)
9
Internal Reorder Tone
0
Basic 2
11
0
3
2
20 (-6dB)
20 (-6dB)
10
Internal Interrupt Tone
0
Basic 2
0
1
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
11
Internal Confirmation Tone
3
Basic 2
0
6
5
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
12
Internal Hold Tone
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
13
External Hold Tone
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
14
Intercom Ringback Tone
0
Basic 2
9
0
10
20
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
15
Override Tone
1
Basic 1
12
5
32 (0dB)
16
Lock-Out Tone
0
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
17
Clock Alarm Tone
0
Basic 4
6
0
6
0
1
1
1
7
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
18
BGM
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
19
Door Box Chime 1
3
Basic 6
4
4
2
2
2
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
20
Door Box Chime 2
3
Basic 6
7
7
5
5
5
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 555
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-14 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-01 (Continued)
Service
Tone No.
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
21
Door Box Chime 3
3
Basic 6
8
8
6
6
6
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
22
Door Box Chime 4
3
Basic 6
4
4
2
2
2
0
1
1
2
2
3
2
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
23
Door Box Chime 5
3
Basic 6
7
7
5
5
5
0
1
1
2
2
3
2
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
24
Door Box Chime 6
3
Basic 6
8
8
6
6
6
0
1
1
2
2
3
2
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
25
Service Set Tone
3
Basic 2
0
9
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
26
Service Clear Tone
3
Basic 2
0
9
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
27
Talkback Tone
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
28
Speaker Monitor Tone
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
This tone is what the originator hears
when placing a handsfree speaker ICM
call.
29
Door Relay Tone
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
30
Door Box Call Tone
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
31
Paging Tone
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32
Splash Tone 1
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
33
Splash Tone 2
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
34
Splash Tone 3
3
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
35
1 Second Signal Tone
1
Basic 1
6
10
32 (0dB)
36
Sensor Alarm Tone 1
0
Basic 2
7
0
2
2
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
37
Sensor Alarm Tone 2
0
Basic 2
7
0
5
5
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
2 - 556
Handset Mute
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-14 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-01 (Continued)
Service
Tone No.
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
38
Sensor Alarm Tone 3
0
Basic 2
7
0
7
7
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
39
Ring Busy Tone
0
Basic 6
0
11
0
11
10
0
5
5
5
5
10
20
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
40
Internal Call Waiting Tone
1
Basic 1
12
2
32 (0dB)
41
Intrusion Tone
1
Basic 1
12
5
32 (0dB)
42
Conference Tone
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
43
Intrusion Tone 2
0
Basic 1
2
8
32 (0dB)
44
External Dial Tone
0
Basic 1
9
1
26 (-3dB)
45
External Ring Back Tone
0
Basic 2
10
0
10
30
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
46
DID Error Tone
0
Basic 2
11
0
5
5
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
47
External Busy Tone
0
Basic 1
11
0
32 (0dB)
48
Voice Mail Message Waiting,
Special Dial
0
Basic 2
9
0
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
Stutter Dial Tone (Analog Sets)
49
--- Not Used ---
50
External Special Audible Ring Tone
0
3
10
12
0
10
2
30
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
51
External Intercept Tone
0
2
12
4
3
2
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
52
External Call Waiting Tone
1
1
12
3
32 (0dB)
53
External Executive Override Tone
1
1
12
10
32 (0dB)
54
--- Not Used ---
55
Generate tone for TAPI2.1
0
Basic 1
3
0
32 (0dB)
56
Warning Beep Tone Signaling
1
Basic 1
2
8
32 (0dB)
57
Headset Ear Piece Ringing Tone
0
Basic 5
0
2
0
2
0
2
1
1
1
20
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
58
Opening Chime Tone,
1
Basic 8
2
2
14
14
15
15
16
16
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
External Paging
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 557
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-14 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-01 (Continued)
Service
Tone No.
59
Service Tone
Ending Chime Tone,
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
1
Basic 8
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
External Paging
60
Splash Tone 1 (Mute)
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
8 (-12dB)
8 (-12dB)
61
Splash Tone 2 (Mute)
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
8 (-12dB)
8 (-12dB)
62
Splash Tone 3 (Mute)
3
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
8 (-12dB)
8 (-12dB)
63
EXT SPK Ring-back Tone
0
Basic 2
10
0
10
30
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
64
Music on Hold (MOH)
0
0
0
0
32 (0dB)
Table 2-15 Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-02
Item No.
Item
Repeat Count
1~33
0 = No Tone
33=Default Time Slot
02
Basic Tone Number
03
Duration Count
1~255
(100~25500ms)
04
Gain Level (dB)
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5)
Operation
While talking on a terminal handset:
1.
Press MIC.
- OR -
2.
Press Feature + dial 1.
- OR -
3.
Press the Handset Transmission Cut-Off key (Program15-07-01; Key 40 or SC 751 Key Code 40).
2 - 558
Handset Mute
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Handsfree and Monitor
Description
Handsfree allows a Multiline Terminal user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the
telephone instead of the handset. Handsfree is a convenience for workers who do not have a free hand to
pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands while
talking on the telephone.
There are three variations of Handsfree.
Handsfree
The user can press Speaker to place and answer calls instead of using the handset.
Automatic Handsfree
The user can press a trunk line key or virtual extension key without lifting the handset or pressing
the Speaker key. An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for outgoing calls or for both
outgoing calls and incoming calls.
Monitor
User can place a call without lifting the handset, but must lift the handset to speak.
Conditions
Handsfree and Monitor are not available for single line telephones.
Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus
determines what happens when the user presses the speaker key.
Monitoring volume may be adjusted using the volume control on the Multiline Terminal.
When a Multiline Terminal user lifts the handset, the monitoring condition is automatically
released, and the Speaker LED goes off.
A Multiline Terminal is considered off-hook by the system when this feature is used.
Default Setting
Enabled
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 559
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Microphone Cutoff
Prime Line Selection
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-02-08
15-02-16
2 - 560
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to set whether
pressing a key accesses a
One-Touch Key (1) or if it
preselects the key (0).
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic Handsfree)
(default = 1)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Handsfree Operation
Enable (1) or disable (0) ability of
an extension to use the
speakerphone on outside calls.
When disabled, users can hear the
conversion, but cannot respond
handsfree.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
2
3
3
3
Handsfree and Monitor
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-02-12
20-06-01
20-09-05
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Forced Intercom
Ring (ICM Call Type)
Use this option to enable (1) or
disable (0) Forced Intercom
Ringing. If enabled, incoming
Intercom calls normally ring. If
disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.
0 = Disable (Voice)
1 = Enable (Signal)
(default = 1)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1~15) for
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension
ports = Class 1
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to enable Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for their
incoming Intercom calls.
3
3
Operation
To talk Handsfree:
1.
Press Speaker, Trunk Line key or Virtual Extension key.
2.
Place the call.
3.
Speak toward the telephone when the called party answers.
To change a handset call into a Handsfree call:
1.
Press Speaker and hang up the handset.
2.
Press Speaker again to hang up.
To change a Handsfree call into a handset call:
1.
Lift the handset.
To turn on/off Monitor:
1.
Press MIC, Feature + 1, or the Microphone Function Key (Program 15-07 or SC 751 : 02) to Turns
On or off the Microphone.
Monitor is off when MIC LED is lit, the Microphone Function Key is lit, or the handset is lifted.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 561
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 562
Handsfree and Monitor
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Description
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by
speaking toward the telephone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for
workers who do not have a free hand to pick up the handset.
Conditions
Handsfree Answerback does not require the Speaker phone to be enabled
(Program 15-02-16).
A Multiline Terminal user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the
telephone (instead of the handset).
With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a
single beep (instead of two).
Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones.
The extension you are calling must be set to Voice for this feature to work.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Handsfree and Monitor
Microphone Cutoff
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 563
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-11-15
11-11-16
11-12-06
15-02-16
20-02-12
20-06-01
2 - 564
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Numbering – Enable
Handsfree Incoming Intercom
Calls
If required, change the service code
used for setting an extension to
voice announce for incoming ICM
calls.
MLT
(default = 721)
System Numbering – Force
Ringing of Incoming Intercom
Calls
If required, change the service code
used for setting an extension to
forced ringing for incoming ICM
calls.
MLT
(default = 723)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Switching of Voice
Call and Signal Call
If required, change the service code
used for toggling an outgoing ICM
call between a voice call and signal
call.
MLT, SLT
(default = 712)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Handsfree Operation
Enable (1) or disable (0) ability of
an extension to use the
speakerphone on outside calls.
When disabled, users can hear the
conversion, but cannot respond
handsfree.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Forced Intercom
Ring (ICM Call Type)
Use this option to enable (1) or
disable (0) Forced Intercom
Ringing. If enabled, incoming
Intercom calls normally ring. If
disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.
0 = Disable (Voice)
1 = Enable (Signal)
(default = 1)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to
an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension
ports = Class 1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
20-08-10
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
20-09-05
In an extension Class of Service,
enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension ability to toggle between
Handsfree Answerback and Forced
Intercom Ringing for outgoing
Intercom calls (dial 1 or Service
Code 712).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Turns Off or On an extension ability
to enable Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for their
incoming Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3
3
3
Operation
To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls:
1.
Press idle Speaker.
2.
Dial 721.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up.
This disables Forced Intercom Ringing.
To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls:
1.
Press idle Speaker.
2.
Dial 723.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up.
This disables Handsfree Answerback.
To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling:
1.
Dial 1.
If ringing, your call voice-announces. If voice-announced, your call starts to ring the destination. This option is
also available at single line telephones.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 565
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 566
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Headset Operation
Description
A multiline terminal user can use a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using
Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, Headset Operation
provides privacy not available from Handsfree.
As the headset plugs into a separate jack on the bottom of the telephone, the handset can still be
connected to the telephone. This gives you the option to use the handset, headset or the speakerphone
for calls.
Conditions
While using the headset, the Headset function key becomes a release (disconnect) key and
no dial tone is heard from the speaker.
While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.
The Headset Programmable Function key (05) and Headset service code (688) are not
available for the Professional telephones.
An extension with a headset can still receive voice-announced Intercom calls and respond
handsfree when idle.
A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
Headset
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 567
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-62
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Headset Ring
Volume Adjustment
If needed, change the service code
used to adjust the Headset Ring
Volume.
MLT
(default = 662)
15-02-41
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Incoming Ring Setup
Determine if incoming calls ring the
speaker or headset.
0 = Speaker Normal
Ring
1 = Headset Ring
(default = 0)
3
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Incoming Off-Hook Ring
Setup
Determine if incoming off-hook
ringing rings the speaker or the
headset.
0 = Speaker Off-Hook
Ring
1 = Headset Off-Hook
Ring
(default = 0)
3
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Headset Ring Duration
If incoming ringing is set for headset, 0 = No Switch to
set the duration the call rings the
Speaker Ring
headset before ringing the speaker.
1 = 10 seconds
2 = 20 seconds
3 = 30 seconds
4 = 40 seconds
5 = 50 seconds
6 = 1 minute
(default = 0)
15-02-42
15-02-43
15-07-01
2 - 568
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for Headset
Operation (code 05).
3
3
3
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)
3
Headset Operation
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-02-05
Issue 1.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
System Options for Multiline
Set the conditions under which a
0 = No
Telephones – Headset Busy Mode headset extension is busy to
1 = Yes
incoming callers:
(default = 0)
The Headset extension is busy to
incoming callers when only one
extension appearance is busy (0).
- OR Headset extension is busy to
incoming callers only when both
extension appearances are busy
(1).
3
20-02-12
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Forced Intercom
Ring (ICM Call Type)
0 = Disable (Voice)
1 = Enable (Signal)
(default = 1)
3
20-09-07
Class of Service Options (Incoming Turns Off (0) or On (1) an extension
Call Service) – Call Queuing
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3
20-13-06
Determine whether intercom calls
should ring or voice-announce
extensions.
Allows a busy extension to Manually
(0) or Automatically (1) receive offhook signals.
3
Operation
To enable the headset:
1.
Plug in the headset into the headset jack on the bottom of the telephone.
2.
Program a Headset key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 05).
You hear a confirmation beep.
To use the headset:
The Headset key lights when on a call. To disconnect, press the Headset key again.
You can still use the handset for calls or respond to voice-announced Intercom calls with the headset plugged
in. The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed.
Answer a ringing call by pressing the Headset key.
- OR -
Press the Headset key and then a line key or press Speaker then 9 to make a outgoing call.
- OR -
Press the Headset key to get intercom dial tone.
- OR -
If on a call, press the Headset key to hang up.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 569
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 570
Headset Operation
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Hold
Description
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or
Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold, the
extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension
that placed them on Hold. There are four types of Hold:
System Hold
An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other multiline
terminals. Any multiline terminal user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.
Exclusive Hold
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold. The
trunk appears busy to all other multiline terminals that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is
important if a user does not want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.
Group Hold
If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick
up the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up each other’s calls.
Intercom Hold
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other
extension.
Hold Recall to Operator
Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that are left on hold too long. With Hold
Recall to Operator:
A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Time.
The recalling trunk rings the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall
Callback Time.
After the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time, the trunk call rings the operator.
Hold Recall to Operator applies to trunk calls placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold and Group Hold. It
does not apply to Intercom calls.
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2 - 571
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
The called extension must lift the handset or press the Speaker key before the call can be
placed on hold.
Callers on Hold hear Music on Hold, if programmed.
An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold.
Analog single line telephones can only use Exclusive Hold and Group Hold.
If station A calls station B, and station A puts station B on hold and then calls station C,
station C cannot transfer the call.
In order for a station to retrieve a held ICM call, the station must have an ICM key assigned
in 15-07 ( 00).
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Music on Hold
Programmable Function Keys
Single Line Telephones
2 - 572
Hold
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.
Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.
Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-12-30
11-12-33
11-12-34
14-01-16
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for
Service Access) – Specified
Trunk Answer
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 672)
Service Code Setup (for
Service Access) – Group
Hold
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 732)
Service Code Setup (for
Service Access) – Answer for
Group Hold
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 762)
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Forced Release of Held Call
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced
Release of Held Call.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
2
3
3
3
3
3
2 - 573
Issue 1.0
Program
Number
14-07-01
15-02-06
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets the access options for
trunks.
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access only
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and
access when trunk on
Hold
5 = Incoming access and
access when trunk on
Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on
Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is on
Hold).
2
3
3
Multiline Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Hold Key
Operating Mode
Use this option to set the function of
the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key
can activate normal Hold or
Exclusive Hold.
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
Multiline Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Aut